Home

MS-4 Imager User Manual

1. Function If a command with multiple fields is processed some of the fields may have been processed properly while others were not The changes will appear in the string echoed back so that the user will know which fields did or did not change Serial Cmd lt K701 serial command echo status serial command beep status control hex output Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Serial Command Beep Status Usage Used to audibly verify the acceptance and validity of a command Definition Causes the Imager to beep once whenever a K command is entered to indicate that the command was accepted and processed Function If an invalid command is entered the Imager beeps 5 times to indicate an invalid entry However this does not necessarily mean that all data fields have been entered incorrectly Only one bad field needs to be found in order to activate the 5 beep response Serial Cmd K701 serial command echo status serial command beep status control hex output Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled MS 4 Imager User Manual 7 23 Serial Verification Control Hex Output Usage Useful for viewing settings with binary characters when using serial commands on a terminal Definition Determines the response to a Serial Command Echo or status request command When set to Control two characters are transmitted to represent a non displayable character For example a carriage
2. Default Reset Save lt Zrd gt for Power On lt Zre gt Recall Customer Default Parameters and Save for Power On lt gt Imager Status Byte lt K gt All Status Request Imager Status lt K gt All Descriptor Status Request Request Commands lt K gt All Range Status Request lt Knnn gt Single Status Request lt Knnn gt Single Descriptor Status Request lt Knnn gt Single Range Status Request Other Operational Commands MS 4 Imager User Manual lt uy path filename gt Y Modem Upload Transfer Options lt dy path filename gt Y Modem Download Transfer Options lt op 9 gt Image Library Request lt CAL gt Autocalibrate lt BCCFG gt Enter Bar Code Configuration lt VAL gt Static Validation 13 3 Read Rate Read Rate Read Rate by ESP You can access Read Rate from the Utilities menu under the Read Rate tab To see the number of decodes per second click the Decodes sec radio button and click the Start button To see the percentage of decodes click the Percent radio button and then the Start button To end a read rate test click the Stop button the Start button becomes a Stop button during an active read rate test Decodes sec Q Stat r Percent P Clear Output if Read Rate by Serial Command Enter Decodes Second Test Sending lt C gt instructs the Imager to transmit the decodes per second and symbol data if any The dec
3. 10 9 Window of Interest eias cen eerte dre deduced eee en dee Eee eco dees Ee nene de iere dint 10 10 Configuration Database isisisi eiie ere deceret dene diaii ii aaia Ere Ee ieee 10 13 IB AEInICESIIUCUME 10 14 si Ee erue 10 15 lecurCme M 10 16 Focal DISTANCE vais 10 18 Focal Distance Table Read Only ssssseeeeeeene enm enne nnne 10 19 IP Threshold oorr tne een ee ends cedere ee o ego iU eee gene ee 10 20 Number of Symbols in Field of View c cccceeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeesecaeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeseeneeeess 10 22 Image Processing TimeoUt 5 o ice Peer cete eh dee dee na qp bed fece tool Dee Pee ede gets 10 23 Damaged Symbol SH 21 IS Ree rentrer heated rupe ceat e ERE e dob ees 10 24 IP MOd6 s itera pier impete qi de n aiu a cete cbe Ween bester aces yt teda cese E Dee eerie 10 25 lalelley Mi ero p 10 26 Mirrored ImadQge is seer sank ono e iceee ss eer oer tinge Eee SIUE REI qd POESIE Id cele ete Lace ede dene Seres 10 27 Illumination Brightness 2 ceo rerit i dece rod ecce a ie erede ete teres 10 28 Skew Come Oea T qo Ee a ee eoo Pee ge eee sy anaa an Eaa 10 29 This section provides adjustment parameters for the physical controls of the camera image acquisition database settings and image diagnostics MS 4 Imager Us
4. 40S Su Srccento To use the Virtual COM Port again follow the steps above to re install the driver Changing the COM Port Follow these steps to change the reader s COM Port 1 Right click on My Computer in the Windows Start menu and select Properties 2 Select the Hardware tab in the System Properties dialog and click the Device Manager button Device Manager 3 Expand the Ports COM amp LPT item on the Device Manager menu Right click on Microscan Reader and select Properties 4 Select the Port Settings tab in the Properties dialog and click the Advanced button 5 Expand the COM Port Number menu on the Advanced Settings dialog and select your new COM Port number aee Manager Advanced Settings for COM3 exe V Use FIFO buffers requires 16550 compatible UART Select lower settings to corect connection problems l anc Select higher settings for faster pedomance g eus Receive Buffer Low 1 Q Qus 04 Transmit Buffer Low 1 O naag 9 COM Pot Number cows o O Coe Coe You are now ready to begin using the new COM Port MS 4 Imager User Manual A 27 Glossary of Terms Appendix J Glossary of Terms Aberration The failure of an optical lens to produce an exact point to point correspondence between the object and its resulting image Various types are chromatic spherical coma astigmatism and distortion Absorption The loss of light of
5. column size Camera WOI Full Image Size 640 x 480 Note Since the ROI parameters are not a camera setting a change in ROI parameters from one index to another does not indicate an image capture event This feature is intended to be used in conjunction with Image Process Looping to allow different regions of a captured image to be processed using different IP and decode settings Also if this feature is used in conjunction with Output Filtering multiple decoded symbols in a captured image frame can be output according to their location in the field of view 11 12 MS 4 Imager User Manual Configuration Database Region of Interest ROI by ESP When Image Dimensions is set to Region of Interest the database image dimension parameters are P and decode settings and they determine the region or area of the captured image to be processed Video Evaluation Calibration wol Configuration Database Dynamic Setup Active Indexes 5 v Advanced Options Processing Settings Adapti 128 Stand Disabl white Code 39 22 BE Test Adapti C2 ERE Tent C3 Eile Him GT BEES ces ca ENEEUN GST me Tes Iv Capture for Every Index Show Database Index in Output Sort Index Positions on Good Reads Calibrate Receive Settings Send Settings Load Current To Index A Load Index To Current Threshold Mode Fixed Threshold Value Processing Mode N
6. etes tenen iv teneo pa Enni un 7 2 I O Parameters Serial Commands see 7 3 Symbol Data QutpUt norit rime ede teens eee E Rp acia ues 7 4 iv MS 4 Imager User Manual Introduction No Read Mess ge tee hadi abe dd leads Savehteesceeec sede 7 6 Bad Symbol Messagen ciare e epore niaii ane emen 7 8 No Symbol Message ieiet tineia n aaien iaa nennen 7 8 1D Stacked Symbology Qualification eeeeese 7 9 2D Symbology Qualification sen 7 10 Read Duration Outp t itaenea ie eia ee apaa ERSE 7 16 Output IndiCators 2 eeu edo ci a td Menge aera e ER CREE eei 7 17 21 ED 7 21 LED GConfiguratiori 2 err tie e itd 7 22 Serial Verification 2 2 teet etre ER REP TER 7 23 EZ BURON tee ee DR EEG RERUM ro tense 7 25 EZ Button Modes ice seni reete reve 7 27 Configurable Output 1 tret eee ener 7 29 Trend Analysis Output 1 esse eene 7 32 ISO IEC 16022 Symbol Quality Output 1 eese 7 35 Diagnostic Output 1 terit edente nies 7 38 Configurable Output 2 5 e ee e eine 7 39 Trend Analysis Output 2 sssssseeeene emen 7 39 ISO IEC 16022 Symbol Quality Output 2 eene 7 39 Diagnostic Output 2 2 mnc ren eee netiis 7 39 Configurable Output 3 iere Re Lee e penne 7 40 Trend Analysis Output 3 ssssssseeeeee
7. ROI Processing Settings NE CNN Disi 0 0 40 40 o fe feo o wan B0 l o peo po l O peo e Adapti 128 Stand Disabl white Disabled Test fidapti 128 Stand Disabl white Disabled Test adapt 128 Stand Disabl white Disabled Test Adept 128 Stand Disabl white Disabled Test Adapti 128 Stand Disabl White Disabled Test Disabl Disabl Disab o a 0 a C 10 ps0 o Disabl V Capture for Every Index Show Database Index in Output I Sok Index Portions on Good Rests A Calibrate Beceive Settings SendSetinos LosdCumentTolnde Load Index To Curent Sort Index Positions on Good Reads moves the database entry that produces the first successful decode to the top of the list MS 4 Imager User Manual 11 3 Configuration Database Status Configuration Database Status Index Usage Useful for applications that require several different complex Imager configurations to be applied sequentially Multiple database indexes allow you to concatenate configuration profiles and to perform more complex operations than would be possible with only one set of configuration parameters Definition Determines the specific database index that will be used Serial Cmd K255 index shutter speed gain sub sampling row pointer column pointer row depth column wiath threshold mode fixed
8. USB HID Report Status Microscan HID IN Report Point to Point Disabled Enabled 12 Disabled Disabled To open nested options single click the 3 2 To change a setting double click the setting and use your cursor to scroll through the options MS 4 Imager User Manual Communications Communications Serial Commands Host Port Connections lt K100 baud rate parity stop bits data bits gt Auxiliary Port Connections K101 aux port mode baud rate parity stop bits data bits daisy chain ID status daisy chain ID RS 422 Status lt K102 status gt Host Port Protocol lt K140 protocol address gt Preamble lt K141 status preamble characters gt Postamble lt K142 status postamble characters gt Response Timeout lt K143 response timeout LRC lt K145 status gt Auxiliary Port System Data Status lt K146 aux port system data status ACK NAK Options lt K147 RES REQ STX ETX ACK NAK gt Polling Mode Options USB HID Reports K148 RES REQ STX ETX ACK NAK lt K149 Microscan HID IN Report status Keyboard IN Report status Autoconfiguration Daisy Chain MS 4 Imager User Manual lt K150DAIS Y gt 3 3 Host Port Connections Host Port Connections The host port can be configured with RS 232 and RS 422 connections The following settings define the basic transmission speeds and digital standards that ensure common formatting Bau
9. lt T 00000 gt ETX HOST_TX Nothing Host should ACK here timeout reached IMAGER_TX REQ Unit requests an ACK again timeout reached IMAGER_TX REQ Unit requests an ACK again timeout reached IMAGER_TX REQ Unit requests an ACK again timeout reached IMAGER_TX RES Terminate Transfer 1 data is flushed MS 4 Imager User Manual A 17 Communications Protocol Error Condition 2 HOST_TX RES 0x1C REQ Poll Unit 1 for data IMAGER_TX 0x1C STX lt T 00000 gt ETX HOST_TX Nothing Host should ACK here timeout reached IMAGER_TX REQ Unit requests an ACK again HOST_TX NAK Host rejects data frame Retry Event IMAGER_TX 0x1C STX lt T 00000 gt ETX Unit sends again HOST_TX ACK Host receives data IMAGER_TX RES Terminate Transfer 1 The protocol makes 3 retry attempts before data is flushed and transfer is aborted A 18 MS 4 Imager User Manual Appendices Setup 2 Address 0x01 translates to Poll Req Ox1C Unit Select Ox1D RES 0x04 REQ 0x05 STX 0x02 ETX 0x03 ACK 0x06 NAK 0x15 LRC enabled Transfer 1 HOST TX RES 0x1D REQ Select Unit 1 to receive data IMAGER TX Ox1D ACK Unit responds with its address HOST TX STX T ETX LRC IMAGER TX Ox1D ACK Unit responds with its address HOST TX RES Terminat
10. Decoded messages are output but no attempt is made to qualify symbols or to output Bad Symbol or No Symbol messages Bad No Symbol Output Checks first for decodes If no symbol is decoded checks for symbol orientation If Orientation Value is satisfied aBad Symbol message is output If not satisfied a No Symbol message is output Object Qualification Checks first for matches to symbol Orientation Value If qualified attempts to decode If no decodes are found within the specified read cycle parameters outputs a No Read message Enable Both Same as Object Qualification except that if Orientation Value is satisfied but the symbol is not decoded then a Bad Symbol message is output if not satisfied a Bad Symbol message is still output 7 14 MS 4 Imager User Manual I O Parameters Orientation Value Usage Instructs the Imager to ignore symbols not in the specified orientation Definition Sets the orientation of the symbol in degrees clockwise from the default 0 orientation For Data Matrix symbols sets the L finder pattern a finder L pattern with the example Data Matrix to the right showing the default 0 orientation For ee sets Bhs errant A pattern three squares wi e example to the right showing the 22m OFF m default 0 orientation QR Code Da The other position settings will A rotate clockwise from the defaults opi shown above Serial Cmd lt K718 finder
11. Default Timed Capture Options 0 Timed Capture 1 Triggered Capture MS 4 Imager User Manual 5 17 Timed Capture Usage Timed Capture is useful in fast moving applications in which symbols are only in the field of view for a short time and precise timing is required Definition In Timed Rapid Capture decoding occurs independent of andsimultaneous with capturing thus allowing precise timing or no delay at all between captures Also consecutive captures are regarded as the same symbol if the output data is the same Start of Read Cycle No Time Delay Between Captures Diagram A vn Aas dy 32a us read cycle Time Before First Capture Time Delay Between Captures Diagram B yi us i erronea ente Processing 5 18 MS 4 Imager User Manual Read Cycle Triggered Capture Usage Useful in applications where each decode must be treated as a discrete event regardless of symbol data Definition When Rapid Capture Mode is set to Triggered Capture each decode is considered a separate event even if the current decode data is identical to the previous decode data The first trigger event starts the read cycle and subsequent triggers will continue until the predetermined Number of Captures is met or until the predetermined End of Read Cycle condition is met whichever occurs first Note If End of Read Cycle is set for New Trigger and the read cycle qualifica
12. Symbologies PDF417 Usage Used in applications where a large amount of infomation over 32 characters needs to be encoded within a symbol typically where the symbol is transported from one facility to another For example an automobile assembly line might use a single symbol with multiple fields of information that will be read at several stations along the way without reference to a database Definition A two dimensional multi row 3 to 90 continuous variable length symbology that has high data capacity for storing up to 2 700 numeric characters 1800 printable ASCII characters or 1100 binary characters per symbol Each symbol character consists of 4 bars and 4 spaces in a 17 module structure Serial Cmd lt K476 status unused fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length unused codeword collection Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Note Sending lt a1 gt will cause PDF417 data to be prefaced with information consisting of error correction level ECC Level n number of rows n Rows number of columns n Columns number of informative code words n Info Code Words and the number of data characters n Data Characters This feature can be disabled by re sending lt a1 gt Fixed Symbol Length Status PDF 417 Serial Cmd lt K476 status unused fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length unused codeword collection Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Fixed Symbol Lengt
13. The time used by a vision system to receive analyze and interpret image information Often expressed in parts per minute Programmable Logic Controller PLC An electronic device used in industrial automation environments such as factory assembly lines and automotive manufacturing facilities Progressive Scan A non interlaced scan that doubles the number of visible picture lines per field by displaying all picture lines at once Protocol The rules for communication between devices providing a means to control the orderly flow of information between linked devices RAM See Random Access Memory Random Access Memory RAM A data storage system used in computers composed of integrated circuits that allow access to stored data in any sequence without movement of physical parts Read Cycle A programmed period of time or condition during which a reader will accept symbol input Read Only Memory ROM A data storage medium used in computers and other elec tronics primarily used to distribute Firmware Real Time Processing In machine vision the ability of a system to perform a complete analysis and take action on one part before the next one arrives for inspection A 32 MS 4 Imager User Manual Appendices Region Area of an image Also called a region of interest for image processing operations ROM See Read Only Memory Saturation The degree to which a color is free of white One of the
14. determine the number of symbols to be included in the output phrase Dutput Phrase Symbol Preamble Symbol 1 Separator Symbol 2 Symbol 3 Symbol 4 Symbol 5 Postamble MV Enable Iv Parse Iv Parse i Parse Parse Parse M Enable Then check the Parse boxes beneath the symbols that you wish to format for user defined output 14 4 MS 4 Imager User Manual Output Format Format Extract Output Index Definition Serial Cmd Options Output Index refers to the database entry you wish to modify with this command A formatted output is built by extracting data from a symbol s original data output and or inserting user defined characters It may be helpful to think of individual indexes as positions in the final formatted output you wish to build Starting with index 1 enter either an extract or insert command to begin building your desired output string Then with the next index number enter either an extract or insert command to continue building the output string Continue this process until you are finished building the string lt K740 output index start location length gt 1 to 100 Start Location Definition Serial Cmd Default Options Length Definition Serial Cmd Default Options Defines the location within the symbol data where the character extraction will begin The first character extracted will also be the first character in the sequence displayed in user defined output K740
15. lt K716h 2C gt See ASCII Character Entry Modifier on page 3 32 for a detailed explanation of how to enter ASCII characters as hex values 7 8 MS 4 Imager User Manual I O Parameters 1D Stacked Symbology Qualification Minimum Number of Bars Definition Sets the minimum number of bars to qualify linear symbols Serial Cmd lt K717 minimum number of bars minimum number of qualified scan lines start stop status Default 0 Options 0 to 255 0 is disabled Minimum Number of Qualified Scan Lines Definition Sets the minimum number of scans that have the required number of bars set in Minimum Number of Bars Important This is a percentage value from 0 to 100 Serial Cmd lt K717 minimum number of bars minimum number of qualified scan lines start stop status gt Default Disabled Options Any number from 0 to 100 0 disables this feature Start Stop Status Definition When enabled both Start and Stop characters need to be present to qualify as a decodable symbol In the case of PDF417 only a Stop needs to be present Serial Cmd lt K717 minimum number of bars minimum number of qualified scan lines start stop status Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled MS 4 Imager User Manual 7 9 2D Symbology Qualification 2D Symbology Qualification Note In the cases where Symbol Size Status Dimension Status or Orientation Status is enabled the Imager will always check the finder pattern reg
16. Calibration WOI Configuration Database Dynamic Setup Window of Interest Reset Capture and Decode Top 0 neg 480 D NoDecode Left wean je Sh Note To remove the window of interest click the Reset button or just click anywhere in the WOI pane Note that all pixels not in the WOI are defined as black Because the Imager has far less processing to do in a smaller window read rates typically increase dramatically One possible downside is that the chance of missing a symbol increases with the smaller window Always verify that your WOI will be large enough to allow for any random movement of symbols in your field of view MS 4 Imager User Manual 10 11 Window of Interest Window of Interest by Serial Command The exact size and position of the WOI within the image area can be defined numerically in terms of pixels WOI Row Pointer lt gt The figure to the right shows where to locate WOI Column the start position of the row and column pointers Pointer and how to measure the column depth and row width dimensions WOI Row Depth WOI Column Width Top Row Pointer Definition Defines the row position of the upper left starting point of the window Serial Cmd lt K516 row pointer column pointer row depth column width gt Default 0 Options 0 to 480 Left Column Pointer Definition Defines the column
17. Low Medium High Definable Initiates the calibration routine The Window of Interest section of the Calibration interface allows the user to make precise adjustments to WOI Framing WOI Margin in pixels and the scan height of the straight line image in pixels 4 10 MS 4 Imager User Manual After Calibration Notice the improved image resolution after the calibration process is complete Calibration The Shutter Gain and Quality indicator bars remain stationary at the end of calibration to provide a visual reference for the final values of these parameters Before After Capture Settings Gain 38 Shutter Speed 250 Symbology Settings Symbology Type ECC 200 Code 33 v Composite Enabled 250 Eo Shutter Processing Medium X 38 8792 Gain Quality M E The calibration progress bar indicates that the process has been completed zi Window of Interest WOI Framing WOI Margin Linescan Height 75 64 Disabled m Calibrate Cancel if Save Saves the optimal configuration parameters determined by calibration results MS 4 Imager User Manual 4 11 Initiating Calibration Initiating Calibration Calibration can be initiated by serial command the EZ button or from the Calibration interface in ESP In ESP the Calib
18. Serial Cmd lt K473 UPC status EAN status supplementals status separator status separator character supplemental type format UPC E as UPC A gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 6 24 MS 4 Imager User Manual Symbologies GS1 DataBar RSS DataBar Expanded Usage Used to encode primary and supplementary data in retail point of sale and other applications Definition DataBar Expanded is a variable length symbology that can encode supple mentary information in addition to the 14 digit EAN item identification num ber and is capable of encoding up to 74 numeric or 41 alphabetic characters Serial Cmd lt K484 status fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled non stacked 2 Enabled stacked and non stacked Where appropriate use 1 non stacked for better performance over 2 stacked and non stacked Fixed Symbol Length Status DataBar Expanded Definition When enabled the Imager will check the symbol length against the symbol length field minus the embedded check digit If disabled any length would be considered valid Serial Cmd lt K484 status fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Fixed Symbol Length DataBar Expanded Usage Fixed Symbol Length helps prevent truncations and increases data integrity by ensuring that only one symbol length will be accepted Definit
19. 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 2 Fast Shutter Note The following table shows general guidelines for shutter speed configurations based on various line speeds The configurations shown depend on the Imager s optical configuration and on symbol element size Shutter Speed Line Speed 0 250 static 250 750 5 sec 750 1500 10 sec 1500 2000 15 sec 2000 2500 20 sec Shutter Speed Disabled When this feature is disabled the shutter speed is fixed and is not part of the calibration process Shutter Speed Enabled When this feature is enabled shutter speed will be calibrated to provide the best possible image quality and performance Fast Shutter The calibration process will concentrate on achieving the fastest possible shutter setting that will still provide good performance The image quality or contrast may not be as good as what would be achieved with the Enabled setting The calibration process is notdesigned to choose the fastest shutter speed that can decode a symbol but rather to optimize for the fastest shutter speed that still provides good image quality 4 4 MS 4 Imager User Manual Calibration Symbol Type Serial Cmd lt K529 gain shutter speed symbol type WOI framing WOI margin line scan height processing Default Enabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Symbol Type Disabled When this feature is disabled only the currently enabled symbologies will
20. 1 2 3 in Wide Axis H 3 4 W Appendices Low Density Low Density inches mm In mm 178 6 152 30 mil 2D 20 mil 1D J 54127 20 mil 2D 15 mil 1D E 102 25 15 mil 2D 10 mil 1D a 37 76 2451 17 25 76 51 25 25 51 76 102 mm 0 4 3 2 rf 1 2 3 4 in Wide Axis H 3 4 W Narrow bar width Field of View k Read Range 1D 2D maximum Standard Density 0075 0 19 mm 010 25 mm 2 4 61 mm 1 8 to 4 2 46 mm to 107 mm 010 0 25 mm 015 38 mm 2 6 66 mm 1 6 to 4 7 41 mm to 119 mm 015 0 38 mm 020 51 mm 2 8 71 mm 1 4 to 5 2 36 mm to 132 mm Low Density 010 0 25 mm 015 38 mm 4 2 107 mm 3 0 to 4 5 76 mm to 114 mm 015 0 38 mm 020 51 mm 5 0 127 mm 2 5 to 5 5 64 mm to 140 mm 020 0 51 mm 030 76 mm 5 8 147 mm 2 0 to 6 8 51 mm to 173 mm MS 4 Imager User Manual General Specifications Safety Certifications FCC UL cUL CE CB ROHS WEEE Compliance FE Wes CE 2015 Microscan Systems Inc All rights reserved Specifications subject to change Product specifications are given for typical performance at 25 C 77 F using grade A labels Performance characteristics may vary at high temperatures or other environmental extremes Warranty One year limited warranty on parts and labor Extended warranty available A 4 MS 4 Imager User Manual Appendices Appendix B Elect
21. At the end of a successful calibration Threshold Mode will remain set to Adaptive regardless of its previous setting Otherwise the value will revert to its original state If Symbol Type is enabled for calibration Autodiscriminate then Interleaved 2 of 5 Range Mode Status Interleaved 2 of 5 K472 will be enabled This allows variable length Interleaved 2 of 5 symbols to be decoded If an Interleaved 2 of 5 symbol is decoded during calibration then symbol length 1 will be set to the decoded symbol length at the end of calibration Otherwise the symbol lengths will be restored to their original configurations The symbol size dimension and orientation parameters of the No Symbol Message and Bad Symbol Message and 2D Symbology Qualification command K718 will be updated if calibration is completed successfully All symbol types that were enabled before calibration will still be enabled after calibration For example if Data Matrix ECC 200 was enabled before calibration and the calibration routine was performed on a Code 128 symbol then after calibration is completed both Data Matrix ECC 200 and Code 128 will be enabled The calibration process does not modify the global Composite status lt K453 gt The global Composite status must be configured properly before calibration If the user requires calibration of a stacked symbology lt K482 gt lt K483 gt or lt K484 gt that symbology must be enabled and
22. ESP s Symbol Quality interface allows you to evaluate Data Matrix symbols for compliance with ISO IEC 16022 requirements First determine which ISO IEC 16022 Parameters you need to evaluate using the Symbol Quality tree control Data Matrix ISO IEC 16022 Parameters Symbol Contrast Enabled Print Growth Enabled Axial Non uniFormiby Enabled Unused ECC Enabled Once you have set these Data Matrix evaluation parameters go to the Preferences Tab and set your Data Matrix Grading Report output preferences After your output preferences are set click the Data Matrix Grading button Data Matrix Grading There will be a wait of a few seconds and then the evaluation results will appear in the Symbol Quality view in a format similar to the one shown below Data Matrix Grading Report GRADE ISO IEC Symbol Contrast 88 i A 16022 Print Growth 8 26 Da oe Dnom 58 i A Dy a i Dmax 65 i Dnin 35 Axial Nonuniformity 8 88 Kavg 13 2 Yavg 13 1 Unused ECC 188 x Eact n Emax 18 GRADING x Cell Damage BU Total Read Time 99 ms Capture Time 65 ms Locate Time 27 ms Decode Time 7 ms Pixels Element 13 1 ECC Level ea Matrix Size 7 14x14 Quiet Zone PRSS If you want to view the results in a report format click the Save Report button The report will be output in the format you chose in the Preferences dialog Save Report 6 12 MS 4 Imager User Manual
23. Filter data 123 AB C This will be interpreted as 123 Filter data 123 This will match 1234 and 123A but not 123 12345 or 12340 Filter data 123 A This will match 1234A and 123BA but not 123 1234C or 1234ABCD Filter data 123 A This will match 1234AB and 123BAT but not 1 234A or 123BATS Filter data 12 This will match 1234 123456 and 123ABC but not 12 or 123 Filter data 123 A This will match 1234A 123BA and 123BATS but not 1234 or 12340 lt K744 filter number symbology type length wildcard placeholder data unused database index 00 NUL Any ASCII input in the form of a pair of hex characters Maximum length 63 bytes defined Data 0 NUL represents string matching disabled Important The ASCII characters lt gt and can only be entered as hex pairs For lt lt K744h 3C gt For gt lt K744h 3E gt For lt K744h 2C gt See ASCII Character Entry Modifier on page 3 32 for a detailed explanation of how to enter ASCII characters as hex values Database Index Definition Serial Cmd Default Options 14 12 The index of the database entry that decodes a given symbol must equal this setting for filtering to occur A setting of 0 allows any database index for this filter entry
24. J gt App Mode Note The App Mode and EZ Mode buttons appear in the same position to allow easy switching between these primary modes Camera Setup advanced Calibration Configuration Database Click this icon to 7 Click here for return to EZ Mode Menu toolbar rue here hod Ordered Output amp dJenminar view and Output Format features ESP ESP Untitled File Model Options Connect View Help EZ Mode Autoconnect Send Recy Switch Model Cikfiguration Camera Terminal Utilities Output Format e E mn VW X 2 P mu AMEN m Es red enn ULT ow Click on icons in this row to Communication Read Cycle Symbologies yo Symbol Quality Matchcode Diagnostics access configuration trees a Parameters like the one shown here gt Buu Click the Configuration icon to return to full RS232 422 Host Port H Host Port Connections APP Mode view from Camera Terminal Baud Rate Utilities or Output Format Parity Stop Bits One Data Bits Eight E Host Protocol Point to Point Address 1 1 ACK NAK Options Click Capture and Decode to Polling Mode Options l read the symbol in the field of a Deatled view and to see ahigh resolution uxilliary Port 3 Aux Port Connections image capture of the symbol Aux Port Settings Data Output Preamble Disabled Postamble Enabled Respons
25. Options 0 Off 1 Low 2 Medium 3 High 10 28 MS 4 Imager User Manual Camera and IP Setup Skew Correction The MS 4 Imager s CMOS image sensor has a rolling shutter mechanism that A controls pixel integration row by row gt x Full Image Height unlike a global shutter which performs 1 light integration of all pixels at once When i ER Y a row of pixels has integrated light for the Full Image Width p gt amount of time specified by the user defined shutter speed that row will be read out The rows of the image are exposed individually in rapid sequence As a symbol moves through the field of view it is in a different position at each row read out This creates distortion or skew as in the image shown below In this image the symbol is moving from left to right at a line speed of 40 inches per second The bottom of the symbol is read out first while the upper portion is still being integrated causing distortion along the symbol s x axis Note The amount of blur in the image is an effect of shutter speed and is not a factor in rolling shutter distortion If the symbol enters the Imager s field of view from the top or bottom distortion will occur on the y axis The image below shows two symbols entering the field of view from the top at different line speeds As you can see this causes the image to shrink along the y axis This is because the symbol is moving perpendicular to the CMOS sensor s row
26. Serial Cmd lt K718 finder pattern status symbol size mode symbol size 1 symbol size 2 symbol size tolerance dimension mode dimension 1 dimension 2 dimension tolerance orientation mode orientation value Default 0 Options 0 to 640 pixels Dimension 2 Definition Checks symbol dimension for a specified number of pixels In the case of rectangular symbols checks the shorter side Serial Cmd K718 finder pattern status symbol size mode symbol size 1 symbol size 2 symbol size tolerance dimension mode dimension 1 dimension 2 dimension tolerance orientation mode orientation value Default 0 Options 0 to 480 pixels Dimension Tolerance Definition Sets the allowable deviation in percentage for symbol sizes specified in Dimension 1 and Dimension 2 Serial Cmd lt K718 finder pattern status symbol size mode symbol size 1 symbol size 2 symbol size tolerance dimension mode dimension 1 dimension 2 dimension tolerance orientation mode orientation value Default 10 Options 0 to 100 MS 4 Imager User Manual 7 13 2D Symbology Qualification Orientation Mode Definition Sets the orientation value Serial Cmd lt K718 finder pattern status symbol size mode symbol size 1 symbol size 2 symbol size tolerance dimension mode dimension 1 dimension 2 dimension tolerance orientation mode orientation value Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Bad No Symbol Output 2 Object Qualification 3 Enable Both Disabled
27. The host application must establish a connection with the Imager to receive Microscan HID IN Reports symbol data and to send Microscan HID OUT Reports commands serial triggers 2 The Imager can always receive Microscan HID OUT Reports commands serial triggers 3 The host application can always send commands through Microscan HID OUT Reports If the command requires a response a part number for example the Imager will always send the response through Microscan HID IN Reports 4 The Imager always ignores Keyboard OUT Reports sent by the host operating system 5 The content of both the Keyboard Reports and Microscan HID IN Reports is identical except for Keyboard Reports non printable data limitations Microscan HID IN Reports HID Reports are used as a channel for standard Microscan Imager communication command input and symbol data output There are two types of Microscan HID Reports Report Type Data Content Microscan HID IN Imager to host Symbol data No Reads Service messages Microscan HID OUT host to Imager Commands serial triggers Note The Imager is always able to receive commands and serial triggers from the host through Microscan HID OUT Reports regardless of the Microscan HID IN Report status If the Imager receives a command that requests a response such as a part number query the Imager will send a Microscan HID IN Report regardless of the IN Report status Serial Cmd lt K149 Microscan HID IN Report s
28. When operating in Continuous Read or Continuous Read 1 Output the Imager is always in the read cycle Serial Cmd Default Options Timeout Usage Definition 5 14 lt K220 end of read cycle read cycle timeout gt Timeout 0 Timeout 1 New Trigger 2 Timeout or new Trigger 3 Last Frame 4 Last Frame or New Trigger Typically used with Serial Data or External Edge and Continuous Read 1 Output It is effective in highly controlled applications when the maximum length of time between objects can be predicted It assures that a read cycle ends before the next symbol appears giving the system extra time to decode and transmit the data to the host Timeout ends the read cycle causing the reader to stop reading symbols and send the symbol data or No Read message when the time set in Timeout elapses times out if When to Output is set to End of Read Cycle If in Continuous Read 1 Output a timeout initiates a new read cycle and allows the same symbol to be read again With External Edge Serial Data or Serial Data or External Edge enabled a timeout ends the read cycle and symbol data or a No Read message is sent to the host With External Level enabled the read cycle does not end until the falling edge trigger occurs or a timeout occurs The next read cycle does not begin until the next rising edge trigger MS 4 Imager User Manual Read Cycle New Trigger Usage New Trigger is an effective way to end a read c
29. can send and save the command simultaneously Send No Save Default C t Menu Setti Send and Save are Mur TUM Send and Save as Customer Defaults Default all ESP Settings Receive Reader Settings Advanced Options gt 2 14 MS 4 Imager User Manual Using ESP Send Receive Options To access Receive Save and Default options click the Send Recv button You can also access these options by right clicking in any of the gt configuration views sut Send Recv Receiving From the Send Recv menu select Receive Reader Settings Caution Do not select this option if you do not want to upload the Imager s settings For example if your ESP file has a number of custom settings that you want to maintain and download into the Imager these settings would be lost by choosing Yes This is useful if you want to receive upload the Imager s settings and save them as a file for future use For example if your Imager has settings that you do not want to change choosing Yes would allow you to load those settings to ESP and save them in an ESP file for later retrieval Receiving the Imager s settings will also assure that you will not be subsequently saving any unwanted changes that you or someone else has made previously in ESP Saving 1 Send No Save Receive Reader Settings lt A gt This saves ESP Send and Save i Default C t Menu Setti settings to current efault Curren enu ettings Send end Garon E Dine m
30. check the Enable Output Format Ordered Output Output Format Ww Enable Output Format Iv Auto Sync with Reader Set Number of Symbols Dutput Phrase Preamble Symbol 1 Postamble m c FS MV Enable MV Parse MV Enable Parse Symbols Send and Save Receive Show Parse Table MS 4 Imager User Manual 14 3 Format Assign Format Assign Symbol Number Definition Symbol Number refers to the number of the symbolto which output formatting will apply For example if you wish to enable user defined formatting to symbol 2 in a multisymbol read cycle you would send the command lt K742 2 1 gt Note that the number of symbols may exceed the format capabilities Serial Cmd lt K742 symbol number status gt Options 1 to 10 1 Formatted output status for symbol 1 2 Formatted output status for symbol 2 10 Formatted output status for symbol 10 Status Definition Status refers to the user defined formatting of a selected symbol position in the read cycle result Note that there is also a global formatting enable command that must be set for the formatting to be applied Serial Cmd lt K742 symbol number status gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Assign parameters to specified symbol By ESP Iv Enable Output Format Use the Set Number of Symbols spin box to Set Number of Symbols 5 i E
31. eS Ae E ei eec te eser te d aene viene 5 25 Setting Up the Imager for EZ Trax ccccccccececeeceeceeecceceeeeeeceeeeeeeecaeeeeeeseceaeeeeseseeaeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeea 5 26 After you ve established communications and completed basic read rate testing you will need to address the spatial and timing parameters associated with your application This section explains those parameters MS 4 Imager User Manual 5 1 Read Cycle by ESP Read Cycle by ESP Read Cycle Click this button to bring up the Read Cycle menu To change a setting double click the setting and use your cursor to scroll through the options Read Cycle Multisymbol Trigger Mode Continuous Read Trigger Filter Duration 313 External Trigger State Positive Serial Trigger End of Read Cycle Read Cycle Timeout Decodes Before Output l Read Duration Output Capture Mode Capture Time Store Noread Image Image Processing Settings Timeout New Trigger Timeout or New Trigger Last Frame Last Frame or New Trigger To open nested options single click the MS 4 Imager User Manual Read Cycle Read Cycle Serial Commands Trigger Mode Duration lt K200 trigger mode trigger filter duration gt Serial Trigger Character lt K201 serial trigger character gt External Trigger State lt K202 external trigger state gt End of Read Cycle lt K220 en
32. lt K744 filter number symbology type length wildcard placeholder data unused database index gt 0 any index 0 to 10 MS 4 Imager User Manual Output Format Ordered Output Filter Definition Number of Filters refers to the number of active output filters 0 disables all output filters Any non zero numeral will enable filtering to be performed using the filter indexes covered by this value For example if the number of filters is 1 then only filter index 1 will be applied If the number of filters is 2 then only filter index 1 and filter index 2 will be applied etc Serial Cmd lt K745 number of filters gt Default 0 Options 0 to 10 MS 4 Imager User Manual 14 13 Ordered Output Filter 14 14 MS 4 Imager User Manual Ee ppendices Contents Appendix A General Specifications sess enne nnns A 2 Appendix B Electrical Specifications sss eene nennen nnns A 5 Appendix C Serial Configuration Commands sss A 6 Appendix D Communications Protocol c ccccccccccccscsseceeceeeceseseeseneneaeaeaeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesseseseeeeeae A 12 Appendix E ASGII Table oc covet e t e ele epos ine plenior ier e e E ieran iniata A 21 Appendix F Interface Standards ssssssessssseseeeeeeene nennen nnn nnne enne nnne A 22 Appendix G Object Detector 22 cece cecccceeccecce cece eecece cece cecnaeceeeeeenaeceseesaaaeaeseeseeeaeeeeeesenaeee
33. to New Trigger enables Narrow Margins and resets the data buffers without saving the changes for power on Serial Command Status Request To ensure that any command was received and accepted you can send the Show Reader Status command lt gt The status of a specific serial command can be requested by entering the command followed by a question mark For example send lt K142 gt to request the status of Postamble A 10 MS 4 Imager User Manual Appendices Entering Control Characters in Serial Commands To enter control characters within a serial command hold down the Ctrl key while typing the desired character Example To enter a carriage return and line feed M J enter lt K141 1 CNTL m CNTL j gt MS 4 Imager User Manual A 11 Communications Protocol Appendix D Communications Protocol Communications Protocol Command Table Protocol Command Control Characters Hex ah Entered in menu or Effect of Command Mnemonic displayed on menu Value serial command RES D 04 Reset REQ E 05 Request EOT D 04 Reset STX B 02 Start of Text ETX C 03 End of Text ACK F 06 Acknowledge NAK U 15 Negative Acknowledge XON Q 11 Begin Transmission XOFF S 13 Stop Transmission A 12 MS 4 Imager User Manual ACK NAK Data Flow Examples Setup 1 RES 0x00 disabled REQ 0x00 disabled STX 0x00 disabled ETX 0x00 disabled ACK 0x06 NAK 0x15 LRC disabled Transfe
34. whenever the Ctrl F5 keystroke is pressed the trigger character will start the read cycle Change Font Allows you to modify the font used for decode data received from the Imager on the Terminal screen Change Echo Font Allows you to modify the font used for command characters typed into the Terminal view Toolbar Style Displays user selected toolbar buttons as icons text only or both default MS 4 Imager User Manual 2 7 Menu Toolbar Bar Code Options Tab ESP Preferences General Terminal Bar Code Options Grade Report Options Advanced Sizing Information Bar Width i4 Mils ES Example Default Settings The Bar Code Options dialog allows you to set the size in mils of user created symbols Sizing Information Sets the bar width in thousands of an inch of user created symbols A bar width of 14 is 0 014 inches 2 8 MS 4 Imager User Manual Using ESP Grade Report Options Tab ESP Preferences General Terminal Bar Code Options Grade Report Options Advanced Iv Show Report Options during Generate Report Iv Store Report without file path prompt Default Path Default Report Type PDF Files pdf Iv Automatically open generated report Iv Include Image C Bitmap JPEG JPEG Image Quality 100 1 100 Default Settings Overall Grade Based On Allows you to choose which symbol characteristics will be considered in generating a symbol quality grade Use Number
35. 10 provided the total number of characters does not exceed the maximum allowed lt K231 master symbol number master symbol data gt Enter data for 1 to 10 symbols any combination of ASCII text up to the maximum allowed For example to enter data for master symbol 9 after making certain that master symbol database size is enabled for 9 or more symbols send lt K231 9 data gt Important The ASCII characters lt gt and can only be entered as hex pairs See ASCII Character Entry Modifier on page 3 32 for a detailed explanation of how to enter ASCII characters as hex values Caution If no data is entered the existing data will be deleted 1 Open the Utilities menu 2 Set the number of master symbols you want to create in Master Symbol Database Size 3 Double click on each symbol number you want to set up and copy or type your data in the popup dialog and click OK Master Symbol Database Size lv Matchcode Type Read Symbol into Selected Index 5 Receive Reader s Database Send Database to Reader Index Master Symbol Data Master 3 Symbol Data Enter master symbol data here 4 When all your data has been entered click the Send Database to the Reader button MS 4 Imager User Manual Utilities Request Master Symbol Data Definition Returns master symbol data for any enabled master symbols from 1 to 10 For example to request master symbol 5 enter K2312 5 The Imager transmits m
36. 128 Definition This feature causes the Imager to pad variable length application fields with leading zeroes This is not done for the last field of a symbol Serial Cmd lt K474 status fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length EAN 128 status output format application record separator status application record separator character application record brackets application record padding gt Default Enabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 6 12 MS 4 Imager User Manual Symbologies BC412 Usage Widely used in semiconductor manufacturing Particularly useful where speed accuracy and ease of printing are required Definition BC412 Binary Code 412 a proprietary IBM symbology since 1988 is an alphanumeric symbol with a set of 35 characters each encoded by a set of 4 bars in 12 module positions All bars have a single width it is the presence 1 or absence 0 of bars in each of the twelve module positions that make BC412 binary This symbology is also bi directional and self clocking with a start character and a stop character Serial Cmd lt K481 status check digit output fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Check Digit Output BC 412 Usage Check Digit Output added to the symbol provides additional security Definition When enabled the check digit character is read and compared along with the symbol data When disabled symbol data is sen
37. 13 Firmware Firmware Firmware by ESP Firmware Update App Code M Start Firmware Verification App Code v Request Part No App Code Request Checksum Firmware Update Application code versions are specific to your Imager Consult with your sales representative before downloading application code If needed an application code will be sent to you in the form of a mot file To download application code 1 First be sure that your Imager is connected to the host 2 Apply power to the Imager 3 Before updating you should verify the current firmware 4 Click in the Firmware Update text box and select the file type you want to download This will open a file locator box 5 Navigate to the appropriate file it will be a mot file and open the file Caution Do not interrupt power or disconnect the host cable while download is in progress Be sure that each download is complete before moving on to the next Important When updating firmware be sure that the application code and boot code versions are mutually compatible 13 14 MS 4 Imager User Manual Utilities Firmware Verification Request Part Number You can send a request to the Imager for part numbers checksums boot code and application code By ESP You can access Part Numbers from the Utilities menu 1 Click the Firmware tab 2 From the pulldown selection box to the left of the Request Part No button make your select
38. 22 16 SYN y 54 36 6 86 56 V 118 76 V 23 17 ETB W 55 37 7 87 57 Ww 119 77 w 24 18 CAN X 56 38 8 88 58 X 120 78 x 25 19 EM Y 57 39 9 89 59 Y 121 79 y 26 1A SUB Z 58 3A 90 5A Z 122 7A z 27 1B ESC 59 3B 91 5B 123 7B 28 1C FS 60 3C 92 5C Y 124 7C 29 1D GS 61 3D 93 5D 125 7D 30 1E RS An 62 3E gt 94 5E 126 7E 31 1F US 63 3F 95 5F _ 127 7F D MS 4 Imager User Manual A 21 Interface Standards Appendix F Interface Standards Interface Standards established by the Electronic Industries Association EIA specify such things as the signaling voltage levels maximum cable lengths and number of drivers In the MS 4 Imager selection of interface is made by pin assignment and in the case of host communications by software switching between RS 232 and RS 422 RS 232 RS 232 defines an interface between two devices such as for example the reader and host It differs from the other interfaces by dedicating individual pins to specific functions and by requiring both devices to share a common ground line Since both device chassis are connected to a common ground a ground loop potential and the possibility of noise interference exists Therefore cable lengths are limited to a maximum of 50 feet 19 7m Despite being the most limited this interface is used frequently because of the large installed base of RS 232 equipment RS 422 RS 422 unlike RS 232
39. Definition Activates discrete output when a diagnostic warning condition is met depending on the diagnostic option enabled In Read Cycle Definition Activates a discrete output when the Imager is in a read cycle 7 30 MS 4 Imager User Manual I O Parameters Output State Definition Sets the active electrical state of the discrete output Serial Cmd lt K810 output on output state pulse width output mode Default Negative Options 0 Negative 1 Positive Pulse Width Definition Sets the time in 10mS increments that the discrete output remains active Serial Cmd K810 0utput on output state pulse width output mode Default 5 Corresponds to 50 mS Options 0 to 255 0 to 2 55 seconds Divide the number entered on the command line by 100 for time in seconds Output Mode Definition Sets the condition in which the discrete output is de activated Serial Cmd K810 0utput on output state pulse width output mode Default Pulse Options 0 Pulse 2 Latch Mode 2 3 Latch Mode 3 Pulse This is the default mode of operation in which the programmable output is activated when the Output On condition has been met and held active for the duration of the selected pulse width Latch Mode 2 Unlatch Opposite Condition The programmable output is activated when the Output On condition has been met and held active until the opposite condition selected under Output On has been met For example if No Read
40. Disab white Disabled Test poo 20 pisa o 40 feso M Adapti 128 Stand Disabl White Disabled Test Iv Capture for Every Index Show Database Index in Output Sort Index Positions on Good Reads Calibrate A Receive Settings Send Settings Load Current To Index Load Index To Current C C e C 6 C C e Camera settings Capture Index Shutter Speed Gain Sub Sampling located in the left half of the highlighted area Image capture dimensions Row Pointer Column Pointer Row Depth Column Width located in the right half of the highlighted area MS 4 Imager User Manual 11 11 Database Mode Region of Interest ROI When Image Dimensions is set to Region of Interest the database image dimension parameters are P and decode settings and they determine the region or area of the captured image to be processed ROI coordinate data is based on the full image size The WOI of the captured image will be configured to cover all the ROI settings in the current active database entry In the following example there are three active database settings each with a different ROI configuration Their coordinates are based at point 0 0 of the full scale image 640 x 480 In this example DB1 and DB3 determine the size of the captured image WOI while DB2 has no mpact The image WOI is not configurable It is automatically set up by the database according to the ROI settings column pointer
41. E z ae ISO IEC 16022 Parameters Nu SOH TX ETX EoT ENG Symbol Contrast ACK BEL BS HT LF VT Print Growth FF cR so si DLE ct Axial Non uniformity DC2 DC3 DC4 NAK SYN ETB Unused ECC CAN EM SUB ESC FS Gs Grading As Us SP Percent Cell Damage LBS us SPI Capture Time Click Delete to remove characters 8 8 MS 4 Imager User Manual Symbol Quality Data Matrix Output Mode Note Output Mode applies to ISO IEC 16022 symbol quality parameters Definition Output Mode specifies how the four output parameters if enabled are formatted Serial Cmd lt K708 symbol quality separator output mode Default Grade Options 0 Grade 1 Value Grade If in Grade Mode a grade A B C D is appended to the symbol data Value If in Value Mode the calculated value for the given parameter is appended to the symbol data MS 4 Imager User Manual 8 9 ISO IEC 16022 Symbol Quality Output ISO IEC 16022 Symbol Quality Output Symbol Quality Parameters for Data Matrix symbols specified by ISO IEC 16022 Symbol Contrast Usage Definition Serial Cmd Default Options Lets the user know if contrast settings are less than acceptable All the pixels that fall within the area of the test symbol including its required zone will be sorted by their reflectance values to select the darkest 1096 and the lightest 1096 of the pixels The arithmetic mean of the darkest and the
42. EE 3 10 Auxiliary Port System Data Status eene eren nennen eren 3 18 Daisy Chain AutoconfIgUre eter edente oleae eevee edet eee eor ee nna poe c n MBs ea vede debe 3 19 Response Tim6eoUut eerie need tere dene eee edere dee ee e eT E ea eet 3 20 LRG Status nre paese uiuat obe ehe 3 21 Protocol Configuration Examples sse mener nnne nns 3 22 USB HID Interface rine terere ice eite rire Pede De aed eee ee e aod 3 23 ASCII Character Entry Modifier essen enn nennen nennen enne 3 32 Preamble te EE Eme eimi E SALE tet Dem LIO 3 33 Postamble s entitatem teens fct et ee Mer Deut ete 3 34 This section explains how to set up communications between the Imager and a host With Microscan s ESP Easy Setup Program configuration changes can be made in the ESP menus and then sent and saved to your Imager The user can also send serial commands to the Imager via ESP s Terminal window MS 4 Imager User Manual 3 1 Communications by ESP Communications by ESP we Parameters Communications Bop Rios R5232 422 Host Port Click this button to bri th Aanes Host Protocol menu Host 422 Status R5232 Auxiliary Port Pr Keyboard IN Report Communication Preamble Click this button l Postamble to bri th CR Response Timeout menu LRC Status Aux Pork System Data Status Host Port Connections Enabled
43. MS 4 Imager User Manual 7 11 2D Symbology Qualification Dimension Mode Definition Enables searches for symbol Dimension 1 and Dimension 2 Serial Cmd lt K718 finder pattern status symbol size mode symbol size 1 symbol size 2 symbol size tolerance dimension mode dimension 1 dimension 2 dimension tolerance orientation mode orientation value gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Bad No Symbol Output 2 Object Qualification 3 Enable Both Disabled Decoded messages are output but no attempt to qualify symbols or output Bad Symbol or No Symbol messages is undertaken Bad No Symbol Output Checks first for decodes If no symbol is decoded checks for symbol dimension If both Dimension 1 and Dimension 2 requirements are met a Bad Symbol message is output If neither are met a No Symbol message is output Object Qualification Checks first for matches to symbol dimension If qualified attempts to decode If no decodes are found within the specified read cycle parameters outputs a No Read message Enable Both Same as Object Qualification except that if neither Dimension 1 nor Dimension 2 qualifies then a No Symbol message is output if either Dimension 1 or Dimension 2 qualifies then a Bad Symbol message is output 7 12 MS 4 Imager User Manual I O Parameters Dimension 1 Definition Checks symbol dimension for a specified number of pixels In the case of rectangular symbols checks the longer side
44. Options Useful in applications where different characters are required to end a read cycle A single ASCII host serial trigger character that ends the read cycle and is not enclosed by delimiters such as and Non delimited Stop characters can be defined and will function according to the trigger event When defining Stop trigger characters the following rules apply n External Edge the Imager looks only for the Start trigger character and ignores any Stop trigger character that may be defined n External Level the Start trigger character begins the read cycle and the Stop trigger character ends it Note that even after a symbol has been decoded and the symbol data transmitted the Imager remains in External Level trigger read cycle until a Stop character is received n Serial Data or External Edge trigger mode either a Start trigger character or a hardware trigger can start an edge trigger read cycle K230 stop character NUL 00 in hex disabled Two hex digits representing any ASCII character Note See ASCII Character Entry Modifier on page 3 32 for hex entry instructions MS 4 Imager User Manual 5 13 End of Read Cycle End of Read Cycle Definition The read cycle is the time during which the Imager will attempt to capture and decode a symbol A read cycle can be ended by a timeout a new trigger or by the last frame in a capture sequence or a combination of the above End of Read Cycle Mode Note
45. RoHS2 process to acquire CE certification per the example given Example gt gt Machinery directive EMC directive RoHS2 Declaration of Conformity MS 4 Imager User Manual xi Statement of ROHS Compliance xii MS 4 Imager User Manual EN 7 Quick Start Contents Step 1 Check Required Hardware cccccccececeececeeeeceeeeeeeeeccaeeeeeeseeaaeeeeeeecceeeeeeseeneaeeeeeneesaees 1 2 Step 2 Connect the System ccccccecceeceeeeececeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeeeeeeaaaeaeeeseeaaaeeeeeeceeaeeeseesaeaeaeeeeesaea 1 3 Step 3 Position Imager and SyMbol c ccececceeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeseseeaeeeeeeseeaeeeeeeseaeeeeeeeee 1 4 Sj Install ESP 2si2i x eae 1 5 Step 5 Select MOodel eret etes s3 te Us E HR Reni p sduese de dacteeeaseceedheast 1 6 Step 6 Select Communications Protocol cccccscsscccsseeeeeecececeececeseseeeeensaeaeeseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeees 1 7 Step 7 Locate the Symbol in the FOV sessssssssssssssssesssesene nennen retener tnter enn 1 8 Step 8 Calibrate Settings 2 eiiis entente reete dee detiene eene de dereud oc 1 10 Step 9 Test Read Rate cedente eere deerit tre dee ded eine edere ea dede e dec 1 11 Step 10 Configure the Imager in ESP sessssssssssssessesee eene nennen nennen 1 12 Step 11 Make Menu Changes and Save in ESP cccceccsececeeeseceeeeeeeseaeeeeeeseaea
46. Specifies a character string that represents ASCII characters to be inserted in the database entry Two hex characters are required for every ASCII character to be inserted in the user defined output string These two characters comprise the hex base 16 value of the ASCII character For example if you wanted to enter the three character sequence Hi you would enter 3 for the length of the string and a hex sequence of 486921 for the ASCII sequence to be inserted 48 H 69 i 21 Important Each pair of hex characters represents one ASCII character Hex character pairs range from 00 to FF Since you are limited to 4 ASCII characters per insertion per database entry you are likewise limited to 8 hex characters per insertion per database entry Serial Cmd lt K741 output index length hex string gt Default NUL 00 in hex Options 00 to FF As many as 4 bytes or hex pairs See ASCII Character Entry Modifier on page 3 32 for a detailed explanation of how to enter ASCII characters as hex values MS 4 Imager User Manual 14 7 Format Insert Format Insert by ESP Symbol Parse Stp Insert Data Extract Range Insert Add Step Remove Step Clear All Parsing Sample Symbol Parse Output OK Cancel Original ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRS TUVW Z0123456789 Insert SP sr EN SoH sTx ETX Eor ENo Ack BEL es HT Lr vr rr cn so sri si nc1 pc2 pcs Deal ak SYN ETB
47. This allows a user essentially to create a backup set of parameters that can be recalled in the event that the current parameters or power on parameters have been accidentally changed or are no longer desired It is important to note that a hardware default does not affect customer default parameters For example a user that has inadvertently changed communication settings and saved them with a lt Z gt command may not know the correct settings or have the capability to communicate within those settings By first doing an EZ button default or hardware default to restore the known Microscan defaults the user can then recall the previous customer saved settings with an Arc or Zrc command Microscan Default Parameters Microscan default parameters are contained in the firmware and cannot be changed Software Defaults Microscan default parameters can be recalled loaded into current settings with Ard command or recalled and saved for power on with the Zrd command Hardware Default If a software default and reset is not possible it may be necessary to reset the reader by shorting connecting specific pins This procedure has the same effect as the lt Zrd gt software command Important For this reset to occur this command must be executed within 60 seconds of a power on or a reset 1 Apply power to the reader 2 If using an IB 131 locate pins 7 and 11 on the host connector Caution Be certain that the correc
48. Trigger Character Non Delimited eeeseeseessss 5 13 Stop Trigger Character Non Delimited eeseeeeeees 5 13 End of Read Cycle necne ee dei e eec 5 14 Capture Mode itte Eq cede eed ei a 5 16 Capture Timing iieri ene Ren 5 20 Image Processing Timeout ssssssssssssseseeeeneen enne 5 22 Image Storage edd ee dae eter e Ecos 5 23 Minimum Good Reads sse emere 5 25 Setting Up the Imager for EZ Trax ssse 5 26 Chapter 6 Symbologies Symbologies by ESP ETETE mener 6 2 Symbologies Serial Commands sss 6 3 Data Matrix iere EE HERR E 6 4 OR GO0d6 eee RC e Re RUN RR a eta 6 6 Code BO sce Aes ERROR UE SERERE tare MANU ES EHE 6 7 Code 128 EAN 128 esses nennen tenen nennen nene 6 10 2107 i p 6 13 Interleaved 2 of Bisnis ionii diideni ie edic doe 6 14 0X010 EES 6 17 Or 6 18 UPC EAN EX 6 21 GS1 DataBar RSS acsi cet iieri ienei idein 6 25 PDE417 iens tied inia dde e erede ote ded 6 27 MiCroPDE417 1 eiii dfe tdeo tre EE de tende neis 6 29 Comlbposite enne preterea ne et ee eevee i e 6 30 Narrow Margins Symbology Identifier 6 31 Background Colort ciiin efe teret dre ace de rete eres 6 33 Chapter 7 I O Parameters l O Parameters by ESP
49. Type Add 1 All symbologies are enabled while this database index is being used Data Matrix Add 2 If enabled Data Matrix will be active for this database index Important The ECC level must be configured using the Data Matrix command lt K479 gt If no ECC level has been configured the Imager will not decode Data Matrix symbols QR Code Add 4 If enabled QR Code will be active for this database index Code 128 Add 8 If enabled Code 128 will be active for this database index Code 39 Add 16 If enabled Code 39 will be active for this database index Codabar Add 32 If enabled Codabar will be active for this database index MS 4 Imager User Manual 11 7 Configuration Database Status Code 93 Add 64 If enabled Code 93 will be active for this database index Interleaved 2 of 5 Add 128 If enabled Interleaved 2 of 5 will be active for this database index UPC EAN Add 256 If enabled UPC EAN will be active for this database index PDF417 Add 512 If enabled PDF417 will be active for this database index MicroPDF417 Add 1024 If enabled MicroPDF417 will be active for this database index BC412 Add 2048 If enabled BC412 will be active for this database index DataBar 14 Add 8192 If enabled DataBar 14 will be active for this database index Important If the stacked and non stacked operation is required the DataBar 14 com mand must be configured as follows lt K482 2
50. User Manual 3 19 Response Timeout Response Timeout Usage Only used when a response is required from the host While in Multidrop if the Imager does not receive an ACK or NAK from the host after sending polled data it will act on a fault The reader can be set to wait indefinitely by setting Response Timeout to zero Definition The time that the Imager will wait before timing out if ACK NAK and ETX are enabled and a host response is expected Serial Cmd K143 response timeout Default 12 in 1mS increments Options 0 to 255 A zero 0 setting causes an indefinite wait Note See USB HID Interface on page 3 23 for protocol information relating to USB 3 20 MS 4 Imager User Manual Communications LRC Status Longitudinal Redundancy Check Usage Used when extra data integrity is required Definition An error checking routine that verifies the accuracy of transmissions It is the exclusive OR of all characters following the STX start of text up to and including the ETX end of text What this means is that the binary representation of all the characters in a transmission are cumulatively added in a column and each resulting odd integer is assigned a 1 and each even integer a 0 two 1s 0 two Os 0 a1 and a 0 1 The extra LRC character is then appended to the transmission and the receiver usually the host performs the same addition and compares the results Serial Cmd lt K145 status gt Default D
51. all readers Daisy Chain ID Usage Used in a daisy chain setup in cases where the host needs to know which reader in the chain sent the data A one or two character prefix which identifies the particular daisy chain Penne reader from which the data is being sent to the host K104 aux port mode baud rate parity stop bits data bits daisy chain i d SERE status daisy chain i d gt Default 1 Options Any one or two ASCII characters Important The ASCII characters lt gt and can only be entered as hex pairs For lt lt K101h 3C gt For gt lt K101h 3E gt For lt K101h 2C gt See ASCII Character Entry Modifier on page 3 32 for a detailed explanation of how to enter ASCII characters as hex values MS 4 Imager User Manual 3 17 Auxiliary Port System Data Status Auxiliary Port System Data Status Definition When enabled system data will be routed to the Auxiliary Port This includes decoded data and diagnostic warning messages When disabled system data will not be routed to the Auxiliary Port Serial Cmd lt K146 aux port system data status gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Note The USB version of the MS 4 does not have an Auxiliary Port 3 18 MS 4 Imager User Manual Communications Daisy Chain Autoconfigure Usage For quick setup and configuration of your daisy chain network Definition The command to autoconfigure the daisy chain is sent to the prim
52. and controlling incoming data For example defining the postamble as a carriage return and a line feed causes each decoded message to be displayed on its own line Allows the user to enable or disable up to four postamble characters that can be added to the end of the decoded data lt K142 status postamble character s gt Enabled 0 Disabled 1 Enabled within any protocol Postamble Characters Serial Cmd Default Options lt K142 status postamble character s gt M J corresponds to carriage return line feed To enter control characters within a serial command hold down the control key while typing the desired character Example lt K142 1 CNTL m CNTL j gt to enter M J Important The ASCII characters lt gt and can only be entered as hex pairs For lt lt K142h 3C gt For gt lt K142h 3E gt For lt K142h 2C gt See ASCII Character Entry Modifier on page 3 32 for a detailed explanation of how to enter ASCII characters as hex values 3 34 MS 4 Imager User Manual EE 4 Calibration Contents Calibration Serial Commands ssh nenne ne nnns nnn erre n nenne nennen 4 2 ec Ie ruine ua MMMMMMEMMEMEEEEEEEEEMEMEEEEEEEEEEEMEENEEEEEEEEEEEEMEEEEEMMEMMEMMMMMMM 4 2 Galibration Optlons eee Denton He eie eiit frases fede etd d dedi exun 4 3 Calibration by ESP niece pene er ere a ee i e eei e educ e podere dr etes 4 10 Initiating Calibration inr
53. be considered during the calibration process Symbol Type Enabled When this feature is enabled autodiscrimination will be in effect during the calibration process All symbologies that are readable by the Imager except PDF 417 will be considered during calibration Any new symbologies successfully decoded during calibration will remain enabled at the end of the process All enabled symbologies will remain enabled For example assume that only Code 39 is enabled at the beginning of calibration If a Code 128 symbol is read during calibration then Code 128 as well as Code 39 will be enabled after the calibration process is complete MS 4 Imager User Manual 4 5 Calibration Options Window of Interest WOI Framing Definition If a WOI framing mode is enabled it will set the camera WOI to a full size image when calibration begins Once a symbol is decoded the camera WOI will be re sized both vertically and horizontally regardless of which WOI mode is enabled to include the symbol plus an additional margin area This is done to accelerate the calibration process When a successful calibration process is completed the camera WOI will be adjusted according to the mode enabled Otherwise the original WOI configuration will be retained Serial Cmd lt K529 gain shutter speed symbol type WOI framing WO margin line scan height processing Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Row and Column 2 Row 3 Column 4 Strai
54. cctcd 13 4 enc cc 13 5 Device Controlee X M aE 13 7 Master Database neunana a dada 13 8 nu iieiea uieii aaea eens Eo ea aA ie ai aa E EEA E a ded vena EEEE EEES 13 14 Bar Code C nfigurat Nissisen kairaa Ea a ae CE Ea eu Lad d nete RR AEAEE 13 17 Default Reset Save eee terse tuse recen c eese te va eec ada vaa ec Fan e oe dedo e REE ERS 13 18 Imager Status Requests esee ee tae etae dae eei ad e caehecedsavensedeisevenseeedsacteseces 13 20 Other Operational Serial Commands sse enne neret enne 13 22 Utility commands are generally commands that are performed during Imager operations to check or determine read rates or to perform miscellaneous operations on Imager hardware Serial utility commands are not prefaced with a K and a numeric code nor do they require an initialization command lt A gt and lt Z gt They can be entered from within any terminal program or from ESP s Terminal or Utilities windows MS 4 Imager User Manual 13 1 Serial Utility Commands Serial Utility Commands Type Command Name lt C gt Enter Decode Rate Test Read Rate lt Cp gt Enter Percent Rate Test lt J gt Exit Decode Rate and Percent Rate Test lt N gt No Read Counter lt O gt No Read Counter
55. certain wavelengths as it passes through a material and is converted to heat or other forms of energy Active Illumination Lighting an area with a light source coordinated with the acquisition of an image Strobed flash tubes and pulsed lasers are examples ADC See Analog to Digital Converter A D Converter See Analog to Digital Converter AGC See Automatic Gain Control Ambient Light Light which is present in the environment of the imaging front end of a vision system and generated from outside sources This light unless used for actual illumination will be treated as background Noise by the vision system Analog A smooth continuous voltage or current signal or function whose magnitude value is the information Analog to Digital Converter A D Converter or ADC A device that converts an analog voltage or current signal to a discrete series of digitally encoded numbers signal for computer processing Application Specific Integrated Circuit ASIC An integrated circuit that is customized for a particular kind of use rather than general use All vision system elements including firmware can be integrated into one ASIC Architecture The hardware organization of a vision system designed for high speed image analysis ASIC See Application Specific Integrated Circuit Aspect Ratio The ratio between the height and width of a sensor or display Found by dividing the vertical number of pixel
56. character sequence on No Read sequence on mismatch gt Disabled 0 Disabled 1 Enabled The Imager will sequence the master to one more or one less than the decoded symbol As an example of Sequence on Mismatch Enabled consider the following decodes Master Symbol Decoded Symbol Master Symbol after Decode 001 001 002 002 002 003 003 abc 004 sequenced on mismatch 004 004 005 005 def 006 sequenced on mismatch 006 ghi 007 sequenced on mismatch 007 007 008 As an example of Sequence on Mismatch Disabled consider the following decodes Master Symbol Decoded Symbol Master Symbol after Decode 001 001 002 002 002 003 003 abc 004 sequenced because of previous match 004 004 005 005 def 006 sequenced because of previous match 006 ghi 006 not sequenced 006 006 007 9 8 MS 4 Imager User Manual Matchcode Match Replace Usage Definition Serial Cmd Default Options Provides a convenient shortcut for applications that need to output a predefined text string whenever a symbol matches a master symbol Outputs a user defined data string whenever a match occurs and Matchcode is enabled lt K735 status replacement string gt Disabled 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Replacement String Definition Serial Cmd Default Options User defined data string that when enabled replaces symbol data whenever a match occurs lt K735 status replacement string
57. configured appropriately before calibration UPC Supplementals will be disabled during calibration The Search Pass process will use the configurable Window of Interest for image cap tures However when the search process is completed the WOI will be reduced to include only the symbol of interest and some additional boundary area MS 4 Imager User Manual 4 17 Additional Notes about Calibration 4 18 MS 4 Imager User Manual Es 5 Read Cycle Contents Read Gycle by ESP 4 edie sees ended estote e eee el eee needs e un ne oa 5 2 Read Cycle Serial Commands sss nennen eterne tenen nn ten tnnt 5 3 Read Cycle Setup tet me esc te acl cuida Pies Riek edem EIL AG CR e Re oce ERIS 5 4 OLUE dalele ETT 5 5 Trigger Mode and Duration arei aenea a e aae ar aa ea a aeaaaee aeai 5 6 External Trigger Polarity 3 1 mL el ib ho ae 5 11 Serial Trigger Start Trigger Character Non Delimited sessssssssssse eee 5 13 Stop Trigger Character Non Delimited essssssssseeeeeeennee ens 5 13 End of Read Cycle seite a Dade Ee E hee 5 14 Capture Mode cernes t ten i ede RR CAR Res 5 16 Capture TLIming u3 i Rene Reiten eec TO ots a nen oleo denga 5 20 Image Processing Timeout sssssssssssssssssesese eene en nnnr nnne nnns nsi n testten ns snnt nnn sinn 5 22 Imager Storage sic Aiki ML HEN 5 23 Minimum Good Reads
58. data to the host If the command causes the Imager to produce more serial output such as serial verification or counter requests the data will be routed to the host port Bar Code Configuration Mode can be exited by any reset lt A gt or lt Z gt command as well as a lt J gt or a quick press and release of the EZ button The command to exit Bar Code Configuration Mode can be included as part of the Data Matrix symbol For example try encoding lt K200 4 gt lt K220 1 gt lt J gt into a Data Matrix symbol This configures the Imager to enable Serial Trigger Mode to program a new trigger to end the read cycle and to exit Bar Code Configuration Mode with lt J gt To end all EZ button functions press the EZ button once and quickly release 1 In normal reading modes it is required to read a special Data Matrix symbol with a special codeword used by ISO IEC 16022 to signify Imager programming MS 4 Imager User Manual 13 17 Default Reset Save Default Reset Save Understanding and controlling your Imager s active saved and default settings is critical to its successful operation Serial ESP first right Function Cmd click in any menu EZ Button tree Save to Reader M 3 S meet hod Send No Save me Reset and recall Microscan defaults Ard No No 2 z 9 Reset and recall power on parameters Arp No No 5 Reset and recall customer default parameters lt Arc gt No No Sa
59. dimension mode selected in the Database Mode command Serial Cmd K255 index shutter speed gain sub sampling row pointer column pointer row depth column width threshold mode fixed threshold value processing mode narrow margins background color symbology type Default 640 Options 8 to 640 column pointer MS 4 Imager User Manual 11 5 Configuration Database Status Threshold Mode Serial Cmd lt K255 index shutter speed gain sub sampling row pointer column pointer row depth column width threshold mode fixed threshold value processing mode narrow margins background color symbology type Default Adaptive Options 0 Adaptive 1 Fixed Fixed Threshold Value Serial Cmd K255 index shutter speed gain sub sampling row pointer column pointer row depth column width threshold mode fixed threshold value processing mode narrow margins background color symbology type Default 128 Options 0 to 255 Processing Mode Serial Cmd lt K255 index shutter speed gain sub sampling row pointer column pointer row depth column width threshold mode fixed threshold value processing mode narrow margins background color symbology type Default Standard Options 0 Standard 1 Fast Linear Mode Narrow Margins Serial Cmd K255 index shutter speed gain sub sampling row pointer column pointer row depth column width threshold mode fixed threshold value processing mode narrow margins background color symbo
60. emen 7 40 ISO IEC 16022 Symbol Quality Output 3 eeeeese 7 40 Diagnostic Output 3 1 eet Rer rre erede fertnr pains 7 40 Power On Reset Counts sesssssseeeeeeen emen 7 41 Time SINCE Reset 5 noter Ede a pe e tees sau o med ennt 7 42 Service Message seriei term renta Ea ano taaan kadata 7 43 Frame Information eret eene ke Re tke edi e vae 7 44 Im adge Output ire ie tete duree due liue Re 7 45 Database Identifier Output 7 48 QUT al a eee OA 7 49 Configuring EZ Trax Output sse emen 7 50 Chapter 8 Symbol Quality Symbol Quality Serial Commands eee 8 2 Overview of Symbol Quality sse 8 3 Symbol Quality by ESP 2 dette tret 8 4 Symbol Quality Separator Data Matrix Output Mode 8 8 ISO IEC 16022 Symbol Quality Output eee 8 10 ISO IEC 16022 Symbol Quality Output by ESP scce 8 12 Microscan Symbol Quality Output een 8 13 Microscan Symbol Quality Output by ESP sesser 8 16 Chapter 9 Matchcode Matchcode by ESP nene aee daret enean de dee entes 9 2 Matchcode Serial Commands eee 9 2 MS 4 Imager User Manual v Table of Contents Overview of Matchcode ssssss eee emen 9 3 Matcheode Type iiti eite ron ere DERE 9 4 Match Replace uui teinte Der ein PER RE 9 9 Mism
61. enabled the Imager will send Keyboard IN Reports to the host containing data originated by the Imager Keyboard IN Reports Disabled When this feature is disabled the Imager will not send Keyboard IN Reports to the host containing data originated by the Imager MS 4 Imager User Manual 3 25 USB HID Interface Microscan HID Report Format Size 64 bytes fixed length The USB HID standard defines all reports as being fixed length Structure REPORT ID 1 LENGTH 1 DATA 62 Values in parentheses indicate the size in bytes of the field Field Descriptions REPORT ID Size 1 byte Value 0x01 Note Report ID is the method employed by USB HID to allow multiple report formats to be sent and received from the same interface LENGTH Size 1 byte Value 0 62 Note Length indicates the number of valid data bytes in the fixed length data field This is necessary because the USB HID standards define HID Reports as fixed length yet the Imager or host may require a smaller data size in any given report DATA Size 62 bytes fixed length Value 0x00 to OxFF Note The Data field is left justified meaning it begins immediately after the Length field All unused data space is NUL 0x00 padded Data values can be binary meaning that they span the entire 8 bit range of 0x00 to OxFF 3 26 MS 4 Imager User Manual Communications Report Format Examples For clarity all report format examples are shown as follows report
62. end of matching and allows for variable lengths of symbol output lt K744 filter number symbology type length wildcard placeholder data unused database index gt 2A hex Any ASCII input in the form of a pair of hex characters Example 2A 00 disabled See ASCII Character Entry Modifier on page 3 32 for a detailed explanation of how to enter ASCII characters as hex values Placeholder Definition The placeholder character requires a character to be present but does not compare the data value Serial Cmd lt K744 filter number symbology type length wildcard placeholder data unused database index gt Default 2 3F hex Options Any ASCII input in the form of a pair of hex characters Example 3F 00 disabled See ASCII Character Entry Modifier on page 3 32 for a detailed explanation of how to enter ASCII characters as hex values MS 4 Imager User Manual 14 11 Output Filter Configuration Data Definition Serial Cmd Default Options This is the data string to be used when comparing symbol data for output filtering and ordering This data string may also contain wildcard and placeholder characters to facilitate matching Remember that in order to filter or order symbol data it must meet all the requirements of the selected filter index Examples Filter data 123 This will match data strings of 123 123456 and 123ABC but not 12
63. eq dcs 14 4 Format Extract insonni eee ette 14 5 Format lrsert oet ERE edere ide e nile 14 7 Output Filter Configuration eee 14 9 Ordered Output Filter aeree ceti nn teta eo dco 14 13 Appendices Appendix A General Specifications esssene A 2 Appendix B Electrical Specifications sssssssssssssss A 5 Appendix C Serial Configuration Commands eese A 6 Appendix D Communications Protocol sssssssssssss A 12 Appendix E ASCII Table sssssssssssseen ener A 21 Appendix F Interface Standards ssssssssssssseee A 22 Appendix G Object Detector sesese emm A 23 Appendix H Operational Tips sssee m A 24 Appendix USB to Serial Virtual COM Port Driver s A 25 Appendix J Glossary of Terms sss A 28 MS 4 Imager User Manual vii About the MS 4 Imager About the MS 4 Imager The key features of the MS 4 are A multi function EZ button for location calibration and symbol reading A target pattern symbol locator that identifies the center point of the field of view A green flash visible from all angles to signal a successful read Ability to read both 2D and linear symbols Ability to read difficult and damaged symbols USB RS 232 RS 422 connectivity options Standard Density and Low Density o
64. fields separated by an underscore _ REPORT ID and LENGTH fields shown as decimal values data fields shown as printable ASCII characters and the number of NUL padding bytes shown as decimal values nn IN report to host 1 11 A 002374938 51 REPORT ID 1 Microscan HID LENGTH 11 DATA A 02374938 This is a Code 39 symbol NUL padding 51 bytes OUT report from host to Imager 1_27_ lt K200 3 gt lt K220 0 300 gt lt K714 gt 35 REPORT ID 1 Microscan HID LENGTH 27 DATA lt K200 3 gt lt K220 0 300 gt lt K714 gt These commands enable External Edge set a 3 second timeout and request the No Read configuration command NUL padding 35 bytes IN report to host 1_62_ lt K714 1 ALONG MESSAGE STREAMED OVER MULTIPLE MICROSCAN HID RE 0 REPORT ID 1 Microscan HID LENGTH 62 DATA lt K714 1 ALONG MESSAGE STREAMED OVER MULTIPLE MICROSCAN HID RE This shows the response to the lt 714 gt command Note that the command status response is not yet complete See the next report example for the complete response NUL padding 0 bytes IN report to host 1_6 PORTS gt 56 REPORT ID 1 Microscan HID LENGTH 6 DATA PORTS gt This is the end of the response to the lt K714 gt command from the previous example The entire lt K714 gt command response is as follows DATA K714 1 ALONG MESSAGE STREAMED OVER MULTIPLE MICROSCAN HID REPORTS gt NUL pa
65. gt If the DataBar 14 status parameter in the K482 command is set to either DISABLED or ENABLED the Imager will only read non stacked DataBar 14 symbols DataBar Limited Add 16384 If enabled DataBar Limited will be active for this database index DataBar Extended Add 32768 If enabled DataBar Extended will be active for this database index Important If the stacked and non stacked operation is required the DataBar Extended command must be configured as follows lt K484 2 gt If the DataBar Extended status param eter in the lt K484 gt command is set to either DISABLED or ENABLED the Imager will only read non stacked DataBar Extended symbols 11 8 MS 4 Imager User Manual Configuration Database Database Mode Switch Mode Definition Selects the event that causes the Imager to load the next database entry to current active settings When Frame Count Time expires and Image Process Looping is enabled the next database entry with modifications to camera settings will be used Note The image capture event always occurs when the first database entry is used Note The Switch Mode setting has no effect on Rapid Capture Mode which always operates in Number of Image Frames mode with a frame count of 1 Serial Cmd lt K256 switch mode frame count time image process looping image dimensions gt Default 1 Options 0 Time 1 Number of Image Frames Time When Switch Mode is set to Time the Imager will lo
66. gt MATCH An ASCII string up to 64 characters Important The ASCII characters lt gt and can only be entered as hex pairs For lt lt K735h 3C gt For gt lt K735h 3E gt For lt K735h 2C gt See ASCII Character Entry Modifier on page 3 32 for a detailed explanation of how to enter ASCII characters as hex values MS 4 Imager User Manual 9 9 Mismatch Replace Mismatch Usage Definition Serial Cmd Default Options Replace Provides a convenient shortcut for applications that need to output a predefined text string whenever a symbol does not match a master symbol Outputs a user defined data string whenever a mismatch occurs and Matchcode is enabled lt K736 status replacement string gt Disabled 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Replacement String Definition Serial Cmd Default Options User defined data string that when enabled replaces symbol data whenever a mismatch occurs lt K736 status replacement string MISMATCH An ASCII string up to 64 characters Important The ASCII characters lt gt and can only be entered as hex pairs For lt lt K736h 3C gt For gt lt K736h 3E gt For lt K736h 2C gt See ASCII Character Entry Modifier on page 3 32 for a detailed explanation of how to enter ASCII characters as hex values 9 10 MS 4 Imager User Manual Matchcode New Master Pin Definition If Matchcode and New Master Pin are enabled and the new m
67. image processing timeout gt Default 5 000 mS 5 sec Options 1 to 65535 in 1mS increments Notes The timeout period does not include capture time f a timeout occurs during processing and no symbols in the field of view have been decoded the image will be recorded as a No Read For this reason a longer timeout should be tried to ensure that the symbol is decoded successfully MS 4 Imager User Manual 10 23 Damaged Symbol Damaged Symbol Usage This feature is useful with badly damaged symbols in which finder patterns or clock patterns are distorted margins are distorted or missing on one or both sides of a symbol or portions of data are damaged Definition When enabled the Imager will make additional attempts and try different processes in order to decode the symbol Due to the complexity of the algorithm required enabling this feature could significantly increase decode time Usage lt K519 damaged symbol status gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 10 24 MS 4 Imager User Manual Camera and IP Setup IP Mode Definition Determines the decode algorithm that will be used to process images Usage lt K527 P Mode FLM direction gt Default Standard Mode Options 0 Standard Mode 1 Fast Linear Mode Standard In Standard Mode images are processed using the standard decode algorithm Fast Linear Mode This mode is used to locate and decode linear symbols that are oriented
68. is enabled under Output On the programmable output will go active on a No Read and remain active until the opposite condition a good read occurs Latch Mode 3 Unlatch Re enter Read Cycle The programmable output is active when the Output On condition has been met and is held active until a new read cycle begins Note All of the Output On modes are inhibited when any Output on Warning is active for Output 1 MS 4 Imager User Manual 7 31 Trend Analysis Output 1 Trend Analysis Output 1 Note Output On under Output 1 Parameters must be set to Trend Analysis for this output to function Output 1 Parameters Output On Trend Analysis Under Output 1 Parameters expand the Trend Analysis tree Trend Analysis Trend Analysis Mode Moread Number of Triggers 25 Number to Output On 4 Decodes per Trigger 1 Usage Useful in cases where the user doesn t want to shut down for one condition but wants to monitor quality and read conditions Definition Applies Trend Analysis settings to Output 1 With Trend Analysis the user can track the occurrences and frequency of mismatches No Reads and the number of reads per trigger and output the results to any of three outputs Example Trend Analysis Mode No Read Trigger Evaluation Period 25 triggers read cycles Number to Output On 4 In this example the Imager will activate an output when 4 No Reads occur within a period of 25 triggers read cycles 7 32 MS 4 Imager U
69. margin causes the image to exceed the maximum image size it will be reduced accordingly Serial Cmd K529 gain shutter speed symbol type WO framing WOI margin line scan height processing Default 75 pixels Options 20 to 640 Line Scan Height Definition This parameter is only used with the Straight Line modes It sets the scan height of the straight line image and it is expressed in number of pixels Serial Cmd K529 gain shutter speed symbol type WOI framing WO margin line scan height processing gt Default 64 pixels Options 3 to 480 Processing Definition This setting defines the amount of time and effort the Imager will spend attempting to decode a symbol for each parameter configuration Serial Cmd lt K529 gain shutter speed symbol type WOI framing WO margin line scan height processing Default Medium Options 0 Low 1 Medium 2 High 3 Definable Low The Imager will spend a low amount of effort attempting to decode the given symbol for each parameter configuration Medium The Imager will spend a medium amount of effort attempting to decode the given symbol for each parameter configuration High The Imager will spend a high amount of effort attempting to decode the given symbol for each parameter configuration Definable The processing time for each image frame is defined by the Image Processing Timeout parameter lt K245 gt MS 4 Imager User Manual 4 9 Cal
70. measures signals deferentially that is the receiver looks at the potentials between the two receive or transmit wires rather than the potential between signal and ground As a result cables if shielded can be up to 4000 feet 1219m in length Like RS 232 RS 422 communication is designed for only two devices on a single line and must have a common ground It can be used wherever RS 232 is used USB The Universal Serial Bus can connect up to 127 devices to a host at a maximum of 6 megabytes per second Mbps of bandwidth A 22 MS 4 Imager User Manual Appendices Appendix G Object Detector In a typical operation an imager will wait for symbol data only during a triggered read cycle A read cycle is initiated by a trigger and can be in the form of a serial command from the host internal trigger or a signal from an object detector external trigger When an object detector also called a sensor package detector etc is used it is set up so that its beam will bounce off the approaching object and the resulting pulse will be sent to the imager to begin the read cycle Typically a detector is positioned so that it will detect the presence of an object before its symbol can be read An object detector is mounted in almost any position relative to the object as long as the object passes within range of the detector and direct or reflected light from the detector does not interfere with the imager s reception As the item continu
71. mode baud rate parity stop bits data bits daisy chain i d status daisy chain i d Options 4 Daisy Chain Function Before the primary reader times out it checks its auxiliary port for data It should be set to wait at least 30 mS for each secondary reader in the daisy chain If no data is received within the read cycle timeout the primary reader sends a No Read message to the host Otherwise the complete data is sent If for example the primary reader is set to timeout in 120 mS the first secondary reader reader downstream might be set to 90 mS the next to 30 mS and so forth thus assuring that at least 30 mS elapses between transmissions Daisy chained readers can send a seriesof symbols by enabling Multisymbol and a common multisymbol separator If the primary reader does not receive the expected number of symbols No Read messages are appended to the data string to make up the difference between the number of symbols enabled in Multisymbol and the number of symbols read For example a primary and two secondary readers have Number of Symbols set to 3 and Multisymbol Separator defined as If the primary and the first secondary reader do not find symbols but the next secondary reader registers a good read the transmitted results would be symbol data No Read No Read a The above example assumes a best case scenario Other factors such as baud rate dynamic focus timing number of characters in a given symbol and the numbe
72. of the Parse Table followed by the user defined extracted output 14 6 MS 4 Imager User Manual Output Format Format Insert Output Index Definition Output Index refers to the database entry you wish to modify with this command A formatted output is built by extracting data from a symbol s original data output and or inserting user defined characters It may be helpful to think of individual indexes as positions in the final formatted output you wish to build Starting with index 1 enter either an extract or insert command to begin building your desired output string Then with the next index number enter either an extract or insert command to continue building the output string Continue this process until you are finished building the string Serial Cmd lt K741 output index length hex string Options 1 to 100 Length Definition Specifies the length of the user defined character string that will be inserted This function is limited to 4 characters per output index so multiple indexes must be entered in order to insert longer character sequences For example if you wish to insert a 10 character sequence in user defined output you would need three commands with consecutive index numbers where the first two character sequence lengths were 4 and the third was 2 Serial Cmd K741 0utput index length hex string Default 0 disabled end of format cell array Options 1 to 4 Hex String Definition
73. on symbol contrast symbol contrast threshold output on print growth print growth threshold output on axial non uniformity axial non uniformity threshold output on UEC UEC threshold gt ISO IEC 16022 Symbol Quality Output 3 K802 output on symbol contrast symbol contrast threshold output on print growth print growth threshold output on axial non uniformity axial non uniformity threshold output on UEC UEC threshold Configurable Output 1 lt K810 output on output state pulse width output mode Configurable Output 2 lt K811 output on output state pulse width output mode Configurable Output 3 MS 4 Imager User Manual K812 output on output state pulse width output mode 7 3 Symbol Data Output Symbol Data Output Symbol Data Output Status Note Symbol Data Output relates to data and should not be confused with Outputs 1 2 and 3 listed in the Output Parameters which describe output states and functions Usage Useful when the host needs symbol data only under certain conditions Definition Defines the conditions under which decoded symbol data is transmitted to the host Serial Cmd lt K705 symbol data output status when to output Default Good Read Options 0 Disabled 1 Match 2 Mismatch 3 Good Read Note Symbol Data Output Status if set to Match or Mismatch will not take effect unless Matchcode Type is enabled and a master symbol is loaded into memory Disabled Usage
74. output index start location length gt 0 1 to n maximum number of characters in the symbol data Defines the length in consecutive characters that will be extracted and placed in user defined output K740 output index start location length gt 0 disabled end of format cell array 1 to n maximum number of characters in the symbol data MS 4 Imager User Manual 14 5 Format Assign Format Extract by ESP Parse Symbols Send and Save Receive Quality Parameters Hide Parse Table Build Sequence Step Insert Data Extract Range Extract 2 4 Sample Symbol Origina ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPGRSTUVWXYZ Output BCD Symbol Parse Step Insert Data Extract Range Extract Add Insert Step 2 4 Add Extract Step Remove Step Clear All Parsing Sample Symbol Original ABCDEFGHIJKLMNDPQRSTUVWXYZ Output BCD Cancel The Extract Range function corresponds to the Start Location and Length parameters in the Format Extract serial command You can extract and insert several character sequences using ESP s Symbol Parse feature In this example the selected extraction range is characters 2 4 The Sample Symbol example on the Symbol Parse dialog shows the selected character positions extracted and output as desired Simultaneously the data string from the actual selected symbol is displayed at the bottom left
75. pattern 2 Failed to locate four corners or failed to qualify user defined dimensions in pixels 3 Failed to locate clock patterns or failed to qualify user defined orientation 0 359 degree 4 Failed to validate clock patterns or failed to qualify user defined symbol size clock element count 5 Failed to decode symbol 7 6 MS 4 Imager User Manual I O Parameters Linear Symbols 1 Failed user defined minimum number of bars 2 Failed to decode start stop character doesn t apply to UPC GS1 DataBar or MicroPDF417 3 Failed user defined minimum number of scan lines that qualify for the minimum number of bars 4 Failed to decode 5 Failed to decode UPC supplemental No Read Message Definition Any combination of ASCII characters can be defined as the No Read message Serial Cmd lt K714 No Read message status No Read message Default No Read Options A string of up to 64 ASCII characters Note No Read Message will only be transmitted if Symbol Data Output is set to Match Mismatch or Good Read No Read Message can be set to any ASCII character Important The ASCII characters lt gt and can only be entered as hex pairs For lt K714h 3C For gt lt K714h 3E gt For lt K714h 2C gt See ASCII Character Entry Modifier on page 3 32 for a detailed explanation of how to enter ASCII characters as hex values MS 4 Imager User Manual 7 7 Bad Symbol Message Bad Symbol Messag
76. point to point protocols will work well in most applications They require no address and use RS 232 or RS 422 communications standards Definition Protocols define the sequence and format in which information is transferred between the reader and the host or in the case of Multidrop between the readers and a concentrator Serial Cmd lt K140 protocol address gt Default Point to Point Options 0 Point to Point 1 Point to Point with RTS CTS 2 Point to Point with XON XOFF 3 Point to Point with RTS CTS and XON XOFF 4 ACK NAK 5 Polling Mode Note In all protocol modes the preamble lt K141 gt and postamble lt K142 gt character strings can be used to frame the decode data and both are included in calculating the LRC Status Longitudinal Redundancy Check Point to Point Standard Usage Used only with RS 232 or RS 422 Definition Standard Point to Point requires no address and sends the data to the host whenever it is available without a request or handshake from the host Serial Cmd lt K140 0 gt Point to Point with RTS CTS Usage A reader initiates a data transfer with an RTS request to send transmission The host when ready responds with a CTS clear to send and the data is transmitted RTS and CTS signals are transmitted over two dedicated wires as defined in the RS 232 standard Used only with RS 232 Definition Point to Point with RTS CTS request to send clear to send is a simple hardware handshak
77. read cycle parameters outputs a No Read message Enable Both Same as Object Qualification except that if no objects qualify then a No Symbol message is output if at least one object qualifies then a Bad Symbol message is output 7 10 MS 4 Imager User Manual I O Parameters Symbol Size 1 Definition Checks for symbol sizes for a specified number of elements In the case of rectangular symbols checks the longer side Serial Cmd lt K718 finder pattern status symbol size mode symbol size 1 symbol size 2 symbol size tolerance dimension mode dimension 1 dimension 2 dimension tolerance orientation mode orientation value Default 10 Options 8 to 88 elements Symbol Size 2 Definition Checks for symbol sizes for a specified number of elements In the case of rectangular symbols checks the shorter side Serial Cmd lt K718 finder pattern status symbol size mode symbol size 1 symbol size 2 symbol size tolerance dimension mode dimension 1 dimension 2 dimension tolerance orientation mode orientation value Default 10 Options 8 to 88 elements Symbol Size Tolerance Definition Sets the allowable deviation up or down for symbol sizes specified in Symbol Size 1 and Symbol Size 2 Serial Cmd K718 finder pattern status symbol size mode symbol size 1 symbol size 2 symbol size tolerance dimension mode dimension 1 dimension 2 dimension tolerance orientation mode orientation value Default 2 Options 0 to 10
78. refer to the Help menu in EZ Trax software or the EZ Trax Quick Start Guide available on the Microscan Tools Drive Configuring EZ Trax Output by ESP To configure EZ Trax using ESP first click the I O button in App Mode to display the I O Parameters tree control ILIL TL Io 7 50 p Parameters I O Parameters Symbol Data Output Noread Message Errare E E ee E Bad No Symbol Qualification Read Duration Output Output Object Info Output Indicators Serial Verification Image Output EZ Trax Output Comm Port Image Mode Image Format JPEG Quality Object Info Output Grade Output EZ Button Calibration Options Database Identifier Output Output 1 Parameters Output 2 Parameters Output 3 Parameters Quality Output ESP Values Good Read Enabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Host Disabled Compressed 90 Disabled Disabled Enabled Disabled MS 4 Imager User Manual I O Parameters EZ Trax Output Enabled z When EZ Trax output is Comm Port Disabled enabled the Imager will attempt Image Mode Enabled to output all enabled EZ Trax Image Format Compressed options EZ Trax will not function JPEG Quality 90 unless enabled Object Info Output Disabled Grade Output Disabled Comm Port EZ Trax Output Disabled Host Image Mode Selects the communication port Image Format that will be used to transfer JPEG Q
79. return will be shown as AM Serial Cmd lt K701 serial command echo status serial command beep status control hex output gt Default Control Options 0 Control 1 Hex 7 24 MS 4 Imager User Manual I O Parameters EZ Button The EZ button has four positions selectable by the length of time the button is held down and indicated by one two three and four beeps in succession Each position can be programmed for any of eight options Definition Serves as a master switch to enable disable the EZ button status Serial Cmd lt K770 global status default on power on load configuration database save for power on gt Default Enabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 2 Trigger 3 Unlatch Outputs 4 Parameter Switch Disabled When set to Disabled the EZ button does not function Enabled When selected the EZ button is enabled and the function of each button position is selected by the EZ Button Mode command Trigger When selected the EZ button acts as a trigger for the Imager to start and end read cycles All other button operations are inactive In External The read cycle endures for as long as the EZ button is pressed unless a Level timeout occurs and Timeout is enabled for End of Read Cycle In External As with Level Edge allows a read cycle to be initiated by pressing the EZ Edge button but unlike Level the read cycle ends with a good read output a timeout or a new trigger Unlatch Outp
80. send all Imager configuration settings chosen in ESP to the Imager Do Not Send or Receive Settings creates a condition in which Auto Sync will not send Imager settings to ESP or send ESP settings to the Imager Show Targeting Pattern During Calibrate and Locate Allows you to determine whether the blue LED target pattern will be on or off during the Locate and Calibrate routines Send XON with Autoconnect Sends an XON Begin Transmission command to the Imager before starting the Autoconnect routine 2 10 MS 4 Imager User Manual Using ESP Document Memo The information you type in the Document Memo field will appear in acontext sensitive text box whenever your cursor hovers over the Document Memo item on the Options menu Insert up to 250 characters to describe this document Type document specific information here Options Preferences Type document specific information here Model Memo Model Memo Similar to Document Memo the information you type in the Model Memo field will appear in a context sensitive text box whenever your cursor hovers over the Model Memo item on the Options menu Memos created in Model Memo are specific to the model enabled when the message was created Insert up to 250 characters to describe this model Type model specific information here Options Preferences Document Memo Model Memo h Type model specific information here Note Memos must be saved in a esp file if you
81. status ECC 130 status gt QR Code lt K480 status gt BC412 lt K481 status check digit output fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length gt DataBar 14 lt K482 status gt DataBar Limited DataBar Expanded lt K483 status gt K484 status fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length MicroPDF417 K485 status unused fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length gt I O Parameters Power On Reset Counts lt K406 power on resets power on saves power on flash saves Time Since Reset lt K407 hours minutes gt Service Message lt K409 status service message threshold resolution gt Serial Verification lt K701 serial command echo status serial command beep status control hex output gt Beeper lt K702 status gt Quality Output lt K704 decodes trigger separator decodes trigger status Symbol Data Output K705 symbol data output status when to output Read Duration Output lt K706 status separator No Read Message lt K714 status message gt Bad Symbol Message K715 unused message No Symbol Message K716 unused message 1D Stacked Symbology Qualification lt K717 minimum number of bars minimum number of qualified scan lines start stop status 2D Symbology Qualification K718 finder pattern status symbol size status symbol size 1 symbol size 2 symbol size tolerance dimension status dimensio
82. status ECC 080 status ECC 100 status ECC 140 status ECC 120 status ECC 130 status Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled ECC 100 Definition When enabled will decode ECC 100 symbols Serial Cmd lt K479 ECC 200 status ECC 000 status ECC 050 status ECC 080 status ECC 100 status ECC 140 status ECC 120 status ECC 130 status Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled ECC 140 Definition When enabled will decode ECC 140 symbols Serial Cmd lt K479 ECC 200 status ECC 000 status ECC 050 status ECC 080 status ECC 100 status ECC 140 status ECC 120 status ECC 130 status Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled ECC 120 Definition When enabled will decode ECC 120 symbols Serial Cmd lt K479 ECC 200 status ECC 000 status ECC 050 status ECC 080 status ECC 100 status ECC 140 status ECC 120 status ECC 130 status Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled ECC 130 Definition When enabled will decode ECC 130 symbols Serial Cmd lt K479 ECC 200 status ECC 000 status ECC 050 status ECC 080 status ECC 100 status ECC 140 status ECC 120 status ECC 130 status Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled MS 4 Imager User Manual 6 5 QR Code QR Code Usage Definition Serial Cmd Default Options Widely implemented in the automotive industry in Japan and throughout their worldwide supply chain QR Code is capable o
83. symbol information and transmits 13 digits If transmitting 13 digits when reading UPC Version A symbols is not desired disable EAN Note The extra character identifies the country of origin lt K473 UPC status EAN status supplementals status separator status separator character supplemental type format UPC E as UPC A gt Disabled 0 Disabled 1 Enabled MS 4 Imager User Manual 6 21 UPC EAN Supplementals Status UPC EAN Usage Reads Supplementals typically used in publications and documentation Definition A supplemental is a 2 to 5 digit symbol appended to the main symbol When set to Enabled or Required the Imager reads supplemental code data that has been appended to the standard UPC or EAN codes Serial Cmd lt K473 UPC status EAN status supplementals status separator status separator character supplemental type format UPC E as UPC A gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 2 Required Disabled UPC Supplementals will not be decoded Enabled When enabled the Imager will try to decode a main and a supplemental However if a supplemental is not decoded the main will be sent by itself at the end of the read cycle Required When set to Required both the main and the supplemental symbols must be read ora single No Read condition results For example if Supplementals is set to Required Separator is enabled and an asterisk is defined as the UPC separator character Then the data is disp
84. these controls 066464 Coana C Fine Decrease ics Increase 4 n 2 The Delay Adjustment slider allows the user extremely precise control of the time delays between image captures in a read cycle Delay values are shown in seconds in the field above the slider The Coarse and Fine Delay Adjustment options determine whether larger or smaller adjustment increments will be used 10 14 MS 4 Imager User Manual Camera and IP Setup Pixel Sub Sampling Definition The camera can be enabled to sub sample pixels in the specified image frame Sub sampling can be set to either 4 1 or 16 1 These ratios signify the sampling rate Usage lt K542 sub sampling gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1241 2 16 1 4 1 At this sampling rate 1 pixel is output for every 4 pixels sampled The image will be sampled 2 1 vertically and 2 1 horizontally for a combined 4 1 ratio An image with dimensions of 640 x 480 will be scaled to 320 x 240 16 1 At this sampling rate 1 pixel is output for every 16 pixels sampled The image will be sampled 4 1 vertically and 4 1 horizontally for a combined 16 1 ratio An image with dimensions of 640 x 480 will be scaled to 160 x 120 MS 4 Imager User Manual 10 15 Camera Camera Camera parameters are typically obtained during the calibration process and do not necessarily need to be modified directly by the user Optics The MS 4 Imager has
85. three properties of color perception along with hue and value Scattering Redirection of light reflecting off a surface or through an object Skew Rotation of a linear or 2D symbol around an axis parallel to the symbol height on the substrate See the illustration under the definition of Pitch Substrate The surface upon which a linear or 2D symbol is printed stamped or etched Symbol Transitions The transition of bars and spaces on a symbol used to detect the presence of a symbol on an object Symbology A symbol type such as Code 39 or Code 128 with special rules to define the widths and positions of bars and spaces to represent specific numeric or alphanumeric information Tilt Rotation of a linear or 2D symbol around an axis perpendicular to the substrate See the illustration under the definition of Pitch Trigger A signal transition or character string that initiates a read cycle Very Large Scale Integration VLSI The creation of integrated circuits by combining thousands of transistor based circuits on a single chip VLSI See Very Large Scale Integration Watchdog Timer A security device that detects system crashes and attempts to reset the imager MS 4 Imager User Manual A 33 Glossary of Terms A 34 MS 4 Imager User Manual
86. threshold output on print growth print growth threshold output on axial non uniformity axial non uniformity threshold output on UEC UEC threshold Default Grade C Options 0 Grade A 1 Grade B 2 Grade C 3 Grade D 7 36 MS 4 Imager User Manual I O Parameters Print Growth Threshold Usage Lets the user set the acceptable level of symbol quality Definition Conforms to ISO IEC 16022 symbol quality grading A B C D Serial Cmd lt K800 output on symbol contrast symbol contrast threshold output on print growth print growth threshold output on axial non uniformity axial non uniformity threshold output on UEC UEC threshold Default Grade C Options 0 Grade A 1 Grade B 2 Grade C 3 Grade D Axial Non Uniformity Threshold Usage Lets the user set the acceptable level of symbol quality Definition Conforms to ISO IEC 16022 symbol quality grading A B C D Serial Cmd lt K800 output on symbol contrast symbol contrast threshold output on print growth print growth threshold output on axial non uniformity axial non uniformity threshold output on UEC UEC threshold Default Grade C Options 0 Grade A 1 Grade B 2 Grade C 3 Grade D Unused Error Correction Threshold Usage Lets the user set the acceptable level of symbol quality Definition Conforms to ISO IEC 16022 symbol quality grading A B C D Serial Cmd lt K800 output on symbol contrast symbol contrast threshold output on print gro
87. threshold value processing mode narrow margins background color symbology type gt Options 1 to 10 Shutter Speed Serial Cmd lt K255 index shutter speed gain sub sampling row pointer column pointer row depth column wiath threshold mode fixed threshold value processing mode narrow margins background color symbology type gt Default 250 Options 15 to 15 000 Gain Serial Cmd lt K255 index shutter speed gain sub sampling row pointer column pointer row depth column wiath threshold mode fixed threshold value processing mode narrow margins background color symbology type gt Default 20 Options 0 to 48 Pixel Sub Sampling Serial Cmd lt K255 index shutter speed gain sub sampling row pointer column pointer row depth column wiath threshold mode fixed threshold value processing mode narrow margins background color symbology type gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 4 1 2 16 1 Important Sub sampling has no effect when the Image Dimension mode is configured as Region of Interest in the Database Mode command This is because the Window of Interest camera settings are determined by the software based on the Region of Interest setup There is no benefit to sub sampling to increase processing speed when ROI is configured because the frame size would need to be increased to make sub sampling possible 11 4 MS 4 Imager User Manual Configuration Database Row Pointer Definition The image dimension sett
88. to Analog Converter DAC A VLSI circuit used to convert digitally processed images to analog for display on a monitor Digital Imaging Conversion of an image into pixels by means of an Analog to Digital Converter where the level of each pixel can be stored digitally Digital Signal Processor DSP A VLSI chip designed for ultra high speed arithmetic processing Often imbedded in a vision engine Discrete I O Inputs and outputs characterized by discrete signal transitions from one voltage level to another so that digital switching can occur Direct Memory Access DMA A capability provided by some computer bus architectures that allows data to be sent directly to memory from an attached device DMA See Direct Memory Access DSP See Digital Signal Processor Dynamic Range The difference between the minimum and maximum thresholds of discernible images the amount of usable signal MS 4 Imager User Manual A 29 Glossary of Terms Edge Enhancement Image processing method to strengthen high spatial frequencies in the image EPROM See Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory Embedded Memory Onboard memory device such as EPROM or flash End of Read Cycle The time or condition at which the imager stops expecting symbol information to decode Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory EPROM A memory chip that retains data when its power supply is turned off non volatile memory Ext
89. want them to available in your next session If you do not save your current session any memos that you have entered during the session will be discarded and will be unavailable in your next session MS 4 Imager User Manual 2 11 Connecting Connecting When you open ESP and the Select Protocol dialog appears choose either RS 232 or USB protocol and click Next The MS 4 Imager s default trigger mode is Continuous Read Mode The USB version of the MS 4 will be in a keyboard wedge configuration causing ESP to receive incoming symbol data as keyboard text This will interfere with the connection attempt and cause it to fail Be sure that no symbols are within the Imager s field of view while connecting to ESP Select Protocol Please select the protocol to use C RS 232 USB If you choose USB protocol Next gt Cancel Select Protocol Please select the protocol to use RS 232 C usB If you choose RS 232 protocol lt Back ren ne reader was found Select the MS 4 sepe EEEEEE from the Select Device menu and click Finish lt Back Cancel Select the com port to use and press Finish to autoconnect to the reader Otherwise select the Force Connect checkbox to connect at the specified settings ComPot com x Click Connect I Force Connect lt Back Cancel When you are connected you wi
90. were illuminated the read result would be a grade A if only the 20 LED were illuminated the result would be a grade F Standard In Standard Mode the STATUS LED indicates read cycle status and the GOOD READ LED illuminates upon a good read at the end of a read cycle In a read rate test these LEDs represent the percentage of good reads per images captured ISO IEC 16022 Grade Usage Provides visual grading of specific ISO IEC 16022 related features Definition Determines which ISO IEC 16022 feature the Imager will grade via the EDs Serial Cmd lt K737 LED mode ISO IEC 16022 grade Default Final Grade Options 0 Final Grade 1 Symbol Contrast 2 Print Growth 3 Unused ECC 7 22 MS 4 Imager User Manual I O Parameters Serial Verification Allows the user to verify configuration command status Serial Command Echo Status Usage This command is useful in removing any doubt about the Imager s interpretation of any configuration command For example if the current preamble is SOM and lt K701 1 START gt is entered the Imager will echo back lt K701 SOM gt since the attempted entry START exceeds the four character limit for that command Therefore it is rejected and the existing SOM message is echoed back and remains the preamble message Definition When enabled a configuration command received from the host is echoed back to the Host host with the resultant settings ost ag Mager
91. where more than one master symbol is required as in a Multisymbol setup for matching and other Matchcode operations Allows the user to define up to 10 master symbols as the master symbol database which can be entered by keyboard scanned in displayed or deleted by serial or ESP commands Click the Master Database tab Enable Matchcode Type Set the Master Symbol Database Size Select the database index in which you want to enter the master symbol Do one of the following to enter master symbol data a Double click the index row to type data directly into the index b Click the Read Symbol into Selected Index to enter the next decoded symbol Set Master Symbol Loads the next symbol decoded into Database Size here the selected index Master Symbol Y Database Size V Matchcode Type Read Symbol intd Selected Index Receive Reader s Database Send Database to Reader Double click a row to enter data into popup dialog box Master Symbol Data Loads the Imager s saved Saves the displayed master symbols into ESP database to the Imager Caution Since the total number of characters available for the master symbol database is limited changes to the Master Symbol Database Size will re allocate the number of characters available for each master symbol and could cause existing master symbols to be deleted See manual fo
92. which the decoded symbol is compared before accepting it as valid or rejecting it Serial Cmd K472 status check digit status check digit output symbol length 1 symbol length 2 guard bar status range mode status Default 10 Options 0 to 64 even only Important If Range Mode is disabled the length of the symbol must match either Symbol Length 1 or Symbol Length 2 to be considered a valid symbol If Range Mode is enabled Symbol Length 1 and Symbol Length 2 form a range into which the length of the symbol must fall to be considered valid Symbol Length 2 Interleaved 2 of 5 Usage Useful in applications where 2 5 symbols of a specific length are required Definition The Symbol Length 2 field is one of two fields against which the decoded symbol is compared before accepting it as valid or rejecting it Serial Cmd lt K472 status check digit status check digit output symbol length 1 symbol length 2 guard bar status range mode status gt Default 6 Options 0 to 64 even only Important If Range Mode is disabled the length of the symbol must match either Symbol Length 2 or Symbol Length 1 to be considered a valid symbol If Range Mode is enabled Symbol Length 2 and Symbol Length 1 form a range into which the length of the symbol must fall to be considered valid MS 4 Imager User Manual 6 15 Interleaved 2 of 5 Guard Bar Status Interleaved 2 of 5 Note Whenever Guard Bar is enabled the
93. y ACK 0x06 NAK 0x15 LRC enabled Transfer 1 HOST TX lt K141 0 gt H IMAGER_TX ACK Transfer 2 HOST_TX lt K100 gt n IMAGER_TX ACK HOST_TX if IMAGER_TX lt K100 8 0 0 1 gt X HOST_TX ACK IMAGER_TX i Error Condition Transfer 1 HOST TX lt K141 0 gt H IMAGER_TX ACK HOST_TX lt K100 gt n IMAGER_TX ACK HOST_TX V IMAGER TX K100 8 0 0 12 X timeout reached IMAGER TX timeout reached IMAGER_TX timeout reached IMAGER_TX timeout reached IMAGER_TX T A 16 MS 4 Imager User Manual Appendices Polling Mode Data Flow Examples Setup 1 Address 0x01 translates to Poll Req 0x1C Unit Select 0x1D RES 0x04 REQ 0x05 STX 0x02 ETX 0x03 ACK 0x06 NAK 0x15 LRC disabled Transfer 1 HOST TX RES 0x1D REQ Select Unit 1 to receive data IMAGER TX Ox1D ACK Unit responds with its address HOST TX STX T ETX IMAGER_TX 0x1D ACK Unit responds with its address HOST_TX RES Terminate Transfer 2 Transfer 2 HOST_TX RES 0x1C REQ Poll Unit 1 for data IMAGER_TX 0x1C STX T 00000 ETX HOST_TX ACK IMAGER_TX RES Terminate Transfer 1 Starting with a RES ensures a clean transaction without leftovers from the previous transaction Error Condition 1 HOST_TX RES 0x1C REQ Poll Unit 1 for data IMAGER_TX Ox1C STX
94. 14 MS 4 Imager User Manual Configuration Database Load Current Settings from Configuration Database Definition Allows the configuration settings contained in a selected database index to be loaded to current active configuration settings Serial Cmd lt K255 index gt Example lt K255 5 gt This command phrase would load the configuration settings contained in database index 5 to current active configuration settings Load Current Settings from Configuration Database by ESP Video Evaluation Calibration WOI Configuration Database Dynamic Setup Active Indexes 5 x Capture Settings IV Auto Sync Database settings with Reader Advanced Options _ wol Rol Processing Settings ise SS SAS Zo 0 Adapt 128 Stand Disa D adept 128 ind Diss Eo pisa o o roe 1280 Adapt 128 Stand Disa 0 0 lo fo 1260 adapt i28 Stand Disa o fos 280 fAdapi 128 Stand Dicat IV Capture for Every Index T Show Database Indes in Output I Sort Index Positions on Good Ree Calibrate _Beceive Setings SendSeting LosdCurent To Index Load des To Curent Notes on Symbol Type Click the Load Index to Current button to load configuration settings from the selected index to current active settings The current DataBar Expanded status does not change if it is configured as En
95. 24 84 6432 86 6448 88 6464 90 6476 93 6488 95 6506 97 6524 100 6538 Rating List Best Running Fine Tune Pass Decode Co CQ 0000000000 00 WW COD Quality 104 112 112 120 136 152 164 176 194 212 226 Rating 6527 Shutter 250 Gain 48 Rating 6517 Shutter 250 Gain 47 Rating 6505 Shutter 250 Gain 46 Rating 6491 Shutter 250 Gain 45 Rating 6476 Shutter 250 Gain 44 Rating 6462 Shutter 250 Gain 43 Rating 6449 Shutter 250 Gain 42 Calibration PASSED 4 16 Shutter 250 250 250 250 250 250 250 250 250 250 250 Gain 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 Locate N Oaoa4an naa D O MS 4 Imager User Manual Calibration Additional Notes about Calibration The following conditions apply to the Imager s calibration process Some of these items are noted at various points throughout this section or in other sections of the Imager s documentation 1 2 3 The Mirrored Image parameter lt K514 gt is not part of the calibration process Background Color lt K451 gt is calibrated If Window of Interest WOI Framing is enabled the WOI will be set to full frame when calibration begins If WOI Framing is disabled the current WOI configuration will be used for the Search Pass 4 IP Mode lt K527 gt will not be altered during calibration 10 11 12 Threshold Mode lt K512 gt will be set to Adaptive during calibration
96. 4 REQ Request 05 STX Start of Text 02 ETX End of Text 03 ACK Acknowledge 06 NAK Negative Acknowledge 15 Note See Polling Mode Data Flow Examples in Appendix D for sample Polling Mode communications scenarios Note See USB HID Interface on page 3 23 for protocol information relating to USB 3 8 MS 4 Imager User Manual Communications RS 422 Status Usage RS 232 is an industry standard RS 422 is used when greater cable lengths are required and or where noise interference is an issue Definition RS 422 if enabled allows communication through RS 422 I O lines When RS 422 is enabled RS 232 is disabled When RS 422 is disabled RS 232 is enabled Serial Cmd lt K102 status gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Note The default setting can only be changed in readers with multiplexed RS 232 RS 422 ports It is forced to 1 enabled in readers with dedicated RS 422 ports Note The USB version of the MS 4 does not support RS 422 MS 4 Imager User Manual 3 9 Auxiliary Port Connections Auxiliary Port Connections The auxiliary port offers an alternative port that can be configured to communicate by RS232 in several modes including daisy chain As with the host port parameters the auxiliary port settings baud rate parity stop bits and data bits must be identical with those of the auxiliary device Usage An auxiliary port connects the Imager to a remote display o
97. 40 4 gt on the main RS 232 or RS 422 ports not on the Auxiliary Port and are completely independent of the Polling Mode Options lt K148 gt The Imager always follows the protocol in both directions to and from the host There is no option to disable it from either direction Serial Cmd lt K147 RES REQ STX ETX ACK NAK gt RES NAK Defaults RES Reset 00 disabled REQ Request 00 disabled STX Start of Text 00 disabled ETX End of Text 00 disabled ACK Acknowledge 06 NAK Negative Acknowledge 15 The following are general outlines of the ACK NAK protocol Items that are framed by brackets can either be disabled or enabled LRC does not include STX but it does include preamble postamble and ETX Symbol Data Output TX to host STX preamble SYMBOL DATA postamble ETX LRC Response from host ACK NAK Sent when LRC ETX postamble or timeout waiting for more data are detected if REQ is disabled depending on what is enabled Commands from Host to Imager TX to Imager STX command ETX LRC Response from Imager ACK NAK Sent when LRC ETX or command ending angle bracket gt are received depending on what is enabled Command Response from Imager to Host TX to host STX preamble COMMAND RESPONSE DATA postamble ETX LRC Response from host ACK NAK Sent when LRC ETX postamble command ending angle bracket gt or timeout waiting for more data are detec
98. 5 standard Noise The same as static in a phone line or snow in a television picture noise is any unwanted electrical signal that interferes with the image being read and transferred by the imager Normally Closed A discrete output state that is only active when open Normally Open A discrete output state that is only active when closed Object Plane An imaginary plane in the field of view focused by an imager s optical system at the corresponding image plane on the sensor MS 4 Imager User Manual A 31 Glossary of Terms Output A channel or communications line Data or discrete signals that are transmitted or displayed by a device Parity An error detection routine in which one data bit in each character is set to 1 or 0 so that the total number of 1 bits in the data field is even or odd Picket Fence Orientation A linear symbol orientation in which the bars are perpendicular to the symbol s direction of travel Pitch Rotation of a linear or 2D symbol around an axis parallel to the symbol length on the Substrate See the illustration below Skew lt lt Symbol or other object E XTn of interest y T 4 Pitch Reader Pixel An individual element in a digitized image array picture element PLC See Programmable Logic Controller Port Logical circuit for data entry and exit One or more ports may be included within a single connector Processing Time
99. 7 7 n Read Cycle Note If Output On is set to Match or Mismatch a transition switching will not occur unless Matchcode Type is enabled and a master symbol is loaded into memory Mismatch or No Read Activates discrete output when the data does not match that of the master symbol or the symbol has not been decoded before the end of the read cycle Match or Good Read Activates a discrete output when the symbol data matches the master symbol Note If you want to output for a good read and Matchcode is not enabled you can enable any output for Match Mismatch Activates a discrete output whenever the symbol data does not match that of the master symbol No Read Activates a discrete output whenever the symbol data is not decoded before the end of the read cycle MS 4 Imager User Manual 7 29 Configurable Output 1 Trend Analysis Usage Typically used when successful decodes are occurring but a discrete output is needed to flag a trend in quality issues Definition Activates discrete output when a trend analysis condition is met depending on the trend analysis option enabled Symbol Quality Usage Typically used when a discrete indication is needed to flag a symbol quality condition Definition Activates discrete output when a symbol quality condition is met depending on the symbol quality option enabled Diagnostic Warning Usage Typically used when a discrete indication of a diagnostic condition is needed
100. 80 trend analysis mode trigger evaluation period number to output on decodes trigger threshold Default 0 Options 0 to 65535 7 34 MS 4 Imager User Manual I O Parameters ISO IEC 16022 Symbol Quality Output 1 Note Output On under Output 1 Parameters must be set to Symbol Quality for this output to function Output 1 Parameters Under Output 1 Parameters expand the Symbol Quality ISO IEC 16022 tree Symbol Quality ISO IEC 16022 Output on Symbol Contrast Disabled Output on Print Growth Disabled Output on Axial Non uniformity Disabled Output on Unused ECC Disabled Symbol Contrast Threshold Grade C Print Growth Threshold Grade C Axial Non uniformity Threshold Grade C Unused ECC Threshold Grade C Output on Symbol Contrast Usage Definition Serial Cmd Default Options Lets the user know if symbol quality is less than acceptable If enabled toggles Output 1 to an active state when Symbol Contrast Threshold is met lt K800 output on symbol contrast symbol contrast threshold output on print growth print growth threshold output on axial non uniformity axial non uniformity threshold output on UEC UEC threshold Disabled 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Output on Print Growth Usage Definition Serial Cmd Default Options Lets the user know if symbol quality is less than acceptable If enabled toggles Output 1 to an active state when Print Growth Threshold is met lt K800 outpu
101. 9 Ordered Output Filter 5e emere de ter cheer tbe RU Bee oes Ce eden anoo 14 13 This section explains how to control the formatting and filtering of decoded symbol data for output MS 4 Imager User Manual 14 1 Output Format Serial Commands Output Format Serial Commands Format Extract K740 output index start location length gt Format Insert lt K741 output index length hex string Format Assign lt K742 symbol number status gt Output Format Status lt K743 output format status Output Filter Configuration lt K744 filter number symbology type length wildcard placeholder data unused database index gt Ordered Output Filter lt K745 number of filters gt 14 2 MS 4 Imager User Manual Output Format Output Format Status Definition Serial Cmd Default Options This is a global enable disable parameter In order to use formatting you must set up the format using the insert and extract commands and you must also assign a symbol to format using the Format Assign command lt K743 output format status gt Disabled 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Output Format Status Disabled When Format Status is set to Disabled output formatting is globally disabled Output Format Status Enabled When Format Status is set to Enabled output formatting is enabled However Format Assign Format Insert and Format Extract must be properly set up as well By ESP On the Output Format tab
102. CAN EM sup Esc Fs as ns us se Click Delete to remove characters Cancel The Format Insert process is very similar to the Format Extract process except that Insert allows you to enter characters using the Insertion Calculator shown above i Parse Symbols Send and Save Y Hide Parse Table Test Build Sequence Insert Data Extract Range Insert SP SP Extract 3 5 Notice that Extract and Insert share the same Parse Table Sample Symbol Parse Symbol Parse Stp Insert Data Extract Range Add Step Remove Step Clear All Parsing Sample Symbol Parse Insert Extract Originak micro Original amp BEDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUMwXYZ 1l23456788 Output cro lt Output CDE tees 14 8 MS 4 Imager User Manual Output Format Output Filter Configuration Definition Output filtering is a method of providing a set of good read qualifiers and also providing ordered output There is a filter for up to the first 10 positions in a multisymbol output The first filter corresponds to the first symbol output at the end of the read cycle Each filter has has settings for the following four parameters Symbology Type Symbol Length Data and Configuration Database Number Serial Cmd lt K744 filter number symbology type length wildcard placeholder data unused database index gt Rules for Output Filter Configur
103. Calibrate Calibration will be initiated when the associated button position is selected To abort calibration quickly press and release the EZ button Save for Power On All Imager settings will be saved to non volatile memory to be recalled on power on whenever the associated button position is selected This is the same as sending a lt Z gt from the terminal Load New Master Functions in the same way as new master pin input whenever the associated button position is selected The new master pin s Consecutive Decode requirement holds true for this function MS 4 Imager User Manual 7 27 EZ Button Modes Target System Turns on the target pattern whenever the associated button position is selected To disable quickly press and release the EZ button Note This mode is the only one that does not require that the button be released before taking effect Thus as soon as the Imager beeps the appropriate number of times for the position it will take effect If it is necessary to have the target system on before another operation such as calibration or read rate is performed ensure that the target system mode is assigned a lower position so that it will be activated first Bar Code Configuration Enables bar code configuration mode whenever the associated button position is selected When enabled the Imager can accept configuration commands from bar codes without first reading a special coded Data Matrix ISO IEC 16022 symbo
104. Capture and Continuous Capture modes as well as with the Configuration Database Serial Cmd lt K245 image processing timeout gt Default 5 000 mS 5 sec Options 1 to 65535 in 1mS increments Notes The timeout period does not include capture time If a timeout occurs during processing and no symbols in the field of view have been decoded the image will be recorded as a No Read For this reason a longer timeout should be tried to ensure that the symbol is decoded successfully 5 22 MS 4 Imager User Manual Read Cycle Image Storage Image Storage Type Definition Allows the user to store images from separate read cycles and to retrieve them later The number of available slots for storage depends on the mode of operation If the Imager is in Rapid Capture Mode the number of images that can be stored is equivalent to the maximum number of the rapid count the current rapid count setting If the Imager is inContinuous Capture Mode a number of images equivalert to the maximum number of the rapid count minus 3 Serial Cmd lt K244 image storage type image storage mode gt Default Disabled Clear Options 0 Disabled Clear 1 Store on No Read Disabled Clear Upon selection of this option all saved images will be cleared and the Imager will not store images for later viewing Store on No Read This option will cause the Imager to store an image upon exting the read cycle for retrieval at a later time If multipl
105. Connect Help G e App Mode Connect Switch Model Welcome to Easy Setup Program 1 First position the MS 4 Imager at the desired Focal Distance Note To avoid glare set the angle of the reader s about 15 degrees relative to the symbol 2 Click Locate to begin Stop IV Decodes per Second MS 4 You will see the blue target pattern projected from the front of the Imager Center the target pattern over the symbol you wish to read Center on object in field of view Target pattern shown as it would appear between 3 and 6 inches Click the Stop button to end the Locate function Stop MS 4 Imager User Manual Calibrate Settings Step 8 Calibrate Settings MS 4 image settings can be adjusted automatically for optimum readability by either the EZ button or by ESP During the calibration routine the reader will flash its amber read rate percent LEDs and red illumination LEDs while searching through various focus and camera settings and determining the best configuration for decoding symbol data Upon successful completion of this routine a green LED pattern will flash brightly and illuminate the symbol If unsuccessful the Imager will emit 5 short beeps and stop searching Calibrate by EZ Button 1 2 Hold down the EZ button about two seconds and release when you hear two short beeps The 20 and 40 LEDs will illuminate The Imager will search through various c
106. Default 10 Options 0 to 255 MS 4 Imager User Manual 10 21 Number of Symbols in Field of View Number of Symbols in Field of View Definition This command allows the user to determine how FLM will behave in relation to the candidate symbols in the field of view Serial Cmd lt K518 number of symbols in field of view gt Default 0 Options 0 Any number of symbols 1 One symbol 2 More than one symbol Note When the number of symbols in the field of view is set to 1 codeword stitching from all scaled image processes is allowed for PDF417 and MicroPDF417 Note This variable is used in Fast Linear Mode FLM usually considers the whole image as one candidate but when Number of Symbols in Field of View is set to 2 FLM will try to locate the candidates first and then decode The symbols cannot be side by side they must be parallel 10 22 MS 4 Imager User Manual Camera and IP Setup Image Processing Timeout Caution Image Processing Timeout if not properly set can have a negative impact on good reads Usage Useful in higher speed applications where image processing time is long enough that not all captures have an opportunity to be processed Definition Specifies the maximum amount of time to process a captured image When the timeout expires the image processing is aborted This timeout works in both Rapid Capture and Continuous Capture modes as well as with the Configuration Database Serial Cmd lt K245
107. Default Macros Click on subsequent Row to see the When you default macros the entire arrows to edit macros next row of macros set is restored to their original macros macro commands When you click on the macro name the macro is executed in the Terminal window If this is a command it is sent to the reader at the same time that it is displayed Editing a Macro When you click the arrow next to any macro and select Edit the following appears Macro Entry Macro Name Read Rate percent Macro Yale lt C p gt Cancel You can edit an existing macro or type in the Macro Name text field and define it in the Macro Value text field Click OK MS 4 Imager User Manual 12 5 Terminal Window Menus Terminal Window Menus Right click on the Terminal window to display the following menu Copy selected text to clipboard Copy Paste Paste from Terminal or other text Clear all text in Terminal window Clear Select All text in the Terminal window Select All Save brings up a Save As dialog Save Change Font of text in Terminal brings up a Font dialog Change Echo Font to change typed text brings up a Font Change Font dialog Change Echo Fant Enable Echo enables Echo text typed by user Enable Echo Change Background Color of Terminal window lor Non Printable Characters allows you to hide non printable Change Background Color characters or to show them in Standard or Enhanc
108. EFT EN 61000 4 4 Conducted RF Immunity EN 61000 4 6 EN 55022 Class B Radiated Emissions and Class B Conducted Emissions The MS 4 Imager has been tested by an independent electromagnetic compatibility laboratory in accordance with the applicable specifications and instructions x MS 4 Imager User Manual Introduction Statement of ROHS Compliance All Microscan readers with a G suffix in the FIS number are ROHS Compliant All compliant readers were converted prior to March 1 2007 All standard accessories in the Microscan Product Pricing Catalog are ROHS Compliant except 20 500013 01 and 98 000039 02 These products meet all the requirements of Directive 2002 95 EC European Parliament and the Council of the European Union for ROHS compliance In accordance with the latest requirements our RoHS Compliant products and packaging do not contain intentionally added Deca BDE Perfluorooctanes PFOS or Perfluorooctanic Acid PFOA compounds above the maximum trace levels To view the document stating these requirements please visit http eur lex europa eu LexUriServ LexUriServ do uri CELEX 32002L0095 EN HTML and http eur lex europa eu LexUriServ LexUriServ do uri OJ L 2006 372 0032 0034 EN PDF Please contact your sales manager for a complete list of Microscan s RoHS Compliant products This declaration is based upon information obtained from sources which Microscan believes to be reliable and from random sample testing howeve
109. Grades Allows you to switch from the default letter grades to number grades in symbol quality report output Show Report Options during Generate Report Sets the symbol quality report output to show the complete array of report options Include Image Sets the symbol quality report output to include a captured image of the symbol being analyzed Bitmap and JPEG image formats are both available Bitmap images although higher resolution have larger file sizes and take longer to load MS 4 Imager User Manual 2 9 Menu Toolbar Advanced Tab ESP Preferences General Terminal Bar Code Options Grade Report Options Advanced Auto Sync When entering a view that supports amp uto Sync do the following Iv Always ask before Auto Sync occurs Receive settings from the reader Send ESP settings to the reader C Do not send or receive settings Send XON with amp utoconnect Default Settings The Auto Sync dialog at the top of the Advanced tab allows you to determine whether Auto Sync will be automatically enabled in sections of ESP where it is used or if it will ask you before it enables Auto Sync functions Always Ask Before Auto Sync Occurs If you check this option box you are then able to determine what specific Auto Sync functions will be enabled Receive Settings from the Reader will automatically send the Imager s settings to ESP when Auto Sync is enabled Send ESP Settings to the Reader will automatically
110. IFT RIGHT ALT RIGHT GUI NOOR WDM o 3 28 MS 4 Imager User Manual Communications Field Descriptions RESERVED Size 1 byte Value 0x00 Note This field is Reserved Its value is always NUL 0x00 KEYCODES Size 6 bytes Value 0x00 to OxFF Note The MS 4 Imager translates 8 bit data values into Keycode data in the following ways 8 Bit Data Value Keycode Data 0x00 to Ox1F and Ox7F to OxFF Decimal key unless otherwise noted CR 0x0D Enter key TAB 0x09 Tab key ESC 0x1B ESC key Printable characters 0x20 to Ox7E These all translate to the keystrokes that produce them This includes a z 0 9 punctuation and SHIFT in the Modifier field when necessary Only the first Keycode in the 6 byte array will be populated MS 4 Imager User Manual 3 29 USB HID Interface USB HID Configuration Options The user has the following options for configuring and defaulting a USB version of the MS 4 Configuration Symbols Data Matrix with Configure Reader Flag Symbol configuration can be performed out of the box as the MS 4 is configured for Continuous Read Mode and Data Matrix is enabled by default Data Matrix symbols are used to encode configuration commands when the symbology s configure reader flag is set If the read cycle is changed or if Data Matrix is disabled another configuration default method must be used This is because the USB MS 4 has no external trigger unless the user has co
111. It is useful when an application only needs to use the discrete outputs and can allow the Imager to do the decision making When Disabled the host does not need the symbol data and the communication lines are used only for setup and status checks Definition When set to Disabled the Imager will not transmit any data that is gener ated during a read cycle symbols No Reads etc Match Usage Match is used in an application that requires specific symbol information and needs to sort route or verify based on matching the specific symbol data Definition When set to Match the Imager transmits symbol data whenever a symbol matches a master symbol However if Matchcode Type is Disabled it transmits on any good read Note A No Read can still be transmitted if Enabled Mismatch Usage Mismatch is typically used as a flag within the host system to prevent an item from being routed in the wrong container Definition With Mismatch enabled the Imager transmits symbol data whenever the symbol data information does NOT match the master symbol Note A No Read can still be transmitted if Enabled 7 4 MS 4 Imager User Manual I O Parameters Good Read Usage Good Read is used when an application requires all symbol data to be transmitted It s typically used in tracking applications in which each object is uniquely identified Definition With Good Read enabled the Imager transmits symbol data on any good read regardless
112. MICROSCAN MS 4 Imager User Manual P N 84 000004 Rev Copyright and Disclaimer ii Copyright 2015 Microscan Systems Inc Tel 1 425 226 5700 800 762 1149 Fax 1 425 226 8250 All rights reserved The information contained herein is proprietary and is provided solely for the pur pose of allowing customers to operate and or service Microscan manufactured equipment and is not to be released reproduced or used for any other purpose without written permission of Microscan Throughout this manual trademarked names might be used We state herein that we are using the names to the benefit of the trademark owner with no intention of infringement Disclaimer The information and specifications described in this manual are subject to change without notice Latest Manual Version For the latest version of this manual see the Download Center on our web site at www microscan com Technical Support For technical support e mail helpdesk microscan com Warranty For current warranty information see www microscan com warranty Microscan Systems Inc United States Corporate Headquarters 1 425 226 5700 800 762 1149 United States Northeast Technology Center 1 603 598 8400 800 468 9503 European Headquarters 31 172 423360 Asia Pacific Headquarters 65 6846 1214 MS 4 Imager User Manual Introduction Table of Contents Chapter 1 Quick Start Step 1 Check Required Hardware sssee
113. Maximum LED output 564 mW Wavelength 470 nm 525 nm 617 nm Location of the MS 4 s LED aperture window LED Aperture Window CAUTION Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure IMPORTANT The MS 4 is intended for connection to a UL listed direct plug in power unit marked Class II and rated 5 VDC at 3 Watts or greater if using electrical accessories European models must use a similarly rated Class or Class II power supply that is certified to comply with standard for safety EN 60950 MS 4 Imager User Manual ix Statement of Agency Compliance Statement of Agency Compliance FE The MS 4 Imager has been tested for compliance with FCC Federal Communications Commission regulations and has been found to conform to all applicable FCC Rules and Regulations To comply with FCC RF exposure compliance requirements this device must not be co located or operate in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment CE The MS 4 Imager has been tested for compliance with CE Conformit Europ enne standards and guidelines and has been found to conform to applicable CE standards specifically the EMC requirements EN 55024 ESD EN 61000 4 2 Radiated RF Immunity EN 61000 4 3 ENV 50204
114. New Master Pin Enter Master Symbol Data lt K225 status gt lt K231 master symbol number master symbol data gt Request Master Symbol Data lt K231 gt for all or lt K231 master symbol number gt Delete Master Symbol Data lt K231 master symbol number gt Match Replace K735 status match replacement string gt Mismatch Replace A 8 K736 status mismatch replacement string MS 4 Imager User Manual Appendices Camera and IP Setup IP Threshold lt K512 threshold mode fixed threshold value gt Mirrored Image lt K514 mirrored image gt Window of Interest lt K516 row pointer column pointer row depth column width gt Hollow Mode Number of Symbols in Field of View lt K517 hollow mode status gt lt K518 number of symbols in field of view gt Damaged Symbol lt K519 damaged symbol status gt Focal Distance lt K525 focal distance read only gt Focal Distance Table lt K526 number of focal distances focal distance IP Mode lt K527 P Mode FLM direction gt Illumination Brightness lt K536 brightness gt Camera lt K541 shutter speed gain gt Configuration Database Number of Active Indexes lt K252 number of active database settings database sort gt Configuration Database Status Save Current Settings to Database lt K255 index shutter speed gain focal distance digital zoom row pointer column pointer row depth
115. PDF417 b BC412 d Data Matrix e GS1 DataBar RSS Modifier Example d indicates a Data Matrix symbol lt K450 narrow margins symbology identifier status gt Disabled 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Explanation of Modifiers for Code 39 Codabar and l 2 5 For Code 39 Codabar and l 2 5 the modifier indicates Check Character and Check Character Output status For Code 39 only Full ASCII must be enabled to see modifiers 4 5 and 7 Modifier Check Character dr ae Full ASCI od M pe Md ormed 0 Disabled N A No 1 Enabled Enabled No 3 Enabled Disabled No 4 Disabled N A Yes 5 Enabled Enabled Yes 7 Enabled Disabled Yes Example A5 indicates a Code 39 symbol with Check Character and Check Character Output enabled and Full ASCII conversion performed Explanation of Modifiers for Other Symbologies For Code 128 a 1 indicates EAN 128 otherwise the modifier is 0 For all other symbologies the modifier is 0 6 32 MS 4 Imager User Manual Symbologies Background Color Usage Symbol backgrounds are often White or other very light colors If the background is darker than the symbol Black background should be enabled Definition Allows the user to specify the symbol background used in the application Serial Cmd lt K451 background color Default Both Options 0 White 1 Black 2 Both White When White background is enabled the bars of linear symbols and the elements of 2D symbols ar
116. PEG Quality 30 Symbol quality information Object Info Output Disabled will be output in the form of an Grade Output Disabled v lt abbreviated identifier for each Disabled read cycle Enabled 7 52 MS 4 Imager User Manual I O Parameters Configuring EZ Trax Output by Serial Command Usage Useful for when you want to configureEZ Trax output using serial commands instead of the EZ Trax graphic interface Definition When EZ Trax output is enabled the Imager will attempt to output all enabled EZ Trax options EZ Trax will not function unless enabled Serial Cmd lt K757 status comm port image mode image format jpeg quality object info output grade output gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Comm Port Definition Selects the communication port that will be used to transfer image files Serial Cmd lt K757 status comm port image mode image format jpeg quality object info output grade output gt Default Host Options 0 Host 1 Aux 2 USB Host Port Sends output using the current Host Port Aux Port Sends output using the Auxiliary Port USB Sends output using a USB connection Image Mode Definition Determines which read cycle condition triggers image file output Serial Cmd lt K757 status comm port image mode image format jpeg quality object info output grade output gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Good Read 2 No Read 3 No Read and Good Read 4 M
117. Parameters Symbol Contrast Enabled g Print Growth Disabled The enabled Symbol Axial Non uniformity Disabled Quality parameters are Unused ECC Disabled appended to symbol data Grading output in the order that they Percent Cell Damage Disabled appear in the tree control Capture Time Enabled i Locate Time Enabled 8 Decode Time Enabled 8 Pixels Per Element Enabled 8a ECC Level Disabled Matrix Size Disabled Quiet Zone Disabled Symbol Angle Disabled If you enable the outputs shown above they will bereturned Locate Time in this order Microscan Grading Symbol Symbol Contrast Decode Time Data ISO IEC 16022 Microscan Grading EE 0123456789abcdefghijklmnopqrstuv 256 A 30 2103 47 Total Pixels Per Element Read Time Microscan Grading Capture Time Microscan Grading MS 4 Imager User Manual 8 3 Symbol Quality by ESP Symbol Quality by ESP Tree Control J App Mode Click this button to bring up the App Mode view A Symbol Quality Click this button to bring up the Symbol Quality tree control 8 4 Parameters Symbol Quality Global amp To open nested options single click the Data Matrix ISO IEC 16022 Parameters Symbol Contrast Disabled Pr
118. Reset lt T gt Trigger Counter Counter Request lt U gt Trigger Counter Reset and Clear lt V gt Good Read Match Counter lt W gt Good Read Match Counter Reset lt X gt Mismatch Counter lt Y gt Mismatch Counter Reset lt G gt Store Next Symbol Read to Database Index 1 Master Database lt Gn gt Store Next Symbol Read to Database Index n lt NEWM gt New Master Load Status it Display All Firmware Part Numbers ita Display Application Code Part Number Part Number lt b gt Display Boot Code Part Number Checksum lt p gt Display Profile Module Part Numbers lt gt Display All Available Firmware Checksums lt la gt Display Application Code Code Checksum lt b gt Display Boot Code Checksum lt p gt Display Profile Module Checksum L1 Programmable Output 1 L2 Programmable Output 2 L3 Programmable Output 3 Device Control 11 Targeting System On 10 Targeting System Off lt l gt Disable Imager lt H gt Enable Imager lt a1 gt Include PDF Information in Preamble PDF417 lt A gt Reset does not save for power on lt Ard gt Reset and Recall Microscan Defaults lt Arp gt Reset and Recall Power On Parameters Default Reset Save lt Arc gt Reset and Recall Customer Default Parameters lt Z gt Save Current Settings for Power On lt Zc gt Save Current Settings as Customer Default Parameters for Power On 13 2 MS 4 Imager User Manual Utilities Recall Microscan Default Parameters and Save
119. Result Stored Frame 5 24 1 No Read No Read Good Read Symbol 1 Good Read None 1 No Read No Read No Read No Read Frame 3 2 No Read No Read Good Read Symbol 1 No Read Frame 2 MS 4 Imager User Manual Read Cycle Minimum Good Reads Definition This value specifies the number of times a symbol needs to be read to qualify as a good read Serial Cmd lt K221 minimum good reads gt Default 1 Options 1 to 255 MS 4 Imager User Manual 5 25 Setting Up the Imager for EZ Trax Setting Up the Imager for EZ Trax If you are using EZ Trax software it is important to set up the MS 4 correctly before beginning Click the Read Cycle button to display the Read Cycle tree control Read Cycle Y Parameters ESP Values Read Cycle Multisymbol Trigger Mode External Edge amp Trigger Filter Duration External Trigger State Positive Serial Trigger Decodes Before Output 1 End of Read Cycle URN 1e x Read Cycle Timeout amp Capture Mode New Trigger Capture Time Haba or New Trigger Image Processing Settings Set Trigger Mode lt K200 gt to External Edge Trigger C RENE Eten Edae zl Trigger Filter Duration Continuous Read External Trigger State Continuous Read 1 Output External Level External Edge Serial Data and Edge Set Capture Mode lt K241 gt to Rapid Capture Rapid Capture Y Rapid Capture Once these Rea
120. SP Microscan Symbol Quality Output by ESP ESP s Symbol Quality interface allows you to evaluate Data Matrix symbols for compliance with a rigorous set of standards such as Locate Time Capture Time and Decode Time First determine which parameters you want to evaluate using the Symbol Quality tree control Grading Percent Cell Damage Disabled Capture Time Disabled Locate Time Disabled Decode Time Disabled Pixels Per Element Disabled ECC Level Disabled Matrix Size Disabled Quiet Zone Disabled Symbol Angle Disabled Once you have set these Data Matrix evaluation parameters go to the Preferences Tab and set your Data Matrix Grading Report output preferences After your output preferences are set click the Data Matrix Grading button Data Matrix Grading There will be a wait of a few seconds and then the evaluation results will appear in the Symbol Quality view in a format similar to the one shown below Data Matrix Grading Report ISO IEC Symbol Contrast 80 A 16022 Print Growth 8 26 Dx 51 Dnon 5 x iR Dy 547 Dnax 6 i Dmin 35 x Axial Nonuniformity 8 88 avg 13 2 Yaug 13 1 Unused ECC 180 x Eact a Emax 18 GRADING z Cell Dam 8x I Total Read Tine 99 ms Capture Tin 65 ms Locate Tine 27 ms Decode Tim 7 ms Pixels Element eed ECC Lev 288 Matrix Size 14x14 Quiet Zone PASS If you want to view the results in a report format click the Sav
121. SUM gt lt a APP_CHECKSUM gt lt p PROFILE_CHECKSUM gt When you send lt la gt a request for the application code checksum the Imager returns lt la APP_CHECKSUM gt When you send lt b gt a request for the boot code checksum the Imager returns lt b BOOT_CHECKSUM gt When you send lt p gt a request for profile module checksum the Imager returns lt p PROFILE_CHECKSUM gt 13 16 MS 4 Imager User Manual Utilities Bar Code Configuration Definition Bar Code Configuration Mode is a way of programming the Imager by using ECC 200 Data Matrix symbols Serial Cmd lt BCCFG gt Bar Code Configuration Mode can be entered three different ways 1 By forcing the Imager into Bar Code Configuration Mode using serial command lt BCCFG gt 2 By configuring one of the 4 EZ button positions to Bar Code Configuration Mode 3 By reading a Data Matrix symbol with a special code word used by ISO IEC 16022 to signify Imager programming This can be either in a regular read cycle or during a read rate test Reading this symbol in the calibration routine will have no effect Once Bar Code Configuration Mode has been entered the Data Matrix symbols can be thought of as serial data You can configure the Imager by printing labels in Microscan s serial command format Commands are processed as if the data were streamed in through the serial port The Imager will acknowledge the symbol with a beep green flash and echo the serial
122. See ASCII Character Entry Modifier on page 3 32 for a detailed explanation of how to enter ASCII characters as hex values 7 48 MS 4 Imager User Manual I O Parameters Quality Output Separator Definition The separator character separates quality output data from symbol data Serial Cmd lt K704 separator decodes trigger status Default Options Any ASCII character Important The ASCII characters lt gt and can only be entered as hex pairs For K704h 3C For gt lt K704h 3E gt For lt K704h 2C gt See ASCII Character Entry Modifier on page 3 23 for a detailed explanation of how to enter ASCII characters as hex values Decodes per Trigger Status Definition When this feature is enabled the Imager enters a state where it processes frames as configured until the end of a read cycle with or without a successful symbol decode When the read cycle ends the Imager outputs any decoded symbol data along with the decodes per trigger count Serial Cmd lt K704 separator decodes trigger status Default 0 Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled MS 4 Imager User Manual 7 49 Configuring EZ Trax Output Configuring EZ Trax Output After you have set up your Imager for EZ Trax you can configure the software in three different ways using the EZ Trax interface using the tree controls in ESP and using serial commands For detailed information about how to use the EZ Trax user interface for configuration
123. Specify that matches the encoded data or write your own caption Add start configuration code Addend configuration code Save Settings Differences from Default Settings The symbol you create will be displayed in the field at the bottom of the Bar Code Dialog MS 4 Imager User Manual 2 13 Navigating in ESP Navigating in ESP To change Imager settings or to access the Utilities Camera Terminal or Output Format views click the App Mode button de App Mode To return to EZ Mode click the EZ Mode button lt 2 EZ Mode To make changes to configuration settings in the control trees Parameters Camera Setu P The X denotes the B Camera default option setting Illumination Brightness Disabled Sub sampling Window of Interest Top 4 1 Left 15 1 Height 480 Width 640 Image Processing Settings A 1 Left click on the to expand menu items 2 Double click the desired parameter and single click in the selection box to view options 3 Place your cursor in the selection box scroll down to the setting you want to change and single click the setting 4 Left click again on the open screen to complete the selection 5 Right click on the open screen and select Save to Reader to implement the command in the Imager You can send the command without saving it or you
124. Symbol Quality Microscan Symbol Quality Output Percent Cell Damage Data Matrix Only Definition When this feature is enabled the cell damage percentage is appended to data output Serial Cmd K710 percent cell damage total read time capture time locate time decode time pixels per element EC level matrix size quiet zone symbol angle Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Total Read Time Definition The time that transpires between the image capture and the output of the decoded data including locate time When enabled the total read time is appended to the symbol data Serial Cmd lt K710 percent cell damage total read time capture time locate time decode time pixels per element EC level matrix size quiet zone symbol angle Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled a Total Read Time applies globally to all three Symbol Quality standards Capture Time Definition Capture time in milliseconds is a fixed overhead that includes the time of capture and transfer of the image When enabled the capture time is appended to the symbol data Serial Cmd lt K710 percent cell damage total read time capture time locate time decode time pixels per element EC level matrix size quiet zone symbol angle gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Locate Time Definition The time in milliseconds from the start of image processing until the symbol has been located and is
125. Symbologies Large Intercharacter Gap Codabar Definition When disabled the spaces between characters or the inter character gap are ignored during the decode process Note If the inter character space is large enough to be considered a margin the symbol will not decode regardless of this parameter s setting Serial Cmd lt K471 status start stop match start stop output large intercharacter gap fixed symbol length status symbol length check digit type check digit output gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Fixed Symbol Length Status Codabar Definition When disabled the Imager will accept any Codabar symbol provided it doesn t exceed the system s maximum capabilities When enabled the Imager will reject any Codabar symbol that doesn t match the fixed length Serial Cmd lt K471 status start stop match start stop output large intercharacter gap fixed symbol length status symbol length check digit type check digit output Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Symbol Length Codabar Definition This is the value against which all Codabar symbol lengths will be compared Serial Cmd lt K471 status start stop match start stop output large intercharacter gap fixed symbol length status symbol length check digit type check digit output gt Default 10 Options 1 to 64 MS 4 Imager User Manual 6 19 Codabar Check Digit Type Codabar Definition When disable
126. abled Stacked and the database DataBar Expanded status is Enabled The current DataBar 14 status does not change if it is configured as Enabled Stacked and the database DataBar Expanded status is Enabled Data Matrix ECC level is determined by the current settings and not by database settings Therefore the database does not know which ECC level to enable and has no effect on current Data Matrix ECC settings MS 4 Imager User Manual 11 15 Request Selected Index Settings Request Selected Index Settings Definition Returns configuration settings for the selected database index Serial Cmd lt K255 index gt Example lt K255 5 gt This command phrase would return the configuration settings for database index 5 11 16 MS 4 Imager User Manual Configuration Database Request All Configuration Database Settings Definition Returns configuration settings for all indexes in the configuration database Serial Cmd lt K255 gt Example K255 This command returns the configuration settings for all 10 database indexes MS 4 Imager User Manual 11 17 Request All Configuration Database Settings 11 18 MS 4 Imager User Manual E 72 Terminal Contents Terminal WING OW ses ii con itn avendseheadesiscdeegavdusseeidateoasesa a For ra pnra Ra ER ea Lv iu uw rev d 12 2 l a REE m MERECE REESE ATP ERR E 12 3 CU MAE EDO PERITO ARTES THEE IDEE RERUM ER 12 4 WY Fete ol Aenea eat erer Preece Precio tree
127. ad the next database entry to current active settings after a predefined time interval The timer will start upon use of a database entry If the timer expires during an image capture event the timer will not start again until that database entry has been incremented and the new database entry has been loaded to current active settings Number of Image Frames When Switch Mode is set to Number of Image Frames the database entry is incremented after the predetermined number of image capture events has occurred Frame Count Time Definition Indicates the Number of Image Frames that must be captured or the amount of Time that must transpire before the Imager will load the next database index entry Serial Cmd lt K256 switch mode frame count time image process looping image dimensions Default 1 frames mS Options 1 to 65535 MS 4 Imager User Manual 11 9 Database Mode Image Process Looping Usage Useful in applications where it is necessary to process a single captured image multiple times using different IP and decode parameters Serial Cmd lt K256 switch mode frame count time image process looping image dimensions Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Disabled When Image Process Looping is set to Disabled an image is captured for every database configuration whether or not any camera settings have been modified Enabled When Image Process Looping is set to Enabled the last captured image frame
128. ading Report Locate Preferences IV Show Tree Control Fields for report This information is 7 appended at the perator Name M Doe bottom of the report Company Name z Corp Choose the default report type to be generated when you click Save Report on the Report tab Check Autofit Content to ensure that saved PDF report content will fit on a single page Saved Options Iv Show Report Options dialog during Save Report POF tees pan Default Report Type PDF Files pdf v HTML Files htm x CSV Files csv We Autofit Content Low Graphic HTML Append to file Rich Text Edit Files rtf v Store Report without file path prompt eg Typically you will be asked Use symbol data for file name where Vol wish to store your report C Documents and Settingsssymbol grades Default Path If you do not want to be prompted to choose a file Automatically open generated report Print after saving Grout Path Ace v Includelmage Bitmap JPEG JPEG Image Quality 100 4 499 Click the Include Image check box to output the captured symbol image with your saved report as a Overall Grade Based On Bitmap or JPEG image file Iv Symbol Contrast Iv Print Growth v Axial Nonuniformity Enables ESP to parse UII symbol data into the correct Iv Unused ECC fields and output order defined by the U S Dep
129. ager User Manual 4 7 Calibration Options Straight Line This feature is intended for use with linear symbologies If the calibration process is successful the orientation of the symbol is determined and the Window of Interest is modified according to the symbol orientation The scan line orientation is determined to be vertical if the symbol tilt is between 225 and 315 or between 45 and 135 Otherwise the scan line will be horizontal If the symbol is vertical the image column size will be set by the scan height parameter and will be configured for full rowresolution If the symbol is horizontal the image row size will be set by the scan height parameter and will be configured for full column resolution The scan line will be centered in the middle of the symbol If the symbol is tilted such that the scan line will not pass completely through the symbol the scan width will be adjusted to include the entire symbol Refer to the diagram below ZA A Straight Line Framed This parameter is the same as Straight Line except that the Window of Interest will also frame the scan line on the symbol length as well The scan line includes the symbol plus an additional margin area determined by the WOI Margin parameter 4 8 MS 4 Imager User Manual Calibration Window of Interest WOI Margin Definition Sets the margin size that is applied to the calibrated symbol This parameter is expressed in number of pixels If the
130. al 7 33 Trend Analysis Output 1 Trigger Evaluation Period Definition The number of triggers to examine for the trend analysis condition Serial Cmd lt K780 trend analysis mode trigger evaluation period number to output on decodes trigger threshold gt Default 0 Options 0 to 255 Number to Output On Usage Example If Number to Output On is set to 3 and Trend Analysis Mode is set to No Read then the output will not be activated until 3 No Reads have occurred Definition Sets the number of Trend Analysis Mode events mismatches No Reads or reads trigger as configured by Trend Analysis Mode to occur within the trigger evaluation period before activating the associated output Serial Cmd lt K780 trend analysis mode trigger evaluation period number to output on decodes trigger threshold Default 0 Options 0 to 255 Decodes Trigger Threshold Definition When set to this mode and when the appropriate output is set to output on trend analysis the Imager will function in a Decodes per Trigger mode during the read cycle and the trend analysis operation Output will be acti vated based on whether or not the symbol decode count at the end of the read cycle crosses the decodes per trigger threshold Note Although this setup causes the Imager to function in a Decodes per Trigger mode the decode count will only be appended to the symbol data if the status of the Decodes per Trigger command is enabled Serial Cmd lt K7
131. amera and IP settings to determine the best configuration for decoding symbol data Important The object must be centered in the field of view for the calibration process to be successful Note To end all EZ button functions press the EZ button once and quickly release Calibrate by ESP 1 Click the Calibrate button Calibrate 2 The Imager will search through various camera and IP settings to determine the best configuration for decoding symbol data A successful calibration will display a green frame around the symbol and the following message will appear Uploading all reader parameters After a moment the symbol s data and related features will be presented under the Symbol Information box below the image display window Calibrate by Serial Command Send lt CAL gt to begin calibration 1 10 MS 4 Imager User Manual Quick Start Step 9 Test Read Rate This test will let you know the percent of good reads per image captures the Imager is producing Testing by EZ Button 1 To start the read rate test hold down the EZ setup button about three seconds until you hear three short beeps The 20 40 and 60 LEDs will illuminate While the symbol is being decoded the read rate LEDs will indicate the correspond ing read rate percentage on the back of the unit 2 To end the read rate test press the EZ button and quickly release Testing by ESP 1 Click the Test button to star
132. and to follow the progress of those operations using cues such as progress bars real time representations of calibration values and other dynamic user feedback See Chapter 4 Calibration for full documentation of this feature Before After 250 32 8792 Shutter Gain Quality cesar Beginning calibration Processing i 32 3 EE Medium X Shutter Speed 250 X Symbology Settings eles Symbology Type ECC 200 Code 39 zi Cancel v Composite Enabled Save Window of Interest WOI Framing Disabled X WOI Margin 75 Linescan Height 64 Before After 250 38 8792 es l Shutter Gain Quality Capture Settings Processing Gain 38 zi Medun z Shutter Speed 250 ivi Symbology Settings Symbology Type ECC 200 Code 39 zi Cancel Composite Enabled Save Window of Interest WOI Framing Disabled zl WOI Margin 75 Linescan Height B4 ESP s Calibration interface shown during a calibration routine MS 4 Imager User Manual ESP s Calibration interface shown after a calibration routine 10 9 Window of Interest Window of Interest The active pixel area of the image sensor is called the Window of Interest WOI The WOI allows the user to select an area of the field of view in which the desired symbol is located The programmable window of interest increases decode speed improves threshold and makes it easy to select specific symbols from amon
133. ar status range mode status Disabled 0 Disabled 1 Enabled MS 4 Imager User Manual Symbologies Code 93 Usage Sometimes used in clinical applications Definition Code 93 is a variable length continuous symbology employing four element widths Each Code 93 character has nine modules that may be either black or white Each character contains three bars and three spaces Serial Cmd lt K475 status fixed symbol length status symbol length Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Fixed Symbol Length Status Code 93 Definition When disabled the Imager will accept any Code 93 symbol provided is doesn t exceed the system s maximum capabilities When enabled the Imager will reject any Code 93 symbol that doesn t match the fixed symbol length Serial Cmd lt K475 status fixed symbol length status symbol length Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Symbol Length Code 93 Definition This is the symbol length value against which all Code 93 symbols will be compared Serial Cmd lt K475 status fixed symbol length status symbol length Default 10 Options 1 to 64 MS 4 Imager User Manual 6 17 Codabar Codabar Usage Used in photo finishing and library applications Previously used in medical applications but not typically used in newer medical applications Definition Codabar is a 16 bit character set 0 through 9 and the characters and with s
134. aracter has no effect MS 4 Imager User Manual 5 9 Trigger Mode and Duration Trigger Filter Duration Usage Trigger Filter Duration allows the Imager to disregard false trigger events Definition When Trigger Mode is set to either External Edge or External Level the read cycle s active state must be delayed until the specified filter duration has elapsed The Imager will trigger at the end of that duration Serial Cmd lt K200 trigger mode trigger filter duration Default 313 x 32us 10 24 mS Options 1 to 65535 corresponding with 32ys to 2 097 seconds in 32ys steps Note If Trigger Mode is set to External Edge the Imager will trigger only after the active state has been delayed for the specified filter duration Note If Trigger Mode is set to External Level the Imager will trigger once the active state has been delayed for the specified filter duration after the appearance of an object s active edge In addition the active state must be delayed for the specified filter duration after the disappearance of the object s falling edge for the trigger to be rendered inactive 5 10 MS 4 Imager User Manual Read Cycle External Trigger Polarity Usage Allows users to select the trigger polarity that will be used in their application Definition Determines the active state of the trigger signal applied to the cable input of the Imager Serial Cmd K202 active state Default Positive Options 0 Negative 1 P
135. ardless of Finder Patter Status setting Finder Pattern Status Definition Checks for the presence of a finder pattern Serial Cmd lt K718 finder pattern status symbol size mode symbol size 1 symbol size 2 symbol size tolerance dimension mode dimension 1 dimension 2 dimension tolerance orientation mode orientation value Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Symbol Size Mode 2D Symbology Qualification Note If Symbol Size 1 is larger than Symbol Size 2 it will be automatically reversed in the algorithm Definition Specifies the outputs resulting from the searches for Symbol Size 1 and Symbol Size 2 Serial Cmd lt K718 finder pattern status symbol size mode symbol size 1 symbol size 2 symbol size tolerance dimension mode dimension 1 dimension 2 dimension tolerance orientation mode orientation value Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Bad No Symbol Output 2 Object Qualification 3 Enable Both Disabled Decoded messages are output but no attempt to qualify symbols or output Bad or No Symbol messages is undertaken Bad No Symbol Output Checks first for decodes If no symbol is decoded checks for symbol size If both Symbol Size 1 and Symbol Size 2 requirements are met a Bad Symbol message is output If neither are met a No Symbol message is output Object Qualification Checks first for matches to symbol size If qualified attempts to decode If no decodes are found within the specified
136. arrow Margins Background and Code Type are all Processing Settings values MS 4 Imager User Manual 11 13 Save Current Settings to Configuration Database Save Current Settings to Configuration Database Usage Allows current active configuration settings to be saved to a selected database index Serial Cmd K255 index Example lt K255 5 gt This command phrase would save the Imager s current active configuration settings to database index 5 By ESP Video Evaluation Calibration WO Configuration Database Dynamic Setup Active Indexes 5 v Advanced Options Capture Settings lt lt WOl ROl Processing Settings Curent BO o Disabl 0 o ago 540 fAdapti 128 Stand Disabl white Code 39 c2 O3 C4 B Adap e C5 NN NN Bi e S Test C amp foo o Disab fo o aeo 540 Adapti 128 Stand Disabl white Test C7 pso po Dia 0 o peo fe Adapti 128 Stand Disabl white Disabled Test C 10 po po Disab 0 o ago 540 Adapti 128 Stand Disabl White Disabled Test M Capture for Every Index Show Database Index in Output Sort Index Positions on Good Reads Calibrate Receive Settings Send Settings Load Curent To Index Load Index To Curent Click the Load Current to Index button to save the Imager s current configuration parameters to the selected database index 11
137. artment of Defense IUID initiative Iv Enable UII Parsing amp Default Settings Revert Settings Returns all settings to Returns all settings to default most recent MS 4 Imager User Manual 8 7 Symbol Quality Separator Data Matrix Output Mode Symbol Quality Separator Data Matrix Output Mode Symbol Quality Separator applies to both Symbol Quality groups ISO IEC 16022 Symbol Quality Output and Microscan Symbol Quality Output Symbol Quality Separator Definition Inserts a separator between each enabled field of the symbol quality output Serial Cmd lt K708 symbol quality separator output mode Default SP space character Options Any ASCII character Important The ASCII characters lt gt and can only be entered as hex pairs For lt K708h 3C For gt lt K708h 3E gt For lt K708h 2C gt See ASCII Character Entry Modifier on page 3 32 for a detailed explanation of how to enter ASCII characters as hex values Symbol Quality Separator by ESP Parameters Symbol Quality Global Total Read Time Disabled default separator SP the Symbol When you double click on the Symbol Quality Separator SP m Quality Separator Calculator appears Use the calculator keypad Output Mode Grade for one click separator configuration Global Total Read Time Disabled Output Mode Data Matrix
138. ary Imager and the software responds in the following ways Counts the number of secondary readers in the daisy chain Assigns an internal ID number 1 n to each secondary reader where the first secondary reader is number 1 the primary reader s ID being a 0 Propagates the communications settings and the relevant operating modes of the primary Imager to the host and auxiliary ports of each secondary reader Resets each secondary reader Verifies that each secondary reader has acquired the new settings Serial Cmd lt K150DAISY gt Note All secondary readers must be set to Serial for Daisy Chain to function When setting up a daisy chain operation perform the following steps 1 Set the primary Imager the one connected to the host to Serial This sets all the Imagers in the chain to Serial when the command is executed Before Autoconfigure you must set the primary Imager to Serial S Primary 9 Secondary Secondary Imager Imager Imager S S S Host 2 Send lt K150DAISY gt 3 If necessary set the primary Imager to Edge After Autoconfigure you may set the primary Imager to Edge E but the other Imagers must remain in Serial S Primary M9 Secondary 9 Secondary Host Imager Imager Imager Note The USB version of the MS 4 does not support this command MS 4 Imager
139. aster pin is momentarily connected to ground must be held low for a minimum of 10 mS master symbol information will be loaded into the database based on the next read cycle that achieves a Good Read starting with Index 1 The Master Symbol Database will be loaded with all symbols decoded in the read cycle as long as it does not exceed the Number of Master Symbols parameter Serial Cmd lt K225 status gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled New Master Load Status Definition The new master status responds with the number of the next master position to be loaded where 0 represents idle or no master to be loaded Example If the user has the Number of Master Symbols set to 1 and then either sends a lt G gt or toggles an active New Master Pin the state will be 1 and prior to reading and effectively loading position 1 the response to lt NEWM gt would be lt NEWM 1 gt Once a symbol has been read and loaded the status will be cleared lt NEWM 0 gt Serial Cmd lt NEWM gt MS 4 Imager User Manual 9 11 9 12 MS 4 Imager User Manual 870 Camera and IP Setup Contents Camera and IP Setup by E k SP i eee tenete rere t ree re HERD er ERES Pete e aae Ekitate 10 2 Camera and IP Setup Serial Commands sss eene eene eene 10 3 nro ee 10 4 SEI M ea 10 5 Calibration
140. aster symbol 5 data in brackets in the following format lt 5 gt If no master symbol data is available the output will be lt 5 gt Serial Cmd lt K231 master symbol number gt Caution Be sure to add the or you will delete the master symbol Note This command returns the number of master symbols if no number is included ESP 1 Click the Utilities button and the Master Database tab 2 Click the Receive Reader s Database button Master Symbol Database Size v Matchcode Type Read Symbol into Selected Index 5 Receive Reader s Database Send Database to Reader Request All Master Symbol Data Definition This command will return master symbol data for all symbols enabled up to 10 Serial Cmd lt K231 gt MS 4 Imager User Manual 13 11 Read Next Symbol as Master Symbol Definition Serial Cmd ESP After you ve set the size in the database you can order the Imager to read the next symbol as the master symbol for any given master symbol number lt Gmaster symbol number gt To store the next symbol decoded as master symbol 1 send lt G gt or lt G1 gt To store the next symbol decoded as the master symbol for any other master symbol database number send lt Gmaster symbol number 1 10 gt For example lt G5 gt will cause the next symbol read to be entered as master symbol 5 In the Master Database tab under the Output Format menu 1 Select the master symbol ind
141. atch Replace 2 iie Ete ERO ie 9 10 New Master Pins sii e eerte ee ree 9 11 Chapter 10 Camera and IP Setup Camera and IP Setup by ESP ssssseeeenmeneeen 10 2 Camera and IP Setup Serial Commands sseeeee 10 3 VideO 2 5 iere eer eee eei eee eei pce nee FIDe eee te tate aee need 10 4 Evaluation 2 ei ined eec ee ed dont d etd 10 5 Calibration eei terc eei ect e cede ite eris 10 9 Window of Interest cited tenen iei en i eti eei jene 10 10 Configuration Database sssseeeneem em 10 13 Dynamic Setup orici iio eet eee be eei de ben do edet ede euo 10 14 Pixel Sub Sampling eterne nene terreno 10 15 SC C 10 16 Focal Distance iiie e tee REP dcbet ec 10 18 Focal Distance Table Read Only sese 10 19 IP Threshold ib CAE Eo a eie 10 20 Number of Symbols in Field of View eee 10 22 Image Processing Timeout sse eee 10 23 Damaged Symbol 1 5 2 e hidden it aed 10 24 IP MOde ist isd niin UMNDIR oa rote 10 25 Hollow MOdB 2 1 0 erri i rue 10 26 Mirrored Image 2 eee UE eie 10 27 Illumination Brightness sseenm mm 10 28 Skew Correction asst tenes eee eines 10 29 Chapter 11 Configuration Database Configuration Database Serial Commands eese 11 2 Number of Active Indexes sssseeeee emen 11 3 Configura
142. atch start position match length wild card character sequence on No Read sequence on mismatch gt Number of Master Symbols lt K224 number of master symbols gt New Master Pin lt K225 status gt Enter Master Symbol Data lt K231 master symbol number master symbol data gt Request Master Symbol Data lt K231 gt for all or lt K231 master symbol number gt Delete Master Symbol Data lt K231 master symbol number gt Match Replace lt K735 status match replacement string gt Mismatch Replace lt K736 status mismatch replacement string gt 9 2 MS 4 Imager User Manual Matchcode Overview of Matchcode Definition Usage Matchcode allows the user to store master symbol data in the Imager s memory compare that data against other symbol data and define how symbol data and or discrete signal output will be directed A master symbol database can be set up for up to 10 master symbols Note Matchcode will function with multiple symbols however if Matchcode Type is set to Sequential or if Triggering Mode is set to Continuous Read 1 Output the Imager will behave as if Number of Symbols were set to 1 regardless of the user defined configuration Matchcode is used in applications to sort route or verify data based on matching the specific symbol in a variety of ways as defined in this section For example a manufacturer might sort a product based on dates that are embedded in the symbol Steps for Entering and Using Mast
143. ation Rule 1 Each symbol that is decoded must match one of the filters before it can be saved to a read cycle record There is an exception to this rule however when the number of symbols required for a read cycle exceeds the number of active filters In such a case unfiltered symbols can be placed into unfiltered output positions For example if the number of symbols required is 6 but there are only 4 active filters the last 2 positions can be filled by any unfiltered qualified symbol Rule 2 The same filter setup can be used multiple times For example filters 1 2 and 3 can be set up to filter Data Matrix symbols and the output will occur in the order the symbols are decoded Rule 3 All qualified symbols will be sorted and output in the matching filter position If a symbol matches filter 3 it will be output as the third symbol If a filter does not have a matching qualified symbol a No Read message will be output in place of the symbol assuming the No Read message is enabled For example if there is not a symbol that meets filter 3 s requirements then a No Read message will be output in the third output position MS 4 Imager User Manual 14 9 Output Filter Configuration Filter Number Definition Serial Cmd Options This is the filter index number that represents the position of the symbol in the data output at the end of the read cycle This index number should be entered along with the follow
144. aux port mode baud rate parity stop bits data bits daisy chain i d status daisy chain i d Default None Options 0 None 1 Even 2 Odd 3 10 MS 4 Imager User Manual Communications Stop Bits Auxiliary Port Usage Only changed if necessary to match host setting Definition Allows the user to select the last one or two bits in each character to indicate the end of the character Serial Cmd lt K101 aux port mode baud rate parity stop bits data bits daisy chain i d status daisy chain i d Default One Options 0 One 1 Two Data Bits Auxiliary Port Usage Only changed if necessary to match host setting Definition Number of bits in each character Serial Cmd lt K101 aux port mode baud rate parity stop bits data bits daisy chain i d status daisy chain i d Default Eight Options 0 Seven 1 Eight Note The USB version of the MS 4 does not have an Auxiliary Port MS 4 Imager User Manual 3 11 Auxiliary Port Connections Transparent Mode Usage Definition Serial Cmd Options A common application in conjunction with handheld Imagers is one that employs an auxiliary readout to detect misapplied symbols In Transparent Mode data is passed between the auxiliary port and the host The Imager buffers data from the auxiliary port and echoes the keyed data on the auxiliary port Auxiliary port data is passed through to the host whenever a return key is pressed at the auxiliary por
145. button is grayed out Camera and IP Setup Receive Capture Decode r Current pending 18200 2 54 ms Delete Active Image Save Evaluation Histogram Line Scan iv JPEG Images JPEG Image Quality 1 High 100 1 100 NOTE Linescan is unavailable when using JPEG Iv Contrast Low The JPEG option allows faster captures and transfers but since the JPEG standard compresses image data it is not suitable for the more rigorous demands of line scan evaluation JPEG also allows you to adjust the image quality resolution by adjusting the sliding tab between 1 and 100 1 being the lowest quality and 100 being the highest When possible use the highest quality when image transfer speed must be increased use a lower image quality setting Adjustments for this setting will depend on your specific hardware and software limitations MS 4 Imager User Manual 10 5 Evaluation Histogram Usage Useful in determining quality and contrast of symbols Definition A histogram is a graphic representation of the numeric count of the occurrence of each intensity gray level in an image The horizontal axis represents the values of gray levels and the vertical axis represents the number of pixels for each gray level Note Since histograms are performed in the Imager the results will be saved regardless of whether the image was uploaded as a JPEG jpg or a bitmap bmp 1 From th
146. capture rate increases as frame sizes decrease Note If you need to set up your MS 4 for use with EZ Trax software see Setting Up the Imager for EZ Trax 5 4 MS 4 Imager User Manual Read Cycle Multisymbol Usage Multisymbol is commonly used in shipping applications where a shipping symbol contains individual symbols for part number quantity etc This feature allows on trigger to pick up all the symbols Definition Multisymbol allows the user to define up to 100 symbols that can be read in a single read cycle Conditions The following conditions apply Each symbol must be different to be read unless in Rapid Capture Mode configured for triggered capture The maximum number of characters in a read cycle is 3 000 for all symbols All No Read messages are posted at the end of the data string unless output filtering is enabled If more than one symbol is within the field of view at the same time symbol data may not be displayed in the order of appearance If Matchcode Type is set to Sequential or if Trigger is set to Continuous Read 1 Output the Imager will behave as if Number of Symbols were set to 1 regardless of the user defined configuration Number of Symbols Definition Number of Symbols is the number of different symbols that can be read in a single read cycle Serial Cmd lt K222 number of symbols multisymbol separator Default 1 Options 1 to 100 Multisymbol Separator Usage Used to delimit o
147. chcode Type Wild Card Character Usage Definition Serial Cmd Default Options Example With Wild Card Character defined as the default asterisk defining CR 34 as the master symbol will result in matches for CR134 and CR234 but not CR2345 Entering the wild card at the end of the master symbol as in CR will result in matches for variable symbol lengths such as CR1 CR23 CR358 etc Wild Card Character allows a user to define a wild card character as part of the master symbol K223 matchcode type sequential matching match start position match length wild card character sequence on No Read sequence on mismatch asterisk Any ASCII character Important The ASCII characters lt gt and can only be entered as hex pairs For lt K223h 3C gt For gt K223h 3E For lt K223h 2C gt See ASCII Character Entry Modifier on page 3 32 for a detailed explanation of how to enter ASCII characters as hex values 9 6 MS 4 Imager User Manual Sequence on No Read Usage Definition Serial Cmd Default Options Matchcode Sequence on No Read is useful when the Imager needs to stay in sequence even if no decode occurs When Sequence on No Read is Enabled and Matchcode is set to Sequential the Imager sequences the master symbol on every match or No Read When disabled it does not sequence on a No Read lt K223 matchcode type sequential matching match start position ma
148. column width threshold mode fixed threshold value processing mode background color narrow margins symbology type gt lt K255 index gt Load Current Settings from Database lt K255 index gt Request Selected Index Settings K255 index Request All Database Settings lt K255 gt Database Mode lt K256 switch mode frame count time image process looping image dimensions gt Output Format l Format Extract Format Insert K740 output index start location length gt lt K741 output index length hex string gt Format Assign K742 symbol number status gt Output Format Status lt K743 output format status gt Output Filter Configuration lt K744 filter number symbology type length wildcard placeholder data unused database index Ordered Output Filter MS 4 Imager User Manual lt K745 number of filters gt A 9 Communication Protocol Commands Serial Command Format Serial commands are of two types utility and configuration Rules that apply to both utility and configuration commands Aless than lt and greater than gt character enclose the commands Commands and data are case sensitive That is characters must be entered as upper or lower case as specified Serial Utility Commands These are sent during operations and are not followed by lt A gt or lt Z gt Serial Configuration K Commands These begin with a single K cha
149. d the Imager will not perform any character checking calculations on decoded Codabar symbols When set to Mod 16 the Imager will performa modulus 16 check character calculation on the symbol If the symbol does not pass this calculation it will not be decoded When set to NW7 The Imager will perform an NW7 modulus 11 check character calculation on the symbol If the symbol does not pass this calculation it will not be decoded When set to Both the Imager will perform both the Mod 16and NW7 modulus 11 check character calculations on the symbol If the symbol does not pass either calculation it will not be decoded Serial Cmd lt K471 status start stop match start stop output large intercharacter gap fixed symbol length status symbol length check digit type check digit output Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Mod 16 2 NW7 Mod 11 3 Mod 16 and NW7 Check Digit Output Codabar Definition When this field is disabled and a check digit calculation is enabled the Imager will strip the verified check digit from the symbol data output This condition must be accounted for if a fixed length is also being used When enabled the Imager will output the check character as part of the symbol data This condition must be accounted for if a fixed length is also being used Serial Cmd lt K471 status start stop match start stop output large intercharacter gap fixed symbol length status symbol length check digit type ch
150. d 1 Enabled Fixed Symbol Length Code 128 EAN 128 Usage Definition Serial Cmd Default Options 6 10 Fixed Symbol Length helps prevent truncations and increases data integrity by ensuring that only one symbol length will be accepted This specifies the exact number of characters that the Imager will recognize this does not include start stop and check digit characters The Imager ignores any symbol not having the specified length KA474 status fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length EAN 128 status output format application record separator status application record separator character application record brackets application record padding 10 1 to 64 MS 4 Imager User Manual Symbologies EAN 128 Status Code 128 EAN 128 Definition When this field is disabled the Imager will not check any Code 128 labels for conformance to EAN requirements or perform any special formatting When enabled the Imager can read symbols with or without a function 1 character in the first position If a symbol has a function 1 character in the first position it must conform to EAN format Symbols that conform to EAN format will also be subject to the special output formatting options available in this command Note Code 128 status must be enabled for EAN status to be active If EAN status is required the Imager will only decode symbols that have a function 1 character in the first position and that conform to EAN f
151. d Cycle parameters are set you will be ready to connect to EZ Trax For a description of how to configure EZ Trax using serial commands or ESP see Configuring EZ Trax Output in Chapter 7 I O Parameters zE Capture Mode For more detailed information about using EZ Trax refer to the Help menu in EZ Trax software or the EZ Trax Quick Start Guide available on the Microscan Tools Drive 5 26 MS 4 Imager User Manual EN 6 Symbologies Contents Symbologies e ESP et H 6 2 Symbologies Serial Commands sess eene een ne enne nennen 6 3 Darter Matix Am E 6 4 UR COG EE 6 6 COS BO p EP 6 7 Code 128 EAN 128 E 6 10 ee Gees 6 13 latzii zyua pj MM R 6 14 o IEEE 6 17 COD AD AM iwi P 6 18 UPC FEAN mE 6 21 GS1 B ICE MSS ME 6 25 ua ape EM 6 27 eol maD me rptu EE 6 29 COMPOSE errien 2 E E aaia 6 30 Narrow Margins Symbology Identifier sess 6 31 Background 87e o Ec Ueedeeriicie ii AORA 6 33 This section describes the various symbol types that can be read and decoded by the MS 4 Imager See the following sites for additional information about linear and 2D symbologies http www aimglobal org standards aimpubs asp http barcodes gs1us org dnn bcec Default aspx tab
152. d Rate Host Port Usage Can be used to transfer data faster or to match host port settings Definition The rate at which the reader and host transfer data back and forth Serial Cmd lt K100 baud rate parity stop bits data bits Default 115 2K Options 0 600 1 1200 2 2400 3 4800 4 9600 5 19 2K 6 38 4K 7 57 6K 8 115 2K 9 230K Parity Host Port Usage Only changed if necessary to match host setting Definition An error detection routine in which one data bit per character is set to 1 or O so that the total number of bits in the data field is either even or odd Serial Cmd lt K100 baud rate parity stop bits data bits Default None Options 0 None 1 Even 2 Odd Stop Bits Host Port Usage Only changed if necessary to match host setting Definition One or two bits added to the end of each character to indicate the end of the character Serial Cmd lt K100 baud rate parity stop bits data bits Default One Options 0 One 1 Two Data Bits Host Port Usage Only changed if necessary to match host setting Definition One or two bits added to the end of each character to indicate the end of the character Serial Cmd lt K100 baud rate parity stop bits data bits gt Default Eight Options 0 Seven 1 Eight Note See USB HID Interface on page 3 23 for protocol information relating to USB 3 4 MS 4 Imager User Manual Communications Host Port Protocol Usage In general the
153. d character that separates the symbol information from the Read Duration Output Serial Cmd lt K706 status separator gt Default space character Options Any ASCII character Important The ASCII characters lt gt and can only be entered as hex pairs For lt K706h 3C For gt K706h 3E For lt K706h 2C gt See ASCII Character Entry Modifier on page 3 32 for a detailed explanation of how to enter ASCII characters as hex values 7 16 MS 4 Imager User Manual I O Parameters Output Indicators The MS 4 Imager has a beeper and three LED arrays as follows 1 A target pattern of blue LEDs for centering the field of view which is projected from the front of the Imager 2 An array of green LEDs projected from the front of the Imager that can be programmed to flash in response to user defined conditions 3 A row of five status LEDs on the side of the Imager Green Flash Mode Usage Used as a visual verification that a good read has occurred Definition An array of green LEDs in the front of the Imager can be programmed to flash in response to user defined conditions Serial Cmd lt K750 green flash mode target pattern status green flash duration Default Good Read Options 0 Disabled 1 Good Read 2 Static Presentation 3 Match 4 Mismatch 5 Strobe Disabled Green flash LEDs are disabled Good Read Green flash LEDs will flash when a good read condition is met or when Matchc
154. d of read cycle read cycle timeout gt Minimum Good Reads lt K221 minimum good reads gt Multisymbol K222 number of symbols multisymbol separator Start Trigger Character lt K229 start character Stop Trigger Character K230 stop character Capture Mode lt K241 capture mode number of captures rapid capture mode Capture Timing K242 time before first capture time between first and second captures time between seventh and eighth captures Image Storage K244 image storage type image store mode IP Timeout MS 4 Imager User Manual K245 image processing timeout Read Cycle Setup Read Cycle Setup Setting up read cycle and triggering parameters will involve a series of decisions based on your particular application as follows 1 2 o0 0o Select the number of symbols to be read in a single cycle The MS 4 can read multiple symbols in a single image frame Decide on the trigger type to be used if serial choose a serial character if external choose either Level or Edge Designate how the read cycle should end Timeout New Trigger Last Frame Select Capture Mode Continuous Mode or Rapid Mode Select Number of Captures if in Rapid Capture Mode Set the Time Before First Capture and Time Between Captures if any Note The Imager s camera captures images at a rate of about 16 second based on a full size 640 x 480 image The
155. data to the host is ignored if the Imager is in a polled mode Aux B Host Port Auxiliary port data or read data is sent to the host whenever it is received v Auxiliary port data is not echoed Imager Auxiliary port data to the host is always sent without a preamble or postamble Data Originating from the Imager Data is transmitted to the auxiliary port at the same time it is transmitted to the host Host Aux Poe Port Data transmission conforms with all parameters 7 specified in the configuration menu e g Preamble v ue Postamble End of Read Cycle Data Originating from the Host imager All host data is echoed to the auxiliary port in unpolled mode Aux Host Port A Imager Serial Cmd lt K101 aux port mode baud rate parity stop bits data bits daisy chain i d status daisy chain i d gt Options 2 Half Duplex MS 4 Imager User Manual 3 13 Auxiliary Port Connections Full Duplex Mode Usage When communication to and from the auxiliary port is required Definition In Full Duplex Mode all auxiliary port data and symbol data is sent directly to the host Symbol data is not displayed on the auxiliary port menu Data Originating from the Auxiliary Port Auxiliary port data to the host is ignored if the Imager is in a
156. dding 56 bytes MS 4 Imager User Manual 3 27 USB HID Interface Keyboard Report Format Size 9 bytes fixed length Structure REPORT ID 1 MODIFIER 1 RESERVED 1 KEYCODES 6 Values in parentheses indicate the size in bytes of the field Important The host application does not need to understand and process Keyboard Reports This task belongs to the host operating system Keycodes are passed to the host application as if a user were typing keyboard text The host application must be the active application in order to receive keystrokes Keyboard Reports protocol requires that two reports be sent for every keystroke The first report indicates which key is pressed The second report indicates no key pressed with all keycodes NUL 0x00 to indicate that all keys have been released In the case of the MS 4 Imager each byte output is equivalent to a keystroke with a key pressed report and a no key pressed report For this reason data rates are much slower when using Keyboard Reports Field Descriptions REPORT ID Size 1 byte Value 0x02 Note Report ID is the method employed by USB HID to allow multiple report formats to be sent and received from the same interface MODIFIER Size 1 byte Value 0x00 to OxFF Note Modifier is an 8 bit field corresponding to the state of the modifier keys at the time the keycode field was generated D Key LEFT CTRL LEFT SHIFT LEFT ALT LEFT GUI RIGHT CTRL RIGHT SH
157. decode data matrix symbols with solid elements Serial Cmd lt K517 hollow mode status gt Default Regular Elements Options 0 Regular Elements 1 Hollow Elements The image below is an example of a data matrix symbol with hollow elements 10 26 MS 4 Imager User Manual Camera and IP Setup Mirrored Image Usage Enable this setting when the Imager is viewing a mirrored image as when it is being used with a right angle mirror attachment Definition When enabled outputs a mirrored image of the symbol Serial Cmd lt K514 mirrored image gt Default Both Options 0 Regular Image 1 Mirrored Image 2 Both auto detect normal mirrored Regular Image When Regular Image is enabled images will be processed as they appear upon capture Mirrored Image When Mirrored Image is enabled images will be processed as a reverse of the captured image Both When Both is enabled regular and mirrored images will be processed MS 4 Imager User Manual 10 27 Illumination Brightness Illumination Brightness Definition This feature allows the user to adjust the brightness of the illumination LEDs Since the Imager has control over the brightness of the illumination it can provide consistent brightness output between Imagers through a factory calibration operation Each of the brightness settings are calibrated to provide the same level of intensity for each Imager Usage lt K536 brightness gt Default High
158. ds Definition Data Matrix is a type of Matrix symbology and has subsets ECC 000 ECC 200 ECC 200 symbols have an even number of rows and an even number of columns Most of the symbols are square with sizes from 10x10 to 144x144 Some symbols however are rectangular with sizes from 8x18 to 16x48 All ECC 200 symbols can be recognized by the upper right corner module being light binary 0 instead of dark ECC 200 Definition When enabled will decode ECC 200 Data Matrix symbols Serial Cmd lt K479 ECC 200 status ECC 000 status ECC 050 status ECC 080 status ECC 100 status ECC 140 status ECC 120 status ECC 130 status Default Enabled Note This is the only symbol type enabled by default Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled ECC 000 Definition When enabled will decode ECC 000 symbols Serial Cmd lt K479 ECC 200 status ECC 000 status ECC 050 status ECC 080 status ECC 100 status ECC 140 status ECC 120 status ECC 130 status Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled ECC 050 Definition When enabled will decode ECC 050 symbols Serial Cmd lt K479 ECC 200 status ECC 000 status ECC 050 status ECC 080 status ECC 100 status ECC 140 status ECC 120 status ECC 130 status Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 6 4 MS 4 Imager User Manual Symbologies ECC 080 Definition When enabled will decode ECC 080 symbols Serial Cmd lt K479 ECC 200 status ECC 000 status ECC 050
159. dulated symbology on the same symbol where different messages can be read by each reader type Serial Cmd lt K453 mode separator status separator Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 2 Required Enabled If set to Enabled the Imager only decodes the linear component and it will only output the linear component Required If set to Required the Imager must decode both the linear and the composite components otherwise it outputs a No Read Separator Status Composite Usage Allows the user to distinguish between the main and Supplemental symbols Definition Separates the linear and the composite component Serial Cmd lt K453 mode separator status separator gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Separator Character Composite Usage As required by the application Definition Allows the user to change the separator character from a comma to a new character Serial Cmd K453 mode separator status separator gt Default comma Options Any ASCII character Important The ASCII characters lt gt and can only be entered as hex pairs For lt lt K453h 3C gt For gt lt K453h 3E gt For lt K453h 2C gt See ASCII Character Entry Modifier on page 3 32 for a detailed explanation of how to enter ASCII characters as hex values 6 30 MS 4 Imager User Manual Symbologies Narrow Margins Symbology Identifier Narrow Margins Usage Used when the leadin
160. e Usage Useful in determining if a symbol is present and if user defined requirements for that symbol are met Can tell the user if a qualified symbol is present but not decodable Definition Sets the requirements that will qualify an object or a symbol before outputting a decode or message When enabled sends a message to the host whenever an object meets the qualifications setup but is not decoded Serial Cmd lt K715 unused message gt Default BAD SYMBOL Options Up to 64 ASCII characters Important The ASCII characters lt gt and can only be entered as hex pairs For lt lt K715h 3C gt For gt lt K715h 3E gt For lt K715h 2C gt See ASCII Character Entry Modifier on page 3 32 for a detailed explanation of how to enter ASCII characters as hex values No Symbol Message Usage Useful in determining if a symbol is present and if user defined requirements for that symbol are met Can tell the user if an object does not qualify as a symbol Definition Sets the requirements that will qualify an object or a symbol before outputting a decode or message When enabled sends a message to the host whenever an object meets the qualifications setup but is not decoded Serial Cmd KT16 unused message Default NO SYMBOL Options Up to 64 ASCII characters Important The ASCII characters lt gt and can only be entered as hex pairs For lt K716h 3C For gt K716h 3E For
161. e 11 2 Number of Active Indexes ricini cote dep ettet tede reddere La a quce idee d endete ale 11 3 Configuration Database Status ccecccceecececceeeeeeeenae cee e a a Aa A 11 4 Database Mode 2 ntt ee e ene E EU pei lui Reed deaan aTa 11 9 Save Current Settings to Configuration Database ssssssssssssseeeeeeene 11 14 Load Current Settings from Configuration Database sse 11 15 Request Selected Index Settings sesssssssssssssssssesseseeneeee eene nnne 11 16 Request All Configuration Database Settings sssssssssssssseeeeeeenennes 11 17 This section concerns the various capture settings and processing settings that can be used to fine tune the MS 4 Imager s performance in your application MS 4 Imager User Manual 11 1 Configuration Database Serial Commands Configuration Database Serial Commands Number of Active Indexes lt K252 number of active database settings database sort gt Configuration Database Status lt K255 index shutter speed gain focal distance digital zoom row pointer column pointer row depth column width threshold mode fixed threshold value processing mode background color narrow margins symbology type gt Save Current Settings to Database lt K255 index gt Load Current Settings from Database lt K255 index gt Request Selected Index Settings lt K255 index gt Request All Databas
162. e Evaluation window click the Histogram button The current image is transferred into the histogram operation This may take a moment since all the relevant pixels are being evaluated intensively 2 When the Histogram window opens you may need to expand the window and or adjust the scroll bars in order to bring the image into view 3 To generate a histogram click and drag your cursor diagonally across the symbol or a portion of the symbol The image will be surrounded by an area of interest box a dashed blue line with red anchor points that can be selected and moved by placing a cursor inside the box and can be resized by clicking and dragging the anchor points good_254_0 60 ms Evaluate Histogram Enable Autothreshold Line Sean Send Threshold Histogram Results Max Light 192 Min Dark 16 Median 68 Mean 67 High Peak 0 Low Peak 34 Variance 646 Number of Pixels 10 6 MS 4 Imager User Manual Camera and IP Setup Threshold Histogram Enable Autothreshold is checked by default To adjust the threshold manually 1 Uncheck the Enable Autothreshold box 2 Move the threshold marker vertical green dashed line in the Histogram chart Hint This should be midway between the maximum and minimum curves 3 Click on the Send Threshold button to adopt the new threshold position MS 4 Imager User Manual 10 7 Evaluation Line Scan 1 From the Evaluation tab click the Line Scan bu
163. e Report button The report will be output in the format you chose in the Preferences dialog Save Report 8 16 MS 4 Imager User Manual ENS 9 Vatchcode Contents Maichcode d o dedo RE P EUER 9 2 Matchcode Serial Commands niiina inan ni a a n a 9 2 Overview of Matcheode i E aa rar tc e ble a an equis 9 3 Matcheode Type A eere ERU ede EI Et sate ste aa Cab va ERG ERES Ee AES Dudes 9 4 Match Replace uc seine eddie pies tuied 9 9 Mismatch Replace 5 esito cde ree erento ni rt eese ei ut qe sdevaencdsadadsbacesidseaded seeds cpstecesdeeess 9 10 New Masten Plume i itti etate titer tef tn dte bns hah s ierit d xt 9 11 This section explains the MS 4 s matchcode output functions and the master symbol database setup MS 4 Imager User Manual 9 1 Matchcode by ESP Matchcode by ESP Parameters Matchcode Maaie Matchcode Type l Disabled Sequential Matching Increment Click this button to Match Start Position 0 Mata heade mend Match Length 1 i wild Card Sequence on Noread Enabled Sequence on Mismatch Disabled To open nested options New Master Pin Enabled single click the Match Replace Disabled Replacement String MATCH Mismatch Replace Disabled To change a setting double click the setting and use your cursor to scroll through the options Matchcode Serial Commands Matchcode Type lt K223 matchcode type sequential matching m
164. e Settings lt K255 gt Database Mode lt K256 switch mode frame count ime image process looping image dimensions gt MS 4 Imager User Manual Configuration Database Number of Active Indexes Usage Useful for applications that require several different complex imager configurations to be applied sequentially Multiple database indexes allow you to concatenate configuration profiles and to perform more complex operations than would be possible with only one set of configuration parameters Definition This feature allows you to set the number of database records groups of settings that will be used automatically during the read cycle If Number of Active Indexes is set to 0 only the current imager settings will be used not database entry settings Serial Cmd lt K252 number of active indexes database sort Default 0 disabled Options 0 to 10 Database Sort Definition Database Sort moves the database entry that produced a successful decode to the first position in the list of database entries Serial Cmd K252 number of active indexes database sort Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Number of Active Indexes by ESP Video Evaluation Calibration WO Configuration Database Dynamic Setup Click the arrow on the Active gi 5 Indexes dropdown menu and select how many database indexes will be used during the read cycle 0 to 10 Capture Settings lt lt WOl
165. e Timeout 12 LRC Status Disabled Decoded symbol data is shown in this table g For Help press F1 Note For specific information on any of the icons shown above in the operations bar or configuration bar see the corresponding chapters in this manual MS 4 Imager User Manual 2 3 Menu Toolbar Menu Toolbar File gt New Whenever New is selected the default configuration of ESP is Fe loaded New Ctrl N Open Save Open Ctri O Save Ctrl S When Save or Save As is selected the ESP configuration is saved to the host computer s hard drive and available whenever save As the same file is selected under Open Print Ctrl P Important When you save menu changes to your hard drive these changes are not saved to your Imager The illustration Import below shows how settings can be saved and received between Export ESP and the Imager and ESP and the host hard drive Recent File Exit Y Save to Imager A Receive Imager Settings Import Export Import converts the ASCII settings from a text file to ESP configuration settings Export converts the active ESP configuration settings to an ASCII text file 2 4 MS 4 Imager User Manual Using ESP Model In Model you can select any of the models shown in ESP s model menu When you choose another model your current connection to your present model will be terminated MS 4 d To connect to another model select N
166. e Transfer 2 Transfer 2 HOST TX RES 0x1C REQ Poll Unit 1 for data IMAGER TX 0x1C STX lt T 00000 gt ETX LRC IMAGER_TX ACK HOST_TX RES Terminate Transfer 1 Starting with a RES ensures a clean transaction without leftovers from the previous transaction Error Condition 1 HOST_TX RES 0x1C REQ Poll Unit 1 for data IMAGER_TX 0x1C STX lt T 00000 gt ETX LRC HOST_TX Nothing Host should ACK here timeout reached IMAGER_TX REQ Unit requests an ACK again timeout reached IMAGER_TX REQ Unit requests an ACK again timeout reached IMAGER_TX REQ Unit requests an ACK again timeout reached IMAGER_TX RES Terminate Transfer 1 data is flushed MS 4 Imager User Manual A 19 Communications Protocol Error Condition 2 HOST_TX RES 0x1C REQ Poll Unit 1 for data IMAGER_TX 0x1C STX lt T 00000 gt ETX LRC HOST_TX Nothing Host should ACK here timeout reached IMAGER_TX REQ Unit requests an ACK again HOST_TX NAK Host rejects data frame Retry Event IMAGER_TX 0x1C STX lt T 00000 gt ETX LRC Unit sends again HOST_TX ACK Host receives data IMAGER_TX RES Terminate Transfer 1 Error Condition 3 HOST_TX RES 0x1C REQ Poll Unit 1
167. e a symbol in as few configurations as possible during calibration This process is designed to quickly identify symbology type and any image processing parameters that are already calibrated Running Search Pass Prog Rating Decode Quality Shutter Gain Locate 12 0 0 0 250 0 0 14 0 0 0 250 9 0 16 0 0 0 250 18 0 18 2174 1 72 250 27 24 4 14 MS 4 Imager User Manual Medium Pass Calibration The theory behind Medium Pass is to develop a readable range from which to dial in a decoded symbol Running Medium Pass Prog Rating Decode Quality 51 4216 2 53 8436 4 55 6336 3 57 8448 4 59 8456 4 61 8464 4 63 8472 4 65 8488 4 67 8504 4 69 8512 4 71 8528 4 73 8584 4 75 8644 4 Rating List Best Rating 8606 Shutter 250 Gain 48 Rating 8581 Shutter 250 Gain 44 Rating 8553 Shutter 250 Gain 40 Rating 8527 Shutter 250 Gain 36 Rating 8505 Shutter 250 Gain 32 Rating 8488 Shutter 250 Gain 28 Rating 8476 Shutter 250 Gain 24 MS 4 Imager User Manual 8 20 24 32 40 48 56 72 88 96 112 168 228 Shutter 250 250 250 250 250 250 250 250 250 250 250 250 250 Gain 0 4 8 12 16 20 24 28 32 36 40 44 48 Locate O1 Oc1O0100101C0iCc1 0 RH 4 15 Initiating Calibration Fine Tune Pass The theory behind Fine Tune Pass is to dial in a decoded symbol based on the range supplied by the Medium Pass Prog Rating 77 6416 79 6424 81 64
168. e captures are present during the duration of a read cycle the stored image will be the last image processed for that read cycle This image is stored in RAM and can be retrieved as long as power is cycled to the Imager and as long as the Imager has not been reset via a reset save sequence Other commands that can initialize storage in RAM are ones that change capture modes or put the Imager in a test capture mode Image Storage Mode Serial Cmd lt K244 image storage type image storage mode gt Default First Mode Options 0 First Mode 1 Last Mode First Mode This mode allows the Imager to store images until the available image memory has been filled At that point the Imager will stop saving additional images In this mode you will always have the first image captured because the saving process stops once memory has been filled Last Mode In this mode image storage continues after available memory limits are reached The oldest image in memory is overwritten so you will always have the most recent stored image MS 4 Imager User Manual 5 23 Image Storage Image Storage Example The following example assumes that the Imager is in a rapid capture mode of 3 captures Number of Symbols Frame 1 Frame 2 Frame 3 Read Cycle Result Stored Frame Number of Symbols Frame 1 Frame 2 Frame 3 Read Cycle Result Stored Frame Number of Symbols Frame 1 Frame 2 Frame 3 Read Cycle
169. e occurred since the last reset No Read Counter Reset Sending lt O gt sets the No Read Counter to 00000 Trigger Counter Sending lt T gt displays the total number of triggers since the last reset Trigger Counter Reset Sending lt U gt sets the trigger counter to 00000 Good Read Match Counter or Good Read Counter Sending lt V gt displays the total number of good reads matching the master symbol or if Master Symbol is not enabled the number of good reads since the last reset This counter is always enabled but will only work as a match count when Master Symbol is enabled If Master Symbol is not enabled this counter records the number of good reads This count can be requested at any time Good Read Match Counter Reset Sending lt W gt sets the Match Counter to 00000 Mismatch Counter Sending lt X gt displays the number of decoded symbols since the last reset that do not match the master symbol Mismatch Counter Reset Sending lt Y gt sets the Mismatch Counter to zero 13 6 MS 4 Imager User Manual Utilities Device Control Device Control by ESP Read Rate Counters Device Control Master Database Firmware Outputs Output 1 Pulse Output 2 Pulse Output 3 Pulse Extras Disable Reader Enable Reader Device Control by Serial Command Output 1 Pulse Sending lt L1 gt activates the link between Output 1 and Output 1 of the host connector regardless of Maste
170. e protocol that allows a reader to initiate data transfers to the host Serial Cmd lt K140 1 gt Point to Point with XON XOFF Usage If an XOFF has been received from the host data will not be sent to the host until the host sends an XON During the XOFF phase the host is free to carry on other chores and accept data from other devices Used only with RS 232 Definition This option enables the host to send the XON and XOFF command as a single byte transmission command of start Q or stop S Serial Cmd lt K140 2 gt MS 4 Imager User Manual 3 5 Host Port Protocol Point to Point with RTS CTS and XON XOFF Usage Used only with RS 232 Definition This option is a combination of Point to Point with RTS CTS and Point to Point with XON XOFF Serial Cmd lt K140 3 gt ACK NAK Definition See the ACK NAK Options command lt K147 gt on page 3 7 Serial Cmd lt K140 4 gt Polling Mode Definition See the Polling Mode Options command lt K148 gt on page 3 8 Serial Cmd lt K140 5 gt Poll Address Serial Cmd K140 protocol address Default 1 Options 1 to 50 1 Poll address Ox1C Select address Ox1D 2 Poll address Ox1E Select address Ox1F 50 Poll address Ox7E Select address Ox7F Note See USB HID Interface on page 3 23 for protocol information relating to USB 3 6 MS 4 Imager User Manual Communications ACK NAK Options Definition These parameters take effect for ACK NAK lt K1
171. e recognized as dark on a light background Black When Black background is enabled the bars of linear symbols and the elements of 2D symbols are recognized as light on a dark background Both When Both is enabled the imager will attempt to decode for white background first and if there is no decode will then attempt to decode for black background MS 4 Imager User Manual 6 33 Background Color 6 34 MS 4 Imager User Manual ENS O Parameters Contents I O Parameters by ESPERE RR USES EpL HERE NE RCE 7 2 VO Parameters Serial Commands sse nennen nennen 7 3 Symbol Data Output notre repeat HERE RR RUE DEr e nte ERE EN esten ens 7 4 No Read M ssage eee e i eter te PR eu rin bee R ER ERR R ERE EE Dn tg SES PE pha pede men dpi 7 6 Bad Symbol Message sssssssssssssssesseesenenenrn et ene entr steh teneis tent heresi tese tenens te enn sensn 7 8 No Symbol uc EM 7 8 1D Stacked Symbology Qualification eseeeenenen mnn 7 9 2D Symbology Qualification sess nennen nnne nnne 7 10 Read Duration Output 1 1 esee dede eei dere cede tendre ed Diae e denne pee deiode dde eet Dun 7 16 Output INDICAIOMS M 7 17 lI 7 21 LED Configuration 2 irridet addere ced dee eed Seer ree e e dne AE AERE 7 22 Serial Verification siir
172. eck digit output Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 6 20 MS 4 Imager User Manual Symbologies UPC EAN Usage Definition Serial Cmd Default Options Used primarily in POS application in the retail industry It is commonly used with Microscan readers in applications in combination with Matchcode when there is a need to verify that the right product is being placed in the right packaging UPC Universal Product Code is a fixed length numeric continuous symbology UPC can have two or five digit supplemental bar code data following the normal code The UPC Version A UPC A symbol is used to encode a 12 digit number The first digit is the number system character the next five are the manufacturer number the next five are the product number and the last digit is the checksum character When enabled the Imager will read UPC Version A and UPC Version E only lt K473 UPC status EAN status supplementals status separator status separator character supplemental type format UPC E as UPC A gt Disabled 0 Disabled 1 Enabled EAN Status Usage Definition Serial Cmd Default Options EAN is the European version of the UPC symbology and is used in European market applications Note UPC must be enabled for EAN to take effect EAN is a subset of UPC When enabled the Imager will read UPC Version A UPC Version E EAN 13 and EAN 8 It also appends a leading zero to UPC Version A
173. ed 7 18 MS 4 Imager User Manual I O Parameters Target Pattern Usage Assists users in positioning and locating symbols in the center of the Imager s field of view Definition The user can control when the targeting system is ON or OFF and can save this condition for power on Serial Cmd lt K750 green flash mode target pattern status green flash duration Default Always ON Options 0 Always OFF 1 ON only when not in the read cycle 2 ON only when in the read cycle 3 Always ON Important The targeting system actuated by the EZ button or operational command overrides this setting Always OFF The target pattern will remain OFF at all times unless overridden by the EZ button or operational command ON When Not in the Read Cycle The target pattern is always ON except during the read cycle If the EZ button or operational command overrides this setting the target pattern will remain on at all times ON When in the Read Cycle The target pattern will remain OFF except during the read cycle If the EZ button or operational command overrides this setting the target pattern will remain on at all times Always ON The target pattern is always ON MS 4 Imager User Manual 7 19 Output Indicators Green Flash Duration Usage Provides visual verification that a good read has occurred Definition When a good read occurs the green LEDs will illuminate and stay on for the time set in the Green Flash Dura
174. ed format Default Settings returns all the above settings to default Non Printable Characters gt Default Settings Keyboard Macros Keyboard Macros allows you to create new keyboard macro commands that can be sent from function keys F2 F4 F5 etc Terminal Dropdown Menu The dropdown Terminal menu has Capture Text Save Current Text Send File Find Next and Find Previous functions as well as the same functions defined above Terminal 12 6 Capture Text Save Current Text Send File Change Font Change Echo Font Enable Echo Change Background Color gt Non Printable Characters gt Default Settings Find Next F3 Find Previous Shift F3 Keyboard Macros Capture Text lets you append data in real time to a text file of your choice While in operation the text file cannot be opened You can select Pause to interrupt the capture flow or Stop to end the flow and open the file Save Current Text saves all text in the Terminal window to a text file Send File allows you to browse for specific files and send them to the reader Find Next searches for a user defined section of text in the Terminal Find Previous operates in the same way as Find Next but searches backward through Terminal text MS 4 Imager User Manual E 73 Utilities Contents Serial Utility Commands sess ene ennt nhnnr nine n n ner nsn e nentes nnne nnne n rennes 13 2 Read RALC rics
175. eeeseesseeeeeess 1 13 This section is designed to get your MS 4 Imager up and running quickly using the EZ button or ESP Easy Setup Program Following these steps will allow you to get a sense of the Imager s capabilities and to test sample symbols Detailed setup information for installing the Imager into your actual application can be found in the subsequent chapters MS 4 Imager User Manual 1 1 Check Required Hardware Step 1 Check Required Hardware Item Description Part Number 1 MS 4 Imager FIS 0004 XXXXG 2 IB 3PC FIS 0001 0030G 3 Power Supply 97 000002 01 90 264 VAC 5VDC 97 100004 15 24VDC 4 Comm Cable 61 000010 02 a T To host Hardware Required RS 232 RS 422 Hardware Required USB Caution Be sure that all cables are connected BEFORE applying power to a system with an external power source RS 232 RS 422 Always power down BEFORE disconnecting any cables 1 2 MS 4 Imager User Manual Quick Start Step 2 Connect the System Connecting by RS 232 RS 422 Connect the Imager 1 to the IB 3PC interface 2 Connect the comm cable 4 to the host 5 and to the host connector on the IB 3PC 2 Connect power supply 3 to the IB 3PC 2 Apply power to the Imager Connecting by USB Plug
176. eeseees A 23 Appendix H Operational Tips ccccscsssssseececeeeeecececeseeeeceeeeseeeeeaeaeeseseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeesesseeeeaeaes A 24 Appendix USB to Serial Virtual COM Port Driver ssssssssesssssesesenrenen enne A 25 Appendix J Glossary of Terms a a a a r aa e aa ae ea a Aa aR aniani A 28 MS 4 Imager User Manual A 1 General Specifications Appendix A General Specifications Mechanical Height 1 25 4 mm Width 1 8 45 7 mm Depth 2 10 53 3 mm Weight 2 oz 57 g Environmental Enclosure IP54 category 2 Operating Tempurature 0 to 40 C 32 to 104 F Storage Tempurature 50 to 75 C 58 to 167 F Humidity up to 90 non condensing Electrical Power 3 Watts max USB 2 5 Watts max 5 VDC 5 200 mV p p max ripple 394mA 5 VDC typ USB 300mA 5VDC Optional I O Optoisolated with IC 332 CE Mark General Immunity for Light Industry EN 55024 1998 ITE Immunity Standard Radiated and Conducted Emissions of ITE Equipment EN 55022 98 ITE Disturbances Light Source Type High output LEDs Light Collection Options Progressive scan square pixel Software adjustable shutter speed electronic shutter VGA 640 by 480 pixels Connector Front 2 22 9 mm Optical Center amp 1 25 4 mm 2X M2x0 4 A6 4 06 mm depth Z 20 1 5 38 mm 1 8 45 7 mm JN 15 3 9 mm mi Ba
177. em 1 2 Step 2 Connect the System eene ene 1 3 Step 3 Position Imager and Symbol sse 1 4 Step 4 Install ESP iioii detulit tei 1 5 otep 5 Select Mod ls iese 1 ridere er bis 1 6 Step 6 Select Communications Protocol seeeeee 1 7 Step 7 Locate the Symbol in the FOV ssesssssssesssse 1 8 Step 8 Calibrate Settings ssen 1 10 Step 9 Test Read Rate 5 retener eee 1 11 Step 10 Configure the Imager in ESP sesser 1 12 Step 11 Make Menu Changes and Save in ESP essnee 1 13 Chapter 2 Using ESP VAT eo 2 2 Application Mode 2 3 eien o eed tbc tee nod eed seed etes 2 3 Menu Toolbar aiite eap eiae iu 2 4 Connecting mid eie baton ati iden dei 2 12 VIGW seirinin a a iie e eec iiia 2 13 Navigating in ESP iie e aaia 2 14 Send Receive Options iie dede dite euo een 2 15 USNO EZ Trak uei Si ite ee e aia 2 17 Chapter 3 Communications Communications by ESP sssssssssssssseeeeeeen enne nnns 3 2 Communications Serial Commands see 3 3 Host Port Connections ssseeeeen nemen 3 4 Host Port Protocol ssssseee eene nennen 3 5 ACK NAK Options erinnere ine citer decern detinere decas 3 7 Polling Mode Options ccce tentent tete tne de ee ces 3 8 RS 422 Stal s esce iecit deridet dede tete e eie de Te
178. emory Default all ESP Settings 2 Send and Save Advanced Options b lt Z gt This activates all changes in current memory and saves to the Imager for power on 3 Send and Save as Customer Defaults lt Ze gt Use this option to save your own default settings for quick retrieval with a Zrc command This option will be visible only if you had checked Enable Send and Save as Customer Defaults in the ESP Preferences dialog MS 4 Imager User Manual 2 15 Send Receive Options Defaulting When you select Default Current Menu Settings or Default all ESP Settings you are only defaulting the ESP settings Advanced Options Send Current View This is the same as Save to Reader gt Send No Save except that only the commands in the Save to Reader gt current configuration tree are sent Receive Reader Settings Default Current Menu Settings Default all Setti Send Current Command efauk al Settings This is the same as Send Current Advanced Options gt Send Current view View except that it saves only Send Current Command ui ene that is currently Add Exception selected Remove Exception Add Remove Exception After you perform a Receive Reader Settings command and you Click on the Add Exception option you may see a list of serial commands These are commands that may be in your Imager s firmware but not included in or different from your current version of ESP You can edit these commands by double click
179. er Manual 10 1 Camera and IP Setup by ESP Camera and IP Setup by ESP Camera Click this button to bring up the Camera Setup menu To change a setting double click the setting and use your cursor to scroll through the options Parameters Camera Setup Camera Gain Shutter Speed Illumination Brightness Sub sampling Window of Interest Top Left Height Width Image Processing Settings Processing Made FLM Direction Image Processing Timeout Background Color Mirrored Image Damaged Symbol Status Thresholding Threshold Mode Threshold value Cycle Minimum Cycle Maximum Cycle Step H Capture Mode 10 2 20 250 High Disabled 480 640 Standard Auto 5000 White Black Adaptive 128 0 255 10 Continuous To open nested options single click the MS 4 Imager User Manual Camera and IP Setup Camera and IP Setup Serial Commands IP Threshold lt K512 threshold mode fixed threshold value gt Mirrored Image lt K514 mirrored image Window of Interest lt K516 row pointer column pointer row depth column width Hollow Mode lt K517 hollow mode status gt Number of Symbols in Field of View lt K518 number of symbols in field of view gt Damaged Symbol lt K519 damaged symbol status gt Focal Distance lt K525 focal distance read only Focal Distance Table K526 numb
180. er Symbols 1 Set Triggering Mode to External or Serial 2 Choose the method of symbol comparison that fits your application 3 Define the output you want to achieve with your matchcode setup a Symbol data output b Discrete output 4 Select the number of master symbols you want to create 5 Decide which of 4 ways you want to enter your master symbol s a Use ESP to type master symbol data directly b Send a serial command with symbol data in the form of lt M231 master symbol data gt c Send a lt G gt Read Next Symbol as Master Symbol command d Enable the New Master Pin command and activate the discrete input to store the next symbol read as the master symbol MS 4 Imager User Manual 9 3 Matchcode Type Matchcode Type Definition ESP Serial Cmd Default Options Disabled Enabled Wild Card Sequential Allows the user to choose the way that master symbols will be compared with subsequently read symbols Note First set Triggering Mode to External or Serial Matchcode Matchcode Disabled E Sequential Matching Match Start Position Match Length f wild Card Sequential Sequence on Noread Enabled Sequence on Mismatch Disabled New Master Pin Disabled Match Replace Disabled Replacement String MATCH Mismatch Replace Disabled Replacement String MISMATCH lt K223 matchcode type sequential matching match start position match length wild card character sequence
181. er is in a read cycle lt K gt All Status Request This is the fastest way to learn the Imager s current configuration Sending this request will return the current settings of all commands starting with the lowest K command value and ending with the highest K command value lt K gt All Descriptor Status Request Binary Hex Bit Digits Value 7 6 5 4 EEE TMMOONDSFOMDNDNARWN O 0oOoOoooooo AR Colololol ttt tololole Sp 00 00 00 00 2ORO0OR0O0R0 030 0 0 This request will return all current descriptors for every K command starting with the lowest K command value and ending with the highest K command value lt K gt All Range Status Request This request will return the current settings of all commands within the user defined range starting with the lowest user defined K command value and ending with the highest user defined K command value 13 20 MS 4 Imager User Manual Utilities lt Knnn gt Single Status Request This request will return the value of the variables associated with the requested K command The request of a single entry of a database command cannot exceed the number of database slots for the specific command lt Knnn gt Single Descriptor Status Request This request returns the basic functional description of all fields inthe requested K command lt Knnn gt Single Range Status Request This request will return the value ra
182. er nec Leere tede Eee Eco dede dere cope cene des 4 12 Additional Notes about Callibration c ccccccccccccecececseseeesseceeeceeceeseaeeaaeeseeeeeeeeseeseausaaaeseeeeeess 4 17 This section shows the MS 4 Imager s calibration options and their default settings MS 4 Imager User Manual 4 1 Calibration Serial Commands Calibration Serial Commands Calibration Options lt K529 gain shutter speed symbol type WO framing WO margin line scan height processing gt Autocalibrate lt CAL gt Calibration Overview Autocalibration is one of the most powerful features of the MS 4 Imager The calibration process can be initiated by serial command EZ button or ESP user interface When the Imager enters calibration it runs through an optimization cycle that sets the ideal parameters for reading symbols at the highest possible level of performance Autocalibration can be specially configured to optimize specific parameters such as gain shutter speed and symbol type The calibration process consists of a search pass medium pass and fine tune pass During this process the Imager quickly locates configuration setup defines a calibration range for the configuration parameters and then tunes those parameters for optimal performance 4 2 MS 4 Imager User Manual Calibration Calibration Options This command specifies the operation of the Imager s calibration feature The default configuration is set up to perform calib
183. er of focal distances focal distance IP Mode lt K527 P Mode FLM direction Illumination Brightness lt K536 brightness gt Skew Correction K537 line speed symbol direction Camera K544 shutter speed gain gt Pixel Sub Sampling MS 4 Imager User Manual lt K542 sub sampling gt 10 3 Video Video The Video view is similar to the EZ Mode interface in that the user has the ability to perform the same Locate Calibrate and Test routines There is also a focal distance adjustment tool to the right of the video view Video also features Capture and Decode functionality which is similar to the Configuration interfaces Communication Read Cycle Symbologies I O Matchcode and Diagnostics Video Evaluation Calibration WO Configuration Database Dynamic Setup Calibrate Initiates Calibration routine Activates the Imager s target pattern and initiates live video display of the symbol in the field of view Allows the user to ake an image capture of the symbol in the field of view at any time and to decode the symbol data Similar to the Capture and Decode function in the Configuration views Initiates the Test routine Allows the user to test the Imager s read rate and decodes per second and also displays decoded symbol data in the field at the bottom of the screen Click Stop to end the Test ro
184. ernal Edge Allows a read cycle to be initiated by a trigger signal from an object detector when it detects the appearance of an object rising edge The read cycle ends with a good read a timeout or a new trigger External Level Allows a read cycle to be initiated by a trigger signal from an object detector The read cycle ends when the object moves out of the detector s range Falling Edge A change of state to inactive associated with a level trigger Field Programmable Gate Array FPGA A semiconductor device containing programmable interconnects and logic components Fill Factor Percentage of pixel area used for light collection Firmware Software hard coded in non volatile memory ROM and closely tied to specific pieces of hardware Fixed Symbol Length Increases data integrity by ensuring that only one symbol length will be accepted Focal Distance In camera based vision the distance from the front of the camera to the object being viewed In optics the distance from the lens to the focal plane Focal Plane Usually found at the image sensor it is a plane perpendicular to the lens axis at the point of focus Focus Any given point in an image at which light converges the focal point FPGA See Field Programmable Gate Array Frame The total area captured in an image sensor while the video signal is not blanked Frame Grabber A device that interfaces with a camera a
185. ers Trigger through the options Output 2 Parameters Unlatch Dutputs Parameter switch Output 3 Parameters Quality Output A To open nested options single click the 7 2 MS 4 Imager User Manual I O Parameters I O Parameters Serial Commands Power On Reset Counts lt K406 power on resets power on saves power on flash saves Time Since Reset lt K407 hours minutes gt Service Message lt K409 status service message threshold resolution gt Serial Verification lt K701 serial command echo status serial command beep status con trol hex output Beeper lt K702 status gt Quality Output lt K704 decodes trigger separator decodes trigger status gt Symbol Data Output K705 symbol data output status when to output Read Duration Output lt K706 status separator gt No Read Message lt K714 status message gt Bad Symbol Message lt K715 unused message gt No Symbol Message lt K716 unused message gt 1D Stacked Symbology Qualification 2D Symbology Qualification lt K717 minimum number of bars minimum number of qualified scan lines start stop status gt lt K718 finder pattern status symbol size status symbol size 1 symbol size 2 symbol size tolerance dimension status dimension 1 dimension 2 dimension tolerance orientation status orientation value Frame Information lt K734 output frame number output coordina
186. es 3 9 Auxiliary Port Connections sseeeen 3 10 Auxiliary Port System Data Status sese 3 18 Daisy Chain Autoconfigure ssseeen 3 19 Response Timeout sese eec iaidd iieiea diein 3 20 LRC Status e 3 21 Protocol Configuration Examples eee 3 22 USB HID Interface recte ttt erede 3 23 ASCII Character Entry Modifier esee 3 32 i um t 3 33 Postarible m itor cte cede dieitur 3 34 Chapter 4 Calibration Calibration Serial Commands sese 4 2 MS 4 Imager User Manual iii Table of Contents Calibration Overview ssseenm eem emen 4 2 Calibration Options is 2 trei tien cete Et Ea dE 4 3 Calibration by ESP inei bt aa pee eie 4 10 Initiating Calibration s e aeee ree aane aeaea ei aaee Eaa 4 12 Additional Notes about Calibration een 4 17 Chapter 5 Read Cycle Read Cycle by ESP nhieu Los 5 2 Read Cycle Serial Commands see 5 3 Read Cycle Setu p i ener ei ete dH eee sheets edere 5 4 NUT ES adoro snra a a anh Aastra ab abel 5 5 Trigger Mode and Duration 0 ccccccceceeeeenececeeeeeeeeeeeseseeaeeeeeesneaeeeeees 5 6 External Trigger Polarity cccccceeccesececeeeceeeeaeceeseeeaeeeeeeseeaeeeeeseeeaes 5 11 Serial Trigger ii red eei ete Leer edo ded a cel ceni eda 5 12 Start
187. es all changes in current memory and saves to the Imager for power on MS 4 Imager User Manual 1 13 Make Menu Changes and Save in ESP 1 14 MS 4 Imager User Manual es 2 Using ESP Contents EZ DI M 2 2 Application Mode P 2 3 Men Toolbar eO ETE E DO E LO DD 2 4 Proline HEEL 2 12 Mr HU 2 13 Navigating i ES P si tetcc ces acsensececaes iie E beat bxes Roa EXE RRSS E REGE So Aa dE HE SAN satan roS dLeMG 2 14 DENG RECEIVE ODOM c Hr 2 15 SING EZ WAX Saasece caestesceasshatcvescnttseceanetan es E A E E 2 17 This section is designed to help you understand the structure elements and application of ESP Easy Setup Program When you open ESP unless otherwise specified in the ESP Preferences dialog accessible from the Options heading on the menu toolbar you will enter EZ Mode for initial setup From there you can enter Application Mode App Mode and access several configuration menus Communications Read Cycle Symbologies I O Parameters Symbol Quality Matchcode and Diagnostics a Camera setup interface a Terminal interface a Utilities interface and an Output Format interface ESP can be used to configure the MS 4 Imager in four different ways Control Trees Each configuration menu contains a list of all option settings that pertain to that spec
188. es to move down the line its symbol moves into the imager beam and is decoded Object and Symbol Object Detector Object and Symbol Imager MS 4 Imager User Manual A 23 Operational Tips Appendix H Operational Tips Cleaning The MS 4 Imager has a hard coated window that should only be cleaned with alcohol 100 isopropyl Mounting When mounting the MS 4 Imager do not insulate the stand mount The bottom panel is the hottest part of the Imager and metal to metal contact is necessary for heat dissipation A 24 MS 4 Imager User Manual Appendices Appendix I USB to Serial Virtual COM Port Driver For use with Windows Vista 32 bit XP 32 bit and 2000 Operating Systems Microscan s USB to Serial Virtual COM Port Driver allows you to send serial data using a USB MS 4 Imager The driver is available at www microscan com or on the Microscan Tools Drive Installing the USB to Serial Virtual COM Port Driver 1 Download the driver files from the Microscan website or Microscan Tools Drive If the driver files are in a zip file extract them to a folder of your choice before running the installer 2 Double click on DPInst exe to launch the Microscan USB to Serial Virtual COM Port Driver Installer data ps Driver Installagion Guide pdf Select DPInst exe to launch S DPInst exe the driver installer el ReleaseNotes rtf fe dpinst xml 3 Click Next on the driver instal
189. essing time MS 4 Imager User Manual Read Cycle Number of Captures Usage Used to increase the opportunities for good reads and to extend the field of view in dynamic applications Definition Sets the total number of captures that are processed during a read cycle in Rapid Capture Mode when Switching Mode is set to Number of Captures Serial Cmd lt K241 capture mode number of captures rapid capture mode Default 1 Options 1 to 32 Note The range of maximum number of captures is dynamic This range is dependent on the maximum image size in the system A full size image 640 x 480 reduces the maximum number of images to 6 The smaller the image size the greater the maximum number of captures Once the image size is reduced to small enough dimensions the maximum number of captures will be capped at 32 If a user enters a maximum capture value greater than that allowed the value will be limited to the number of system images This command also affects the number of stored images allowed in the system If the maximum number of captures is selected the number of stored images allowed will be 0 Rapid Capture Mode Definition In Rapid Capture Mode one or multiple captures as many as 32 can be taken at an interval specified by the time between captures parameter In this mode the only limiting time factor is integration and transfer timing Serial Cmd K241 capture mode number of captures rapid capture mode
190. est will count the percentage of decodes relative to the number of actual scans Click Stop to end the test Calibrate The calibration routine that will optimize the Imager by comparing read rates at various camera and image processing settings Enter App Mode to access configuration trees and other setup features ESP ESP Untitled File Model Options Connect Help ose e App Mode Connect Switch Model Welcome to Easy Setup Program 1 First position the MS 4 Imager at the desired Focal Click Calibrate to begin the initial calibration routine Calbration is explained at the left of the EZ Mode screen and also in the Quick Start chapter of this manual i Imager s field of view Click Locate to activate the MS 4 s blue target pattern LEDs Center the target pattern on the symbol The real time display shows you where the symbol is located in the Click here to change from percentage of good decodes to decodes per second while performing a read rate test Starts read rate test v Decodes per Second MS 4 Ends read rate test MS 4 Imager User Manual Using ESP Application Mode From EZ Mode you can click on the App Mode button to access specific configuration menus Utilities tools Camera setup Output Format options and a Terminal window where serial commands can be entered
191. etec e mete da pee ue edet iet ined dece etes thei tee Te ETE Rr e Ede see eee 7 43 Frame Information i tret eren Re tected Adee etes peces idee edes teda Tres tre deed e teedn 7 44 Image Outputs 52 2 a ad oltees Ines orte eines Pate tree ida Bevin ie meh Meads 7 45 Database lderitifler Output 5 dne c a b once deena idee ated aaee eed 7 48 Quiality OUtpUT z 2 3 5 t eenceote e neote Le tee Ine ae N cadets te oes n Eae tein tig Maa bea 7 49 Configuring EZ Trax Output iei pee UD itti i beside fg ene Rc me debes 7 50 This section includes instructions on setting up conditions for changing input output electrical transitions for control of the Imager s internal and external devices A discrete I O in out signal is an electrical transition from one voltage level to another so that digital switching can occur MS 4 Imager User Manual 7 1 I O Parameters by ESP I O Parameters by ESP E Parameters ESP Values I O Parameters eram Symbol Data Output Good Read yo Noread Message Enabled Click this button to Bad No Symbol Qualification bring up the I O Read Duration Output Disabled RS Output Object Info Disabled Output Indicators Serial Verification Image Output Disabled EZ Trax Output Disabled EE oe To change a setting Calibration Options double click the b dentifi setting and use your p Database Identifier Output cursor to scroll Output 1 Paramet
192. ew Model choose a new New Model model from the menu and click OK Select a Model Current Legacy e 9e Quadrus EZ prob Quadrus MINI Quaque MINI Velocity eee MS 3 Laser Bee MS 890 MS 860 MS 820 wep MS Connect MS Donec Quadrus Verifier MS Q 5100 Description MS 4 1 Iv Show this dialog at startup Skip EZ Mode Cancel Note All the models you have enabled by selecting will continue to appear in the Model menu and that the same menu is repeated when clicking the Switch Model icon d Switch Model When you save your ESP file you will be saving the settings of all the models defined in a single ESP file MS 4 Imager User Manual 2 5 Menu Toolbar Options The Options menu allows you to save memos and set up ESP Preferences Note Preferences will be saved and loaded into ESP when ESP is opened next whether or not you save the ESP file Preferences Document Memo Model Memo Preferences General Tab ESP Preferences General Terminal Bar Code Options Grade Report Options Advanced n Startup Toolbar Style Reload Last File Show Both Icon and Text v Show Model Prompt C Only Show Icon Skip Easy Setup Mode C Only Show Text v Show Connect Prompt Receive After Connect Enable Send and Save as Customer Defaults Default Settings Reload Last File At startup reloads the last file saved to the host com
193. ex number in which you want to store the symbol data 2 Click the Read Symbol into Selected Index button Caution If you ve selected an index which already has existing data that data will be copied over by new decoded data when you use this command Request New Master Status Usage Definition Serial Cmd Informs the user when a new master symbol is pending and which position itis in Returns the position in the master symbol database that will be loaded on the next read lt NEWM gt The Imager returns lt NEWM next master to load Once a symbol has been read and loaded the status will be cleared and the response will be lt NEWM 0 gt See also New Master Pin in Chapter 9 Matchcode 13 12 MS 4 Imager User Manual Utilities Delete Master Symbol Data Definition You can directly delete the master symbol data by serial command or by ESP ESP 1 Click the Utilities button to access the master symbol 2 Click the Master Database tab and double click the symbol number you want to delete 3 Delete text and click OK Serial Cmd lt K231 master symbol number gt To delete a master symbol enter the database number and a comma but leave the data field empty For example to delete master symbol 5 send the following lt K231 5 gt The command is entered with a blank master symbol data field which tells the Imager to delete the selected master symbol from the database MS 4 Imager User Manual 13
194. f handling numeric alphanumeric and byte data as well as kanji and kana characters Up to 7 366 characters numeric data can be encoded using this symbol Therefore less space is required to encode the same amount of data in a QR Code symbol than in a conventional symbol lowering the cost of labelling Three Position Detection Patterns in the symbol make omnidirectional ultra fast reading possible QR Code has error protection capability Data can often be restored even if a part of the symbol has become dirty or damaged lt K480 status gt Disabled 0 Disabled 1 Enabled MS 4 Imager User Manual Symbologies Code 39 Usage Code 39 is considered the standard for non retail 1D symbology Definition An alphanumeric symbology with unique start stop code patterns composed of 9 black and white elements per character of which 3 are wide Serial Cmd lt K470 status check digit status check digit output status large intercharacter gap fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length full ASCII set Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Check Digit Status Code 39 Serial Cmd lt K470 status check digit status check digit output status large intercharacter gap fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length full ASCII set Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Check Digit Output Status Code 39 Usage Check Digit Output Status added to the symbol provides additional data securi
195. figuration button to display the second row of ESP icons zex eX Configuration x From here you can make changes in the configuration trees that can be accessed by clicking t he buttons on the second row of icons in the ESP window 4 dg i p Is Communication Read Cycle Symbologies Io Symbol Quality Matchcode Diagnostics For further details see ESP Help in the pulldown Help menu 1 12 MS 4 Imager User Manual Quick Start Step 11 Make Menu Changes and Save in ESP To make changes to a configuration setting Parameters Communications RS232 422 Host Port 3 Place your cursor in the Host Port Connections selection box scroll down to the setting you want to Host Protocol change and click once on Host 422 Status the setting R5232 Auxilliary Port Data Output Enabled Y Aux Port Disabled 1 Left click on the to expand the desired tree 2 Double click on the desired parameter and click once in the selection box to view options USB Enabled Preamble Disabled Postamble Enabled Response Timeout 2 A LRC Status Disabled A 4 Left click again on the 5 Right click on the open open screen to complete screen and select Save to your selection Reader to implement the command in the Imager Saving Options Send No Save Changes will be lost when power is re applied to the Imager Send and Save This activat
196. for data IMAGER_TX Ox1C STX lt T 00000 gt ETX BAD LRC HOST_TX NAK Host rejects bad LRC data Retry Event IMAGER_TX 0x1C STX lt T 00000 gt ETX GOOD LRC Unit sends again HOST_TX ACK Host receives data IMAGER_TX RES Terminate Transfer 1 The protocol makes 3 retry attempts before data is flushed and transfer is aborted A 20 MS 4 Imager User Manual Appendices Appendix E ASCII Table Dec Hex Mne Ctrl Dec Hex Ch Dec Hex Ch Dec Hex Ch 00 00 NUL 32 20 SP 64 40 96 60 01 01 SOH A 33 21 65 41 A 97 61 a 02 02 STX B 34 22 66 42 B 98 62 b 03 03 ETX C 35 23 67 43 C 99 63 c 04 04 EOT D 36 24 68 44 D 100 64 d 05 05 ENQ E 37 25 69 45 E 101 65 e 06 06 ACK F 38 26 amp 70 46 F 102 66 f 07 07 BEL AG 39 27 i 71 47 G 103 67 g 08 08 BS H 40 28 72 48 H 104 68 h 09 09 HT 41 29 73 49 105 69 i 10 0A LF AJ 42 2A x 74 4A J 106 6A j 11 0B VT K 43 2B 75 4B K 107 6B k 12 0C FF L 44 2C j 76 4C L 108 6C l 13 OD CR AM 45 2D 77 4D M 109 6D m 14 OE SO N 46 2E i 78 4E N 110 6E n 15 OF Sl O 47 2F 79 4F O 111 6F o 16 10 DLE p 48 30 0 80 50 P 112 70 p 17 11 DC1 Q 49 31 1 81 51 Q 113 71 q 18 12 DC2 R 50 32 2 82 52 R 114 72 r 19 13 DC3 S 51 33 3 83 53 S 115 73 S 20 14 DC4 AT 52 34 4 84 54 T 116 74 t 21 15 NAK U 53 35 5 85 55 U 117 75 u
197. g and trailing edges of the symbols are smaller than the standard margin or other objects encroach into the margins Definition Allows the imager to read 1D symbols with quiet zones less than 8 times the width of the narrow bar element Quiet zone is the space at the leading and trailing ends of a symbol Each quiet zone can be as narrow as only five times the width of the narrow bar element when Narrow Margins is enabled Serial Cmd lt K450 narrow margins symbology identifier status Default 2D Enhanced Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 2 2D Enhanced Note Do not use Narrow Margins when Large Intercharacter Gap is enabled for Code 39 Enabled When Narrow Margins is set to Enabled the imager uses a 5x margin requirement for standard linear symbols 2D Enhanced 2D Enhanced enables a special decode algorithm for narrow margin 2D symbols MS 4 Imager User Manual 6 31 Narrow Margins Symbology Identifier Symbology Identifier Definition Serial Cmd Default Options Symbology Identifier is an ISO IEC 16022 standard prefix set of characters that identifies the symbol type When enabled the imager analyzes and identifies the symbology and adds a three character identifying prefix to the data closed bracket character indicating the presence of a symbology identifier A C E F G I L Q Y b d e p Z A Code 39 C Code 128 E UPC EAN F Codabar G Code 93 l 2 5 L PDF417 and Micro
198. g several in the field of view The user provides the upper left pixel location and the size of the window to define the Window of Interest Window of Interest Top 0 Left 0 Height 480 Width 640 Caution Window of Interest will shrink the field of view and therefore could cause symbols to be missed in dynamic applications 10 10 MS 4 Imager User Manual Camera and IP Setup Window of Interest by ESP 1 From the Camera menu click the WOI tab to bring up Window of Interest If you haven t already captured an image click the Capture and Decode button to decode the present image If successful the Good Read indicator on the WOI tab will be green and the symbol will appear in the pane below Note You can resize the image by clicking and dragging the ESP window from the lower right corner This is useful where very small symbols are being read 2 Click and drag your cursor over the symbol that you want to isolate for reading Notice that the surrounding area goes black You can use the handles on the image area that you have just drawn to resize the region of interest You can also click on the center of the window of interest and move it 3 Test the new settings in Read Rate Mode Video Evaluation Calibration WOT Configuration Database Dynamic Setup Window of Interest Reset Capture and Decode Top Height 480 H No Decode Len 0 i wan 640 Video Evaluation
199. ger You can also right click on the Terminal screen to bring up a menu of further options 12 2 MS 4 Imager User Manual Terminal Find The Find function allows you to enter text strings to be searched forin the Terminal window For example a series of symbols have been scanned into the Terminal view and you want to determine if a particular symbol whose data begins with ABC has been read 1 Type ABC into the Find box Bs E E Find jasc M 2 Press Enter The first instance of ABC will be highlighted in the Terminal window 3 Click the Find button to the right of the text field to locate additional instances of ABC MS 4 Imager User Manual 12 3 Send Send The Send function allows you to enter serial commands and then send them to the imager Type the command into the Send box TX x Configuration x Send lt CAL gt E Camera Terminal Utilities Output Format Press Enter Click the Send button to the left of the text field to send 12 4 MS 4 Imager User Manual Terminal Macros Macros can be stored in a macro selection bar edited in a separate window and executed by clicking on the macro name Default Macros Add Macro Next Row grt Number Checksum Disable Scanning Enable Scanning y Exit Read Cycle t press F1 a 4 Click on the first arrow here to see Add Click on Next Macro or
200. ght Line 5 Straight Line Framed x Configured WOI Starting WOI After Decode Calibration Passed Calibration Failed If WOI framing is not enabled the current WOI configuration will be used until a symbol has been decoded After a symbol is decoded the WOI is framed exactly as it would be if a WOI framing mode was enabled When the calibration process is complete the original WOI configuration is restored Refer to the diagram below Configured WOI After Decode Calibration Passed Calibration Failed 4 6 MS 4 Imager User Manual Calibration Window of Interest Framing Disabled When this feature is disabled the Window of Interest is not modified after the calibration process is complete Row and Column If the calibration process is successful the Window of Interest will be modified toframe the symbol as well as an additional margin area around the symbol determined by the WOI Margin parameter Refer to the diagram below Column If the calibration process is successful the Window of Interest columns will be modified to vertically frame the symbol plus an additional margin area around the symbol determined by the WOI Margin parameter Refer to the diagram below Row If the calibration process is successful the Window of Interest rows will be modified to horizontally frame the symbol plus an additional margin area around the symbol determined by the WOI Margin parameter Refer to the diagram below a MS 4 Im
201. gn and percent symbol When Full ASCII Set is enabled the Imager can read the full ASCII character set from 0 to 255 lt K470 status check digit status check digit output status large intercharacter gap fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length full ASCII set Disabled 0 Disabled 1 Enabled MS 4 Imager User Manual 6 9 Code 128 EAN 128 Code 128 EAN 128 Usage Definition Serial Cmd Default Options Code 128 is a smaller symbology useful in applications with tight spots and high security needs A very dense alphanumeric symbology It encodes all 128 ASCII characters itis continuous has variable length and uses multiple element widths measured edge to edge lt K474 status fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length EAN 128 status output format application record separator status application record separator character application record brackets application record padding Disabled 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Fixed Symbol Length Status Code 128 EAN 128 Definition Serial Cmd Default Options When enabled the Imager will check the symbol length against the symbol length field If disabled any length will be considered a valid symbol KA74 status fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length EAN 128 status output format application record separator status application record separator character application record brackets application record padding Disabled 0 Disable
202. gy ID lt K450 narrow margin status symbology identifier status gt Background Color lt K451 background color gt Composite lt K453 symbology status separator status separator gt Code 39 lt K470 status check digit status check digit output status large intercharacter gap fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length full ASCII set A 6 MS 4 Imager User Manual Codabar Appendices lt K471 status start stop match start stop output large intercharacter gap fixed symbol length status symbol length check digit type check digit output Interleaved 2 of 5 UPC EAN lt K472 status check digit status check digit output status symbol length 1 symbol length 2 guard bar status range mode status lt K473 UPC status EAN status supplemental status separator status separator character supplemental type format UPC E as UPC A gt Code 128 EAN 128 lt K474 status fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length EAN 128 status output format application record separator Status application record separator character application record brackets application record padding gt Code 93 lt K475 status fixed symbol length status symbol length gt PDF417 lt K476 status unused fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length unused codeword collection Data Matrix lt K479 ECC 200 status ECC 000 status ECC 050 status ECC 080 status ECC 100 status ECC 140 status ECC 120
203. h PDF417 Usage Used to increase data integrity by ensuring that only one symbol length will be accepted Definition When enabled the PDF symbol must contain the same number of characters as the symbol length setting before it can be considered a good read The Imager will ignore any symbol not having the specified length Serial Cmd lt K476 status unused fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length unused codeword collection Default 10 Options 1 to 2710 Note Fixed Symbol Length Status must be enabled for Fixed Symbol Length to take effect MS 4 Imager User Manual 6 27 PDF417 Codeword Collection PDF417 Usage Definition Serial Cmd Default Options 6 28 Multiple Codeword Collection is useful in applications where portions of subsequent images can be read and pieced together so that no opportunity or time is lost to assemble codewords for decoding When set to Multiple PDF codewords are collected from multiple images and assembled throughout the read cycle until the read cycle ends or the symbol is fully decoded It is important to note that when this feature is enabled only one PDF symbol should be presented to the Imager per read cycle lt K476 status unused fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length unused codeword collection Single Image 0 Single Image 1 Multiple Image MS 4 Imager User Manual Symbologies MicroPDF417 Usage Used for labelling small items tha
204. h the Imager s field of view or which side of the field of view the symbol will enter first Note Image captures of symbols entering the field of view from above or below cannot be skew corrected Usage K537 line speed symbol direction Default Right Options 0 Right 1 Left If a symbol enters the field of view from the left it will be skewed as shown in the image below The image is processed from top to bottom meaning that the top of the symbol is captured first The amount of skew is dependent on the speed at which the symbol moves through the Imager s field of view The symbol below was captured at a line speed of 40 inches per second AM Additional Notes on Skew Correction When skew correction is enabled the pre processing option in Capture Mode is disabled regardless of how it is configured This is because image distortion must be corrected before any other image processing can occur Autocalibration does not perform skew correction It is assumed that during autocdibration the symbol is stationary so skew correction is not required Images are corrected before they are processed Therefore if an image is still pending at the end of the read cycle it will not have been skew corrected MS 4 Imager User Manual 10 31 Skew Correction 10 32 MS 4 Imager User Manual E 71 Configuration Database Contents Configuration Database Serial Commands sssssssssssssssseesee een
205. he active trigger state changes again Serial Cmd lt K200 2 gt Important Level and Edge apply to the active logic state Negative or Positive that exists while the object is in a read cycle between the rising edge and the falling edge Rising edge is the trigger signal associated with the appearance of an object Falling edge is the trigger signal associated with the subsequent disappearance of the object This applies both to External Level and External Edge External Edge Initiate Read Cycle p 1 di Object 1 moving in front of the detector beam causes a change in D the trigger state which initiates the Object a read cycle detector Initiate Second Read Cycle Object 2 moving in front of the detector beam causes another gt 1 lt gj change in the trigger state This sig Object nal initiates a new read cycle and A ends the previous read cycle unless dete m r y Timeout is enabled and a good read or timeout has not occured Usage This mode is highly recommended in any application where conveying speed is constant or if spacing object size or read cycle timeouts are consistent Definition External Edge as with Level allows the read cycle active state to begin when a trigger change of state from an external sensing device is received However the passing of an object out of sensor range does not end the read cycle The read cycle ends with a good read output or depending on the E
206. he symbol length against the symbol length field If disabled any length will be considered valid lt K470 status check digit status check digit output status large intercharacter gap fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length full ASCII set Disabled 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Fixed Symbol Length Code 39 Usage Definition Serial Cmd Default Options Fixed Symbol Length helps prevent truncations and increases data integrity by ensuring that only one symbol length will be accepted Specifies the exact number of characters that the Imager will recognize this does not include start and stop and check digit characters The Imager ignores any symbology that does not match the specified length lt K470 status check digit status check digit output status large intercharacter gap fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length full ASCII set 10 1 to 64 MS 4 Imager User Manual Symbologies Full ASCII Set Code 39 Usage Definition Serial Cmd Default Options Must be enabled when reading characters outside the standard character set 0 9 A Z etc The user must know in advance whether or not to use the Full ASCII Set option Since Full ASCII Set requires two code words to encode one character it is less efficient Standard Code 39 encodes 43 characters zero through nine capital A through capital Z minus symbol plus symbol forward slash space decimal point dollar si
207. i o o peo feao jAdapi 128 Stand Disabl White Disabled Test E 250 20 Disabl 0 0 480 640 fAdapti 128 Stand Disabl white Disabled Test 10 j250 20 Disabl 0 0 480 640 Ej Adapti 128 Stand Disabl white Disabled Test V Capture for Every Index Show Database Index in Output Sort Index Positions on Good Reads Calibrate Receive Settings Send Settings Load Current To Index Load Index To Current 4 5555 5 5 5 2 Configuration Database view set for 5 Active Indexes with Capture Settings highlighted MS 4 Imager User Manual 10 13 Dynamic Setup Dynamic Setup Dynamic Setup is used to calculate image capture timing during a read cycle Without proper timing the Imager will not be able to decode all symbols in aread cycle An external trigger is used to activate image captures so the user can make timing adjustments as capture events occur Video Evaluation Calibration WOI Configuration Database Dynamic Setup 100 Read Rate is represented graphically in real time as the user makes adjustments to the time delay between image captures The user can control Capture Number of Captures and Number of Symbols using these spin boxes 0 Number of Number of Capture Captures Symbols Read Rate 1 5 1 The user can control Capture F Number of Captures and Delay Sec Delay Adjustment Number of Symbols using e
208. ibration by ESP Calibration by ESP ESP s Calibration view incorporates all the functionality of the lt K529 gt Calibration Options command in a single easy to use intuitive interface This calibration process allows the user much finer control of individual parameters than the calibration routine in EZ Mode or on the Video tab Before During Calibration Before and After tabs give the user an authentic representation of the difference in what the Imager Bele After are configurable in the Calibration interface Beginning calibration Dropdown menu of 1D and 2D symbologies and a check box for enabling or disabling Composite symbologies Symbology Type ECC 200 Code 39 z Cancel V Composite Enabled tt Save Window of Interest A Cancels the WOI Framing Disabled gt calibration process if WOI Margin 75 necessary Linescan Height 64 Processing Rai 32 gi Medium m BShutterSpeed 1250 X Calibrate i sees before and after the calibration routine 250 32 8732 Shutter Gain and Image Quality values are all tracked in real time during the calibration E process Shutter Gain Quality Gain and Shutter Speed as Determines the amount of time and effort the Imager will spend attempting to decode a symbol for each parameter configuration
209. ication Definition When enabled and if no symbol has been decoded before timeout or the end of the read cycle the No Read message will be transmitted to the host No Read Message Mode Serial Cmd lt K714 No Read message status No Read message Default Enabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 2 Detailed No Read Message Disabled No message is output when a No Read condition occurs Enabled The user defined No Read message is output whenever a No Read condition occurs Detailed No Read Message Important In the case where the conditions set in Bad Symbol No Symbol Qualification are met then the Bad Symbol or No Symbol message output will override the No Read Message or the Detailed No Read Message if either is enabled Usage Use this option to cover more detailed reasons for decode failures Definition Outputs a No Read message followed by an additional message an Image Processing Results Code indicating the reason a symbol failed to decode For example in the following output No Read d 1 E 2 d and E are symbology IDs for Data Matrix and UPC respectively The message means that Data Matrix and UPC are enabled and other symbologies are not and that both failed to decode The reason for the failing Data Matrix is 1 and the reason for the failing UPC is 2 The first part of these numbers preceding the dot is the relevant number and is interpreted here 2D Symbols 1 Failed to locate symbol no finder
210. idz82 MS 4 Imager User Manual 6 1 Symbologies by ESP Symbologies by ESP Fez Symbologies mem 2D Symbologies shttsits cai Data Matrix Click this button ECC 200 status Enabled S male dies ECC 000 status Disabled menu ECC 050 status Disabled ECC 080 status Disabled ECC 100 status Disabled ECC 140 status Disabled ECC 120 status Disabled To change a setting QR Code Disabled cin ade ai 1D Symbologies prc cursor to scroll Stacked Symbologies Enabled through the options Composite Disabled Narrow Margin Status Disabled Symbology Identifier Disabled Background Color White ECC 130 status Disabled To open nested options single click the MS 4 Imager User Manual Symbologies Symbologies Serial Commands Narrow Margins Symbology ID lt K450 narrow margin status symbology identifier status gt Background Color lt K451 background color gt Composite lt K453 symbology status separator status separator Code 39 lt K470 status check digit status check digit output status large inter character gap fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length full ASCII set gt Codabar lt K471 status start stop match start stop output large intercharacter gap fixed symbol length status symbol length check digit type check digit output gt Interleaved 2 of 5 K472 status check digit status check digit output status symbol le
211. ific element of Imager operation For example the Communications menu shows a Host Port Connections option and then a list of the sub options Baud Rate Parity Stop Bits and Data Bits Each of these sub options is configurable by using dropdown menus Graphic User Interfaces Imager settings can be configured using such point and click tools as radio buttons zoom in zoom out sliders spin boxes check boxes and drag and drop functions Terminal ESP s Terminal interface allows you to send serial configuration and utility commands directly to the Imager by typing them in the provided text field Symbol Configuration The Imager can be configured by reading symbols produced in ESP s Bar Code Dialog interface Symbols can be created by dragging and dropping configuration settings from the control trees to the Bar Code Value field in the Bar Code Dialog and then printing the new symbol For ESP system requirements see Chapter 1 Quick Start MS 4 Imager User Manual 2 1 EZ Mode EZ Mode In EZ Mode you are presented with the Locate Calibrate and Test options After connecting to your Imager EZ Mode is the screen you will see You will be provided with on screen instructions that will help you with positioning testing and calibration Test Click the Test button to start the read rate test for a quick indication of the Imager s read capabilities and the limits of your application When Decodes per Second is unchecked the t
212. in the field of view in such a way that a horizontal or vertical scan line can pass through the symbol completely The entire image is assumed to be a candidate and will be scanned either horizontally vertically or in both directions When the number of symbols in the field of view lt K518 gt is set to 2 Fast Linear Mode will try to locate the candidates first and then decode The candidate symbols cannot be side by side they must be parallel Fast Linear Mode FLM Direction Usage lt K527 P Mode FLM direction gt Default Both Options 0 Both 1 Horizontal 2 Vertical Both The Imager tries to read both horizontally and vertically It decides which direction to process first based on Window of Interest dimensions For example if the WOI height is greater than its width the Imager attempts to read vertically first and if there is no decode then it attempts to read horizontally Horizontal This setting forces the Imager to read horizontally Vertical This setting forces the Imager to read vertically MS 4 Imager User Manual 10 25 Hollow Mode Hollow Mode Usage Used to determine which kind of data matrix elements will be processed Definition When set to Regular Elements the Imager will decode data matrix symbols with solid elements but will not decode data matrix symbols with hollow elements When set to Hollow Elements the Imager will decode data matrix symbols with outlined hollow elements but will not
213. ing filter settings for the predetermined symbol position lt K744 filter number symbology type length wildcard placeholder data unused database index gt 1 to 10 Symbology Type Definition Serial Cmd Default Options 14 10 Specifies the symbology type allowed to occupy this location in multi symbol output Note To filter or order a symbol the symbol must meet all the requirements of the selected filter index lt K744 filter number symbology type length wildcard placeholder data unused database index 0 any symbology type 0 Any type 1 Interleaved 2 of 5 2 Code 39 3 Code 128 4 Codabar 5 UPC 6 PDF417 7 EAN 128 8 Code 93 10 GS1 DataBar 11 MicroPDF417 12 Composite 13 BC412 14 Data Matrix 15 QR Code MS 4 Imager User Manual Length Definition Serial Cmd Default Options Wildcard Definition Serial Cmd Default Options Output Format Specifies the length of the decoded symbol allowed to occupy this location in multi symbol output Note To filter or order a symbol the symbol must meet all requirements of the selected filter index lt K744 filter number symbology type length wildcard placeholder data unused database index gt 0 0 to 64 This is the character to be used in the data output field when performing a data filter comparison The wildcard character represents the
214. ing on them and changing them as needed It is important to note that these commands will be saved to your Imager whenever you send a Save to Reader command or an lt A gt or a lt Z gt command Also if there is a corresponding ESP menu item the ESP Value column for that item will be blank following a Receive Reader Settings command 1 From the Send Recv button or by right clicking from within the configuration trees 2 16 MS 4 Imager User Manual Using ESP Using EZ Trax For detailed information about using EZ Trax refer to the Help menu in EZ Trax software or the EZ Trax Quick Start Guide available on the Microscan Tools Drive For information about how to configure the MS 4 for use with EZ Trax see Setting Up the Imager for EZ Trax in Chapter 5 Read Cycle MS 4 Imager User Manual 2 17 Using EZ Trax 2 18 MS 4 Imager User Manual E 3 Communications Contents Communications by ESR 5 2 iot ete iR 3 2 Communications Serial COMMAMNAS c cccceceeeeeeeeceeeeceeee cece ee eaaeeeeesececeeeeseeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeetee 3 3 FOStROrt Connections 5 2 eue tene da seat sceagd cava cc hedenn ataeg AEA 3 4 Host Port Protocol e tierno eei eain read ce Re E Ten e REPRE era dee 3 5 ACKINAK Options mm 3 7 Polling Mode Options 1 uiri Aire shi E eet ne i ite 3 8 RS 422 Status ase ade idee ined E iss eileen i eile 3 9 Auxiliary Port Connections 2 ie Na deterrere ode ne eode tne tide eic RE
215. ing the read cycle but the image is a Mismatch condition the first Mismatch image will be output MS 4 Imager User Manual 7 45 Image Output Communication Port Definition Serial Cmd Default Options This setting selects the communication port through which the image file will be transferred to the host lt K739 image output mode communication port file format jpeg quality gt Host 0 Host 1 Auxiliary 2 USB File Format Definition This setting selects the format of the image file to be output Note If JPEG is the chosen image file format the resolution of the image will be determined by the setting in the JPEG Quality field Serial Cmd lt K739 image output mode communication port file format jpeg quality gt Default JPEG Options 0 Bitmap 1 JPEG 2 Binary JPEG Quality Definition This setting determines the quality of JPEG image compression The user may select a value from 1 lowest to 100 highest Serial Cmd lt K739 image output mode communication port file format jpeg quality gt Default 90 Options 1 to 100 percent 7 46 MS 4 Imager User Manual I O Parameters Image Output Example The following example assumes that the Imager is set to output on No Read and that it is in a rapid capture mode of 3 captures Number of Symbols Frame 1 Frame 2 Frame 3 Read Cycle Result Output Frame Number of Symbols Frame 1 Frame 2 Frame 3 Read Cycle Resu
216. ings can be applied as a Window of Interest or a Region of Interest depending on the image dimension mode selected in the Database Mode command Serial Cmd lt K255 index shutter speed gain sub sampling row pointer column pointer row depth column wiath threshold mode fixed threshold value processing mode narrow margins background color symbology type Default 0 Options 0 to 480 row depth Column Pointer Definition The image dimension settings can be applied as a Window of Interest or a Region of Interest depending on the image dimension mode selected in the Database Mode command Serial Cmd K255 index shutter speed gain sub sampling row pointer column pointer row depth column width threshold mode fixed threshold value processing mode narrow margins background color symbology type gt Default 0 Options 0 to 640 column width Row Depth Definition The image dimension settings can be applied as a Window of Interest or a Region of Interest depending on the image dimension mode selected in the Database Mode command Serial Cmd K255 index shutter speed gain sub sampling row pointer column pointer row depth column width threshold mode fixed threshold value processing mode narrow margins background color symbology type Default 480 Options 3 to 480 row pointer Column Width Definition The image dimension settings can be applied as a Window of Interest or a Region of Interest depending on the image
217. int Growth Disabled Axial Non uniformity Disabled Unused ECC Disabled Grading Percent Cell Damage Disabled Capture Time Disabled Locate Time Disabled Decode Time Disabled Pixels Per Element Disabled ECC Level Disabled Matrix Size Disabled Quiet Zone Disabled _ Disabled Y pe ESP Values To change a setting double click the setting and use your cursor to scroll through the options MS 4 Imager User Manual Report Tab Symbol Quality The Report tab allows the user to initiate Data Matrix Grading and to generate and save grading reports To save the report as a PDF file an HTML file a CSV file or an RTF file click the Save Report button Reports appear in the viewing area underneath the Data Matrix Grading and Save Report buttons ESP ESP Untitled File Model Options Connect View Help 9 gt e M EZMode Autoconnect Send Recv Switch Model Configuration Furi f amp amp Communication Read Cycle Symbologies Io ESP Values Symbol Quality Global Total Read Time Disabled Symbol Quality Separator SP Output Mode Grade Data Matrix ISO IEC 16022 Parameters Grading Symbol Quality Matchcode The Symbol Quality interface is divided into three sections Report Locate and Preferences Camera Terminal Utilities NE Diagnostics Report Locate Preferences Data Matrix Grading Save Report See the reader s manual for informa
218. ion 3 Select the code type to see its part number displayed in the text field to the right of the Request Part No button Firmware Verification App Code v Request Part No 35 634001 24 App Code Request Checksum 9070 By Serial Command When you send a request for all product part numbers the Imager returns lt b BOOT_P N gt lt a APP_P N gt lt p PROFILE_P N gt When you send lt a gt a request for the application code part number the Imager returns lt a APP_P N gt When you send lt b gt a request for the boot code part number the Imager returns lt b BOOT_P N gt When you send lt p gt a request for profile module part numbers the Imager returns lt p PROFILE_P N gt MS 4 Imager User Manual 13 15 Firmware Request Checksum You can send a request to the Imager for part numbers checksums boot code and application code By ESP You can access Checksum from the Utilities menu 1 Click the Firmware tab 2 From the pulldown selection box to the left of the Request Checksum button make your selection 3 Select the code type to see its checksum displayed in the text field to the right of the Request Checksum button Firmware Verification App Code v Request Part No 35 634001 24 App Code Request Checksum 9070 By Serial Command When you send lt gt a request for all available firmware checksums the Imager returns lt lb BOOT_CHECK
219. ion Match Start Position determines the portions of symbols that will be matched by defining the first character in the symbol from left to right that will be compared with those of the master symbol when Matchcode Type is set to Enabled or Sequential Function For example if Match Start Position is set to 3 the first 2 characters read in the symbol will be ignored and only the 3rd and subsequent characters to the right will be compared up to the number of characters specified by Match Length Serial Cmd lt K223 matchcode type sequential matching match start position match length wild card character sequence on No Read sequence on mismatch gt Default 0 Options 0 to 3000 Note Match Start Position must be set to 1 or greater to enable this feature A 0 setting will disable this feature Match Length Usage Example If Match Length is set to 6 in a 10 character symbol and Match Start Position is set to 2 only the 2nd through 7th characters from left to right will be compared Definition Defines the length of the character string that will be compared with that of the master symbol when Match Start Position is set to 1 or greater When Match Start Position is set to 0 no comparison will occur Serial Cmd K223 matchcode type sequential matching match start position match length wild card character sequence on No Read sequence on mis match Default 1 Options 1 to 3000 MS 4 Imager User Manual 9 5 Mat
220. ion Specifies the exact number of characters that the Imager will recognize this does not include start stop and check digit characters The Imager ignores any symbol not having the specified length Serial Cmd lt K484 status fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length Default 14 Options 1 to 74 MS 4 Imager User Manual 6 25 GS1 DataBar RSS DataBar Limited Usage DataBar Limited is designed to be read by laser and CCD readers It is not recommended for omnidirectional slot scanners Definition Encodes a smaller 14 digit symbol 74 modules wide that is not omni directional Serial Cmd lt K483 status gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled DataBar 14 Usage Used in the grocery retail and prescription drug industries where 14 digit EAN item identification may be needed Definition DataBar 14 Reduced Space Symbology is a fixed symbol length sym bology that encodes 14 digits including a 1 digit indicator DataBar 14 is 96 modules wide It can be stacked in two rows it can read omnidirec tionally if printed in full height or horizontally if height truncated for small marking Serial Cmd lt K482 status gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled non stacked 2 Enabled stacked decode both stacked and non stacked Note Where appropriate use 1 non stacked for better performance over 2 stacked decode both stacked and non stacked 6 26 MS 4 Imager User Manual
221. ions 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 7 26 MS 4 Imager User Manual EZ Button Modes I O Parameters Usage Useful for performing multiple repetitive tasks at the work site Definition Allows the user to program each of the EZ button s 4 positions from a selection of 8 modes Serial Cmd lt K771 position 1 mode position 2 mode position 3 mode position 4 mode Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Single Beep Two Beeps Three Beeps Four Beeps 0 Disabled 0 Disabled 0 Disabled 0 Disabled 1 Read Rate 1 Read Rate 1 Read Rate 1 Read Rate 2 Calibrate 2 7 Calibrate 2 Calibrate 2 Calibrate 3 Save for Power On 3 Save for Power On 3 Save for Power On 3 Save for Power On 4 Unused 4 Unused 4 Unused 4 Unused 5 Load New Master 5 Load New Master 5 LoadNew Master 5 Load New Master 6 Unused 6 Unused 6 Unused 6 Unused 7 Target System 7 Target System 7 Target System 7 Target System 8 Bar Code Config 8 Bar Code Config 8 Bar Code Config 8 Bar Code Config Disabled When set to disabled the associated button position will have no function associated with it and the position will be skipped over Read Rate Read Rate will be initiated when the associated button position is selected Read Rate will perform decodes second and is the same as sending a lt C gt from the Terminal To exit Read Rate Mode quickly press and release the EZ button
222. ire a trigger event In USB a trigger event can only be initiated by serial command To send a trigger command the Imager the host application must establish a connection with the Imager s Microscan HID interface and send the trigger command in a Microscan HID Report The following read cycle conditions are required for USB MS 4 Serial Cmd K200 read mode Default Continuous Options 0 Continuous Mode 1 Coninuous Read 1 Output Mode 2 Level Mode 3 Edge Mode 4 Serial Mode 5 Serial and Edge Mode Important To use Level Mode you must enable Undelimited Start Trigger Character lt K229 gt and Undelimited End Trigger Character lt K230 gt To use Edge Mode you must enable and use the Undelimited Start Trigger Character lt K229 gt To use Serial Mode you must use the Delimited Trigger defined by lt K201 gt or enable and use the Undelimited Start Trigger Character lt K229 gt To use Serial and Edge Mode you must use the Delimited Trigger defined by lt K201 gt or enable and use the Undelimited Start Trigger Character lt K229 gt Communications For the USB version of MS 4 no communications serial commands have any effect on the Imager except the following USB HID Report Status lt K149 gt Preamble lt K141 gt Postamble lt K142 gt EZ Button Default on power on cannot be disabled lt K770 default gt lt K770 1 gt This ensures a level of safety forrecovering from misconfigured Power O
223. is re processed with the new IP and decode parameters If camera settings have not been changed from the last capture event and when a database configuration is loaded to current active settings no new image is captured Note An exception to this is the first database index a new image is always captured when the first database index is used When a camera setting has been modified from one database setting to the next a new image is captured For example if all database entries contained the same camera setting values but had different IP and decode parameters an image frame would only be captured when the first database configuration was used 11 10 MS 4 Imager User Manual Configuration Database Image Dimensions Definition Determines how the image dimension parameters will be implemented Serial Cmd K256 switch mode frame count time image process looping image dimensions Default 0 Options 0 Window of Interest 1 Region of Interest Window of Interest WOl by ESP When Image Dimensions is set to Window of Interest the database image dimension parameters are camera settings and they determine the size of the image to be captured Video Evaluation Calibration wor Configuration Database Dynamic Setup Active Indexes 5 Advanced Options Capture Settings WOI RO Processing Settings TER E nd Disabl e Test E a 2 NEIN menm res o50 20 Disabl o E l Adapti 128 Stand
224. isabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Note The USB version of the MS 4 does not support this command MS 4 Imager User Manual 3 21 Protocol Configuration Examples Protocol Configuration Examples Point to Point Main Port lt K100 8 0 1 1 gt Baud Rate 115 2K Parity None Stop Bits 2 Data Bits 8 lt K140 0 gt Point to Point lt K102 0 gt RS 232 enabled lt K102 1 gt RS 422 enabled Polling Mode Main Port lt K100 4 0 1 1 gt Baud Rate 9600 Parity None Stop Bits 2 Data Bits 8 lt K140 5 23 gt Polling Mode Address 23 lt K102 0 gt RS 232 Point to Point polling lt K143 30 gt 30 mS Response Timeout User Defined Polling Mode Main Port lt K100 4 0 1 1 gt Baud Rate 9600 Parity None Stop Bits 2 Data Bits 8 lt K140 5 12 gt Polling Mode Address 12 lt K148 08 09 18 0B 0C 0D gt Default RES 0x04 REQ 0x08 EOT 0x09 STX 0x18 ETX 0x0B ACK 0x0C NAK 0x0D lt K102 0 gt RS 232 Point to Point polling lt K143 40 gt 40 mS Response Timeout ACK NAK Main Port lt K100 9 0 1 1 gt Baud Rate 230K Parity None Stop Bits 2 Data Bits 8 lt K140 4 gt ACK NAK lt K147 01 1B 2E 1F gt Default RES and REQ 00 disabled STX 0x01 ETX 0x1B ACK 0x2E NAK 0x1F lt K102 1 gt RS 422 enabled lt K102 0 gt RS 232 enabled lt K143 50 gt 50 mS Response Timeout Auxiliary Port Listed below are several examples of Auxiliary Port commands lt K101 2 4 0 1 1 gt Half Dup
225. ismatch Good Read Outputs the first Good Read image in the read cycle The image file will immediately follow the symbol data MS 4 Imager User Manual 7 53 Configuring EZ Trax Output No Read Outputs the first No Read image in the read cycle The image file will immediately follow the symbol data Note If two symbols are present in the same image capture and one of them is successfully decoded no image will be output No Read and Good Read Outputs the first No Read or Good Read image in the read cycle Mismatch Outputs the image of the first mismatch condition Image Format Definition Selects the format of the image output file Serial Cmd lt K757 status comm port image mode image format jpeg quality object info output grade output gt Default Compressed Options 0 Lossless 1 Compressed Lossless A lossless image is one that is in a high resolution format and that will not lose resolution even when manipulated and saved multiple times When Lossless is enabled the JPEG Quality setting has no effect Compressed Outputs the image in JPEG format Image quality is determined by the JPEG Quality setting JPEG Quality Definition Sets the amount of JPEG image compression A value of 1 represents the highest compression and lowest image quality and 100 represents the lowest compression and highest image quality Serial Cmd lt K757 status comm port image mode image format jpeg quality object info
226. l To disable quickly press and release the EZ button EZ Button Operation To execute EZ button commands Single Beep Position 1 Hold down button until a single beep is heard and the 20 LED illuminates Two Beeps Position 2 Hold down button until two quick beeps are heard and the 20 and 40 LEDs illumi nate Three Beeps Position 3 Hold down button until three quick beeps are heard and the 20 40 and 60 LEDs illuminate Four Beeps Position 4 Hold down button until four quick beeps are heard and the 20 40 60 and 80 LEDs illuminate 7 28 MS 4 Imager User Manual I O Parameters Configurable Output 1 Output 1 Parameters Output On Trend Analysis Output State Negative Pulse Width 5 Output Mode Pulse Trend Analysis Symbol Quality ISO IEC 16022 Diagnostics Usage This option provides discrete signalling to host software to control external devices such as PLCs and relays It is useful for routing sorting and to prevent mis packaging and mis routing Definition Sets the discrete output functions for specific user selected conditions Allows the user to set the conditions under which an output or outputs will be activated Serial Cmd K810 0utput on output state pulse width output mode Default Mismatch or No Read Options 0 Mismatch or No Read 1 Match or good read 2 Mismatch 3 No Read 4 Trend Analysis 5 Symbol Quality 6 Diagnostic Warning
227. l minimize the chances of blurring and will produce better reads Avoid excessive skew or pitch Maximum skew is 30 maximum pitch is 30 Note For instant setup and validation the MS 4 can be hand held or placed on its side For accuracy however Microscan s mounting arm adapter kits P N 98 000048 01 are recommended 1 4 MS 4 Imager User Manual Quick Start Step 4 Install ESP Easy Setup Program ESP is Microscan s proprietary setup and testing application The purpose of ESP is to provide a quick and easy way to set up and configure Microscan readers When the MS 4 is connected to a host computer Windows Vista XP or 2000 ESP can be used to configure reader settings and to set up communications between the reader and host If installing from the Microscan Tools Drive 1 2 3 4 Insert the Microscan Tools Drive into a USB port on your computer Select ESP Software from the navigation bar at the left of the screen Click on ESP Software under the Current Version heading Click the Run button and follow the prompts in the ESP Setup Wizard Note During installation you may see an Internet Explorer Security Warning that states The publisher could not be verified If you see this warning click Run to continue installation If downloading from the web 1 2 3 6 Go to the Download Center at www microscan com Create a new member account or if you are already a member enter y
228. lash The beeper and green LED flash are used to indicate calibration status as shown in the table below Indicator 2 quick beeps Status Calibration has started 5 quick beeps Calibration has failed 1 long beep Calibration has been completed successfully 1 sec Green Flash Calibration has been completed successfully MS 4 Imager User Manual Initiating Calibration Calibration Progress Output to Terminal When initiated by serial command or EZ button the autocalibration operation will output progress and process information to a terminal if the system is configured to do so Terminal Depending upon how the calibration options are configured the autocalibration process can have up to 3 steps Search Pass Medium Pass Fine Tune Pass Calibration data is shown in a simple table format under 7 category headings each of which are defined below Heading Definition Prog Progress indicator with a range of 0 100 Indicates percent complete Rating Rating indicator higher ratings are more favorable Decode Number of successful decodes for the pass Quality Quality indicator higher ratings are more favorable Shutter Shutter setting under operation Gain Gain setting under operation Locate Time required to locate symbol expressed in milliseconds Calibration Progress Output Examples Terminal Search Pass The purpose of Search Pass is to decod
229. layed as MAIN SUPPLEMENTAL Note Under no circumstances will the supplemental symbol data be sent without a main symbol Note If additional symbols other than the main or supplemental will be read in the same read cycle Number of Symbols should be set accordingly Separator Status UPC EAN Usage Allows users to distinguish between the main and Supplemental symbols Definition A character can be inserted between the standard UPC or EAN symbology and the supplemental symbology when Supplementals is set to Enabled or Required Serial Cmd lt K473 UPC status EAN status supplementals status separator status separator character supplemental type format UPC E as UPC A gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 6 22 MS 4 Imager User Manual Symbologies Separator Character UPC EAN Note If Separator Character has been changed to any other character and you wish to redefine the separator as a comma you will need to use ESP Usage As required by the application Definition Allows the user to change the separator character from a comma to a new character Serial Cmd lt K473 UPC status EAN status supplementals status separator status separator character supplemental type format UPC E as UPC A gt Default comma Options Any ASCII character Important The ASCII characters lt gt and can only be entered as hex pairs For lt lt K473h 3C gt For gt lt K473h 3E g
230. ld you like to connect to the MS 4 ed a Switch Model Note If you need to select another reader model later click the Switch Model button near the top of the screen 1 6 MS 4 Imager User Manual Quick Start Step 6 Select Communications Protocol Important The Imager is in Continuous Read Mode by default For best connection results be sure that no symbols are within the Imager s field of view while attempting to connect When the Select Protocol dialog appears choose your connection protocol and click Next Select Protocol Select the MS 4 from the Select Device menu and click Finish Please select the protocol to use C RS232 USB One reader was found Select Device 1928374 If you choose USB protocol Select Protocol Please select the protocol to use G RS232 C USB Select the com port to use and press Finish to autoconnect to the reader Otherwise select the Force Connect checkbox to connect at the specified settings If you choose RS 232 protocol Comot row s Force Connect Click Connect cl Cancel When you are connected you will see the green connection indicator in the status bar at the bottom right of your screen USB Ms 4 1 MS 4 CONNECTED USE HID RS 232 ms5 4 1 MS 4 EONNEEIEDR Point to Point COMI 115 2K N 8 1 If you are using an RS 232 inte
231. le Timeout Definition Read Cycle Timeout is the duration of the read cycle Serial Cmd lt K220 end of read cycle read cycle timeout gt Default 200 x10mS Options 1 to 65 535 MS 4 Imager User Manual 5 15 Capture Mode Capture Mode Definition Serial Cmd Default Options Capture Mode relates to the way that images are captured and processed lt K241 capture mode number of captures rapid capture mode gt Continuous Capture 0 Rapid Capture 1 Continuous Capture Rapid Capture Definition In a rapid capture mode one or multiple captures as many as 32 can be taken at an interval specified by the time between captures parameter In this mode the only limiting time factor is integration and transfer timing Continuous Capture Usage Definition 5 16 Continuous Capture is useful in applications with slower line speeds or where symbol spacing may be random or not time dependent In Continuous Capture Mode image captures are taken throughout the read cycle in a multi buffered format see diagram below The Imager begins processing the first captured image at the same time that it captures the second image Captures will continue occurring throughout the read cycle until an end condition occurs such as a timeout a new trigger the last frame in a capture sequence or a combination of the above Capture Start of Read pg y End of Cycle UALS ABE E E P read cycle Proc
232. ler s welcome screen Microscan USB to Serial Driver Installer Welcome to the Microscan USB MICROSCAN Virtual COM Port Driver 1 0 0 0 U S B Vi rt ua This program will walk you through installing the driver for your Microscan Imager Once the driver is installed you will CO M Po rt be able to connect to the Microscan Imager through an m RS232 virtual COM port Driver SS e o To continue click Next MS 4 Imager User Manual A 25 USB to Serial Virtual COM Port Driver 4 Read the License Agreement shown below If you accept the terms of the agreement A 26 click the radio button next to the statement I accept this agreement and click Next Microscan USB to Serial Driver Installer E Tk 2 To continue accept the following license agreement To read the entire agreement use the scroll bar or press the Page Down key Software Product License Carefully read the tems and conditions of this agreement before instaling this Software Product Installation confims your organization s acceptar se tems and conditions as Licensee F your organization does not agree with the terms and conditions of this agreement do not continue with installation and promptly retum the Software Product and all related media manuals and documentation to Microscan Systems Inc Microscan 1207 SW 7th Street Renton accept this agreement Smem Bint dont accept this agreement ae Cae Importan
233. lex Baud Rate 9600 Parity None Stop Bits 2 Data Bits 8 lt K101 1 5 0 1 1 gt Transparent Baud Rate 19 2K Parity None Stop Bits 2 Data Bits 8 lt K101 3 7 0 1 1 gt Full Duplex Baud Rate 57 6K Parity None Stop Bits 2 Data Bits 8 lt K101 5 6 0 1 1 gt Command Processing Baud Rate 230K Parity None Stop Bits 2 Data Bits 8 3 22 MS 4 Imager User Manual Communications USB HID Interface The USB version of the MS 4 Imager operates as an HID Human Interface Device on the USB bus HID class devices communicate via report packets An HID may support multiple report types each of which is identified with a unique report ID The MS 4 supports two different report types Microscan HID Report ID 1 Keyboard Report ID 2 The Imager always outputs the same data for both report types The user may enable or disable either report type Regardless of the report type used by the host application the application protocol via USB is identical to RS 232 RS 422 ports HID Reports are used as a channel for standard Microscan Imager communication command input and symbol data output Important No matter how the Imager is configured it is always able to receive and respond to commands from the host application using Microscan HID Reports MS 4 Imager User Manual 3 23 USB HID Interface Report Options The following functionality conditions hold true regardless of how HID Reports are configured 1
234. lightest pixels is calculated and the difference of the two means is the Symbol Contrast ANSI Symbol Contrast grading is defined this way A 4 0 if SC 7096 B 3 0 if SC gt 55 C 2 0 if SC gt 40 D 1 0 if SC gt 20 F 0 0 if SC lt 20 If enabled the symbol contrast is appended to the symbol data according to the ISO IEC 16022 Symbol Quality Output Mode setting lt K709 symbol contrast print growth axial non uniformity UEC Disabled 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Print Growth Definition Serial Cmd Default Options 8 10 The extent to which dark or light markings appropriately fill or exceed their module boundaries These values are determined by counting pixels in the clock pattern of the binary digitized image then comparing it to a nominal value and minimum and maximum values The print growth grade is defined in this way A 4 0 if 050 lt PG lt 0 50 B 3 0 if 070 lt PG lt 0 70 C 2 0 if 085 lt PG lt 0 85 D 1 0 if 10 lt PG lt 1 00 F 0 0 if PG lt 1 00 or PG gt 100 If enabled the print growth is appended to the symbol data according to the ISO IEC 16022 Symbol Quality Output Mode setting K709 symbol contrast print growth axial non uniformity UEC gt Disabled 0 Disabled 1 Enabled MS 4 Imager User Manual Symbol Quality Axial Non Uniformity Data Matrix Only Definition Axial non uniformity is a measure of how much the sampling point spacing differs f
235. ll see the green connection indicator in the status bar at the bottom right of your screen USB ms 4 1 M5 4 EONEGTEDRNI Use HID RS 232 ms 4 1 MS 4 comen Point to Point COMI 115 2K N 8 1 Important If you are using an RS 232 interface and your connection attempt fails click the Autoconnect button select a different communications port and try again Note If your RS 232 host settings cannot be changed to match the Imager s settings check the Force Connect box 2 12 MS 4 Imager User Manual Using ESP View The View menu allows you to move quickly between interfaces view without using the icon buttons on the App Mode toolbar It also allows you to access the Bar Code Dialog Configuration Camera Terminal Bar Code Dialog pue utcput Forma In the Bar Code Dialog you can create symbols by typing the text you P wish to encode This is a useful tool for creating configuration symbols Barcode Dialog allowing you to configure your reader by reading the symbols you create Bar Code Configuration Print Save As Drag specific configuration values from the control tree directly into this field to Bar Code Value lt gt lt q encode new symbols Choose a spatial n orientation forthe MW Rotation fo Degrees New new symbol Caption cal Set a human Same As Bar Code Value readable caption for the symbol
236. logy type Default 2D Enhanced Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 2 2D Enhanced Background Color Serial Cmd lt K255 index shutter speed gain sub sampling row pointer column pointer row depth column width threshold mode fixed threshold value processing mode narrow margins background color symbology type gt Default Both Options 0 White 1 Black 2 Both 11 6 MS 4 Imager User Manual Configuration Database Symbology Type Definition This field allows the user to configure the database to enable specific symbologies for selected database indexes Symbology specific parameters must be configured with the appropriate symbology command For example if fixed length Code 128 is required it must first be set up with the Code 128 command lt K474 gt To select a particular symbology just add the number value associated with that symbology type Examples If Data Matrix and Code 39 are required the paramater would be 2 16 18 If 1 2 5 BC412 and DataBar Limited are required the parameter would be 128 2048 16384 18560 Serial Cmd lt K255 index shutter speed gain sub sampling row pointer column pointer row depth column width threshold mode fixed threshold value processing mode narrow margins background color symbology type Default Disabled Disabled When Symbology Type is disabled the database uses the current Symbology Type setup to determine active symbologies Any Symbology
237. lt Output Frame Number of Symbols Frame 1 Frame 2 Frame 3 Read Cycle Result Output Frame MS 4 Imager User Manual 4 No Read No Read No Read No Read Frame 1 1 No Read No Read Good Read Good Read None 2 No Read No Read Good Read Symbol 1 No Read Frame 1 7 47 Database Identifier Output Database Identifier Output Usage Useful in keeping track of which database entries read which symbols Serial Cmd lt K759 status separator gt Default 0 Options 0 Disabled Disabled When this command is disabled no database identifier information will be output Enabled When this command is enabled the Imager will append a two digit number and the characters DB to the data output following the separator for each symbol decoded using Configuration Database For example if the separator is an underscore character and the second database entry reads a symbol encoded with data capture during the read cycle the symbol data output will be data capture DBO2 If the database is not active no identifiers will be attached to output Separator Usage The separator character separates the symbol data from the database identifier Serial Cmd lt K759 status separator gt Default space Options Any ASCII character Important The ASCII characters lt gt and can only be entered as hex pairs For lt K759h 3C For gt K759h 3E For K759h 2C
238. lways in the read cycle and it will attempt to decode and transmit every capture If a single symbol stays within read range for multiple read cycles its data will be transmitted repeatedly until it leaves the read range The Imager sends replies to serial commands that require responses when symbol data is transmitted or read cycle timeout is enabled and a timeout occurs and at least one captured image has been processed Depending on the combination of enabled symbologies and the Threshold Mode setting the Imager may take longer than the timeout to process a captured image Note When to Output and No Read options have no affect on Continuous Read Serial Cmd lt K200 0 gt 5 6 MS 4 Imager User Manual Read Cycle Continuous Read 1 Output Usage Continuous Read 1 Output can be useful in applications where it is not feasible to use a trigger and all succeeding symbols contain different information It is also effective in applications where the objects are presented by hand Definition In Continuous Read 1 Output the Imager self triggers whenever it decodes a new symbol or a timeout occurs If End of Read Cycle is set to Timeout and the symbol doesn t change the output is repeated at the end of each timeout period For example if Timeout is set to one second the Imager sends the symbol data immediately and repeats the output at intervals of one second for as long as it continues to capture the symbol If End of Read Cycle is set
239. n 1 dimension 2 dimension tolerance orientation status orientation value Frame Information lt K734 output frame number output coordinates LED Configuration lt K737 LED mode ISO IEC 16022 grade Image Output MS 4 Imager User Manual lt K739 image output mode communication port file format jpeg quality A 7 Serial Configuration Commands Target Flood LEDs lt K750 green flash LED status target pattern LED status green flash duration gt Database Identifier Output lt K759 status separator gt EZ Button lt K770 global status default on power on load configuration database save for power on gt EZ Button Modes lt K771 single beep two beeps three beeps four beeps gt Trend Analysis Output 1 K780 trend analysis mode trigger evaluation period number to output on gt Trend Analysis Output 2 lt K781 trend analysis mode trigger evaluation period number to output on Trend Analysis Output 3 K782 trend analysis mode trigger evaluation period number to output on Diagnostic Output 1 K790 unused 1 servuce unit Diagnostic Output 2 lt K791 unused 1 servuce unit Diagnostic Output 3 K792 unused 1 servuce unit ISO IEC 16022 Symbol Quality Output 1 lt K800 output on symbol contrast symbol contrast threshold output on print growth print growth threshold output on axial non uniformity axial non uniformity threshold outpu
240. n settings lt Z gt However it is not foolproof as defaulting with the EZ button only recovers Custom Default settings which can be misconfigured themselves For this reason do not save to Custom Default settings lt Zc gt until the Imager s configuration has been tested Symbologies If the Imager is going to be configured with Data Matrix symbols do not disable Data Matrix lt K479 gt Disabling Data Matrix will prevent the Imager from reading configuration symbols MS 4 Imager User Manual 3 31 ASCII Character Entry Modifier ASCII Character Entry Modifier Commands that require ASCII text fields such as Preamble and Postamble commands can be sent to the Imager as hex value pairs see Appendix E ASCII Table for conversions Serial Cmd Format lt Knnnh 00 FF gt To enter ASCII fields as hex values 00 to FF add a lower case h directly after the command s K number and then enter the hex value that corresponds with the desired ASCII character Example Consider the Postamble command Serial Cmd lt K142 status postamble character s gt Imagine that your application requires the ASCII character to be the postamble in your symbol decode output The ASCII characters lt gt and can only be entered as hex pairs So to make gt the postamble in your symbol decode output enter the Postamble command as follows K142h 3E Note that the status field contains only a This is because the only field
241. nd on command samples the video converts the sample to a digital value and stores that in a computer s memory Front End System The object illumination optics and imager blocks of a vision system Includes all components useful to acquire a good image for subsequent processing Full Duplex A communications system in which signals can travel simultaneously between devices Gain The amount of energy applied to pixel gray scale values prior to output expressed in dB optimal signal strength Good Read A decode The successful scanning and decoding of the information encoded in a bar code symbol Gradient The rate of change of pixel intensity first derivative Gray Scale Variations of values from white through shades of gray to black in a digitized image with black assigned the value of zero and white the value of one A 30 MS 4 Imager User Manual Appendices Half Duplex A communications system in which signals can travel between devices in both directions but not simultaneously Histogram A graphical representation of the frequency of occurrence of each intensity or range of intensities gray levels of pixels in an image The height represents the number of observations occurring in each interval Host A computer PLC or other device that is used to execute commands and process data and discrete signals Image Projection of an object or scene onto a plane i e screen or image senso
242. nd of Read Cycle setting a timeout or new trigger occurs Serial Cmd lt K200 3 gt 5 8 MS 4 Imager User Manual Read Cycle Serial Data Usage Serial Data is effective in a highly controlled environment where the host knows precisely when the object is in the field of view It is also useful in determining if a No Read has occurred Definition In Serial Data the Imager accepts an ASCII character from the host or controlling device as a trigger to start a read cycle A Serial Data trigger behaves the same as an External Edge trigger Serial commands are entered inside angle brackets as shown here lt t gt Serial Cmd lt K200 4 gt Note In Serial Data sending a non delimited start serial character will start a read cycle however a non delimited stop serial character has no effect Serial Data or External Edge Usage Serial Data or External Edge is seldom used but can be useful in an application that primarily uses an external sensing device but occasionally needs to be triggered manually An auxiliary terminal can be connected to the auxiliary port so the user can send the serial trigger character through the Imager to the host Definition In this mode the Imager accepts either a serial ASCII character oran external trigger pulse to start the read cycle Serial Cmd lt K200 5 gt Note In Serial Data sending a non delimited start serial character will start a read cycle however a non delimited stop serial ch
243. nfigured the EZ button as a trigger EZ Button Configuration By default basic calibration can be initiated from the EZ button 3 beeps Note that this only changes the camera image processing and symbology settings of the Imager To default the USB MS 4 hold down the EZ button during power on Note This only overwrites Power On settings with Custom Default settings as when the Zrc command is received It does not overwrite Power On settings with Factory Defaults as when the Zrd command is received If Custom Defaults are misconfigured another method must be used to default the Imager Implementing the Host Operating System API and Establishing a Connection with the Microscan HID Interface When a connection is made the host can send serial configuration default commands The Imager will always be able to receive configuration commands from the host application and send responses to those commands However the Imager can be configured to stop producing IN Reports to the host from symbol data output and diagnostics service messages 3 30 MS 4 Imager User Manual Communications Configuration Exceptions for USB Read Cycle Mode By default the Imager operates in Continuous Read Mode f the Imager is configured using Data Matrix symbols the read cycle mode should be the last item changed before saving the configuration settings and beginning operation This is because all read cycle modes other than Continuous Read Mode requ
244. nge and storage type description of all fields in the requested K command MS 4 Imager User Manual 13 21 Other Operational Serial Commands The following serial utility commands can be entered from the ESP Terminal window or a PLC Y Modem Upload Transfer Options lt uy path filename gt Y Modem Download Transfer Options lt dy path filename gt Image Library Request lt op 9 gt Manages files in a selected directory File Source Explanation Nothing All files in root directory I All files in root directory Isaved All files in saved directory An All files in all directories Idel Deletes all files in the root director Isaved del Deletes all files in the saved directory del Deletes files in all directories 13 22 MS 4 Imager User Manual es 14 Output Format Contents Output Format Serial COMMANAS ccccccccceceececececesseeeeeceeaeaeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeseseseseeeeeauaeaseaeeeees 14 2 Output Format Status cccccccsessssssececeeeeeeeeecesesceeeseseeeeeeeeeaeeeeseseseeeeeeeeseeseusesseeeqeseaaeaeaeeeees 14 3 IEIS AEAEE A T rie ee We Roe SEEN Seca Seah ed de aaa Maes a ok ee de a es 14 4 Format Extract ccc aces ee le o e 2d Que ap tr es EORR AR EH baa EAE 14 5 Format Inserts cec e ctr te A PORE EAE ENRRU Pe SEE EE EREES 14 7 Output Filter Configuration sesesssssssssssssssseseee eene einen eren nne rr risen ner nrr n nnne nens 14
245. ngth 1 symbol length 2 guard bar status range mode status gt UPC EAN lt K473 UPC status EAN status supplemental status separator sta tus separator character supplemental type format UPC E as UPC A gt Code 128 EAN 128 lt K474 status fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length EAN 128 status output format application record separator status applica tion record separator character application record brackets applica tion record padding gt Code 93 lt K475 status fixed symbol length status symbol length PDF417 lt K476 status unused fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length unused codeword collection Data Matrix lt K479 ECC 200 status ECC 000 status ECC 050 status ECC 080 status ECC 100 status ECC 140 status ECC 120 status ECC 130 Status gt QR Code lt K480 status gt BC412 lt K481 status check digit output fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length gt DataBar 14 lt K482 status gt DataBar Limited lt K483 status gt DataBar Expanded lt K484 status fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length gt MicroPDF417 lt K485 status unused fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length MS 4 Imager User Manual Data Matrix Data Matrix Usage Very useful where information needs to be packed into a small area and or where symbols need to be applied directly to the substrate with laser etching chemical etching dot peen or other metho
246. ode is enabled and a match occurs MS 4 Imager User Manual 7 17 Output Indicators Static Presentation Mode Static Presentation Mode is used in conjunction with Continuous Read Mode lt K200 0 gt When operating in Static Presentation Mode the red LEDs will illuminate while the Imager is searching for a symbol in Continuous Read Mode When a symbol is placed in the field of view and a good read occurs the green LEDs will illuminate and stay on for the duration of time set in Green Flash Duration Only one read will occur during that time unless more than one symbol is enabled in Number of Symbols Note If Static Presentation Mode is selected but the Imager is not in Continuous Read the Green Flash will not occur To use Static Presentation 1 Enable Continuous Read 2 Select the number of symbols 3 Enable Static Presentation in Green Flash Mode 4 Select the read time in Green Flash Duration Match The green LEDs will flash when a match condition is met If multisymbol is enabled then green flash LEDs will illuminate only if all symbols qualify as a match If matchcode is disabled then this mode will activate the LEDs on a good read Mismatch Same as Match except that LEDs will illuminate on a mismatch Strobe Green flash LEDs will act as an illumination strobe for image capture If it is required that the green flash LEDs be the only illumination for image capture then the internal illumination LEDs can be disabl
247. ode rate can vary dramatically due to the angle and location of the symbol in relation to the field of view This test is very useful in aligning and positioning the Imager during setup Enter Percent Test Sending Cp instructs the Imager to transmit the percentage of decodes and any decoded symbol data End Read Rate Test Sending lt J gt ends both the Percent test and the Decodes Second test 13 4 MS 4 Imager User Manual Utilities Counters Counter commands can be a numeric value from 00000 to 65535 After reaching the maximum numeric limit of 65535 an error message will be displayed and the counter will automatically roll over and start counting again at 00000 To obtain the cumulative total of counts after the rollover has occurred add 65536 per each rollover the Imager does not keep track of the number of rollovers to the current count Note All counter values will be lost if power is recycled to the Imager or if the Imager receives a Reset or Save command Counters by ESP You can access Counters from ESP s Utilities menu Click the Request button to display the appropriate count or Clear to set the counter to zero Request All Clear All Request Clear Tioga Request Clear Good lead NE Request Clear Mast Request Clear Mam MS 4 Imager User Manual 13 5 Counters by Serial Command No Read Counter Sending lt N gt displays the total number of No Reads that hav
248. of Matchcode Type setting Note A No Read can still be transmitted if Enabled When to Output Symbol Data Definition This command allows the user to choose when symbol data can be sent to the host Serial Cmd lt K705 symbol data output status when to output gt Default As Soon As Possible Options 0 ASAP 1 End of Read Cycle As Soon As Possible Usage As Soon As Possible is useful in applications in which symbol data needs to be moved quickly to the host typically when the host is making decisions based on symbol data Definition Enabling As Soon As Possible causes symbol data to be sent to the host immediately after a symbol has been successfully decoded Note More than one decode might in fact be required to qualify as a good read depending on how Decodes Before Output is set End of Read Cycle Usage End of Read Cycle is useful in timing based systems in which the hostis not ready to accept data at the time that it is decoded Definition Enabling End of Read Cycle means that symbol data does not get sent to the host until the read cycle ends with a timeout or new trigger Start of read cycle End of read cycle Read cycle duration Host This is when host activates trigger expects output MS 4 Imager User Manual 7 5 No Read Message No Read Message Usage Used in applications where the host needs serial verification that a symbol has not been read and especially useful in new print verif
249. ol data and it will pre cede any symbol quality data if symbol quality settings are enabled see Symbol Quality Separator on page 8 5 The symbol quality separator is located between the end of the already formatted data and the F that precedes the frame number Output Coordinates Serial Cmd KT34 output frame number output coordinates Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Disabled When Output Coordinates is set to Disabled the coordinates are not output as part of the symbol data Enabled When Output Coordinates is set to Enabled the four sets of object coordinates for the first successfully decoded symbol are attached to the symbol data output in the following format nnn mmm where nnn is a 3 digit X coordinate and mmm is a 3 digit Y coordinate The validation separator is located between the end of the already formatted data and the first coordinate point The point with the lowest X Y sum will be output first followed by the next three points in a clockwise direction Example 032 040 287 056 287 279 048 271 7 44 MS 4 Imager User Manual I O Parameters Image Output Usage This feature allows the user to select what read cycle condition triggers the image file output Definition Used to output an image file when a specified read cycle condition has been met such as No Read or Good Read When the read cycle is complete the normal read cycle output will occur incl
250. on Default 0 Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Service Message Serial Cmd lt K409 status service message threshold resolution gt Default SERVICE Options An ASCII string between 1 and 10 characters Important The ASCII characters lt gt and can only be entered as hex pairs For lt lt K409h 3C gt For gt lt K409h 3E gt For lt K409h 2C gt See ASCII Character Entry Modifier on page 3 32 for a detailed explanation of how to enter ASCII characters as hex values Threshold Serial Cmd K409 status service message threshold resolution gt Default 300 5 minutes Options 1 to 65535 Resolution Serial Cmd K409 status service message threshold resolution Default Seconds Options 0 Seconds 1 Minutes MS 4 Imager User Manual 7 43 Frame Information Frame Information Output Frame Number Serial Cmd K734 output frame number output coordinates Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Disabled When Output Frame Number is set to Disabled the frame number is not output as part of the symbol data Enabled When Output Frame Number is set to Enabled the number of the frame in which the symbol was first decoded is attached to the symbol output information The output format is Fnnn where nnn is a 3 digit decimal value from 0 to 255 The frame number rolls over to 0 once it passes 255 If this feature is enabled the frame information will follow the symb
251. on This command returns the Imager s factory preset focal distance Serial Cmd lt K525 focal distance read only gt Default Standard Density 300 3 Low Density 400 4 Options N A 10 18 MS 4 Imager User Manual Camera and IP Setup Focal Distance Table Read Only Number of Focal Distances Definition Specifies the number of focal distances supported by the Imager 1 Serial Cmd lt K526 number of focal distances focal distance Default 1 Options N A Focal Distance is factory preset Focal Distance Definition Returns the Imager s factory preset focal distance Serial Cmd K526 number of focal distances focal distance Default Returns the Imager s factory preset Focal Distance value Options N A MS 4 Imager User Manual 10 19 IP Threshold IP Threshold Threshold Mode Usage Fixed Mode works best when decode time must be as short as possible and the reflectance and illumination of the symbol area is uniform and unchanging Cycle Fixed Mode is useful in applications where decode time can be slightly longer and reflectance and illumination of the symbol area is uniform and unchanging Otherwise Adaptive Mode is the preferred mode Definition This value switches the image processing threshold mode between the Adaptive Fixed and Cycle Fixed modes An adaptive routine sets the light dark threshold using data acquired from the current read A fixed routine applies the same gray scale th
252. on No Read sequence on mismatch Disabled 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 2 Wild Card 3 Sequential Has no effect on operations Instructs the Imager to compare symbols or portions of symbols with the master symbol Allows the user to enter user defined wild card characters in the master symbol Instructs the Imager to sequence after each match numeric only and compare symbols or portions of symbols for sequential numbers Note If Matchcode Type is set to Sequential the Imager will behave as if Number of Symbols were set to 1 regardless of the user defined configuration MS 4 Imager User Manual Matchcode Sequential Matching Usage Useful in tracking product serial numbers that increment or decrement sequentially Definition With Sequential enabled Sequential Matching determines if a count is in ascending incremental or descending decremental order Serial Cmd lt K223 matchcode type sequential matching match start position match length wild card character sequence on No Read sequence on mismatch gt Default Increment Options 0 Increment 1 Decrement Match Start Position Usage Match Start Position is useful in defining specific portions of a symbol for comparison For example if a symbol contains a part number manufacturing date and lot code info but you are only interested in the part number information you can set the Imager to sort only the part number and ignore the other characters Definit
253. ormat All symbols read will be subject to the special output formatting options available in this command Note Code 128 status must be enabled for EAN status to be active Serial Cmd lt K474 status fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length EAN 128 status output format application record separator status application record separator character application record brackets application record padding Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 2 Required Output Format Code 128 EAN 128 Definition In Standard the Imager will not apply special EAN output formatting options In Application the Imager will apply the special EAN output formatting options to decoded EAN conforming symbols Serial Cmd lt K474 status fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length EAN 128 status output format application record separator status application record separator character application record brackets application record padding Default Standard Options 0 Standard 1 Application Application Record Separator Status Code 128 EAN 128 Definition When enabled an EAN separator will be inserted into the output between fields whenever an EAN conforming symbol is decoded and EAN output formatting applies Serial Cmd lt K474 status fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length EAN 128 status output format application record separator status application record separator character application record brackets a
254. ositive MS 4 Imager User Manual 5 11 Serial Trigger Serial Trigger Usage Definition Allows the user to define the trigger character and delimiters that start and stop the read cycle A serial trigger is considered an online host command and requires the same command format as all host commands It must be entered within angle bracket delimiters lt gt or in the case of non delimited triggers it must define individual start and stop characters Serial Trigger Character Delimited Usage Definition Serial Cmd Default Options Allows the user to define the trigger character that initiates the read cycle A single ASCII host serial trigger character that initiates the read cycle A delimited trigger character is one that either starts or ends the read cycle and is enclosed by delimiters such as lt gt lt K201 serial trigger character Space bar Any single ASCII character including control characters except NUL 00 in hex an existing host command character or an on line protocol character Control characters entered on the command line are displayed in the menu as mnemonic characters Note Serial Data or Serial Data or External Edge triggering mode must be enabled for Serial Trigger Character to take effect Important The ASCII characters lt gt and can only be entered as hex pairs For lt lt K201h 3C gt For gt lt K201h 3E gt For lt K201h 2C gt See ASCII Character Ent
255. our user name and password Navigate to the Microscan Software section of the Download Center near the top of the page Click on the link showing the latest version of ESP Extract the ESP installation files to a location of your choice on the host computer Note where your ESP exe file is stored on your hard drive At the end of the installation process the following icon will appear on your desktop Click the ESP icon to start the program System Requirements for ESP 233 MHz Pentium PC Windows 8 7 Vista or XP operating system 32 bit or 64 bit Internet Explorer 6 0 or higher 128 MB RAM or greater 160 MB free disk space 800 x 600 256 color display 1024 x 768 32 bit color recommended MS 4 Imager User Manual 1 5 Select Model Step 5 Select Model When you start ESP the following menu will appear Select a Model Current Legacy BSeee Quadrus EZ dua Quadrus MINI iris MINI Velocity ees MS 3 Laser Base MS 890 MS 860 MS 820 wepr MS Fonnen MS cenen Quadrus Verifier MS Q Description MS 4 1 M Show this dialog at startup Skip EZ Mode Cancel 1 Click the MS 4 button and then click OK If you do not want to make this selection every time you start ESP uncheck Show this window at Startup 2 Select the default reader name MS 4 1 or type a name of your choice in the Description text field and click OK 3 Click Yes when this dialog appears J Wou
256. out K143 response timeout LRC lt K145 status gt Auxiliary Port System Data Status lt K146 aux status gt ACK NAK Options lt K147 RES REQ STX ETX ACK NAK gt Polling Mode Options lt K148 RES REQ STX ETX ACK NAK gt USB HID Reports Autoconfiguration Daisy Chain Calibration K149 Microscan HID IN report status keyboard IN report status K150DAIS Y Calibration Options K529 gain shutter speed focus position symbol type WOI framing WOI margin line scan height Autocalibrate Read Cycle lt CAL gt Trigger Mode Duration lt K200 trigger mode trigger filter duration Serial Trigger Character External Trigger State lt K201 serial trigger character gt lt K202 external trigger state gt End of Read Cycle lt K220 end of read cycle read cycle timeout gt Minimum Good Reads lt K221 minimum good reads gt Multisymbol lt K222 number of symbols multisymbol separator Start Trigger Character lt K229 start character gt Stop Trigger Character lt K230 stop character gt Capture Mode lt K241 capture mode number of captures rapid capture mode gt Capture Timing lt K242 time before first capture time between first and second captures time between seventh and eighth captures Image Storage lt K244 image storage type image store mode gt IP Timeout Symbologies lt K245 image processing timeout Narrow Margins Symbolo
257. output grade output gt Default 90 Options 1 to 100 percent 7 54 MS 4 Imager User Manual I O Parameters Object Info Output Definition If a symbol is decoded during an image capture the symbol type and other supplementary symbol information is also included Serial Cmd lt K757 comm port image mode image format jpeg quality object info output grade output gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Grade Output Definition Symbol quality information will be output in the form of an abbreviated identifier for each read cycle Serial Cmd lt K757 comm port image mode image format jpeg quality object info output grade output gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled MS 4 Imager User Manual 7 55 Configuring EZ Trax Output 7 56 MS 4 Imager User Manual E 8 Symbol Quality Contents Symbol Quality Serial Commands sse eene nennen nnne 8 2 Overview of Symbol Quality essen nennen mener enne 8 3 Symbol Quality by ESP ierit deter e deside reai erre fovea ed cedere ie e irae Ene giao 8 4 Symbol Quality Separator Data Matrix Output Mode ssee eem 8 8 ISO IEC 16022 Symbol Quality Output nennen 8 10 ISO IEC 16022 Symbol Quality Output by ESP sssssssseeeeeeeeeneeeeen nennen 8 12 Microscan Symbol Quality Output sees enne 8 13 Microscan Symbol Quality Output by ESP sssss
258. output state pulse width output mode Trend Analysis Output 3 Note Output On under Output 3 Parameters must be set to Trend Analysis for this output to function Output 3 Parameters Output On Trend Analysis Serial Cmd lt K782 trend analysis mode trigger evaluation period number to output on ISO IEC 16022 Symbol Quality Output 3 Note Output On under Output 3 Parameters must be set to Symbol Quality for this output to function Output 3 Parameters Output On Symbol Quality Serial Cmd lt K802 output on symbol contrast symbol contrast threshold output on print growth print growth threshold output on axial non uniformity axial non uniformity threshold output on UEC UEC threshold gt Diagnostic Output 3 Note Output On under Output 3 Parameters must be set to Diagnostic Warning for this output to function Output 3 Parameters Output On Diagnostic Warning Serial Cmd lt K792 unused 1 service unit 7 40 MS 4 Imager User Manual I O Parameters Power On Reset Counts Note Power On Reset Counts is a read only command Power On Serial Cmd lt K406 power on resets power on saves power on flash saves Power On uses a 16 bit counter that increments each time the Imager is powered on Resets Serial Cmd K406 power on resets power on saves power on flash saves Resets uses a 16 bit counter that increments each time the Imager is reset This value is reset at power on P
259. ower On Saves Serial Cmd K406 power on resets power on saves power on flash saves Power On Saves uses a 16 bit counter that increments each time an Imager setting is saved for power on with a lt Z gt command Power On Flash Saves Serial Cmd K406 power on resets power on saves power on flash saves Power On Flash Saves uses a 16 bit counter that increments each time an Imager setting is saved to the customer parameter section of flash memory with a Zc command MS 4 Imager User Manual 7 41 Time Since Reset Time Since Reset Note Time Since Reset is a read only command Hours Serial Cmd lt K407 hours minutes gt Default 16 bit counter 0 to 65535 Hours uses a 16 bit counter that increments every 60 minutes Minutes Serial Cmd lt K407 hours minutes gt Default 16 bit counter 0 to 60 Minutes uses a 16 bit counter that increments every 60 seconds Note Time counts are reset at power on but not with an lt A gt or lt Z gt command 7 42 MS 4 Imager User Manual I O Parameters Service Message When Service Message is enabled a message of up to 10 ASCII characters is sent whenever the system detects that the service timer s limit has been reached The service timer is reset at power on meaning that the service timer s limit is the amount of time since last reset Service timer increments can be set in seconds or minutes Serial Cmd lt K409 status service message threshold resoluti
260. pattern status symbol size mode symbol size 1 symbol size 2 symbol size tolerance dimension mode dimension 1 dimension 2 dimension tolerance orientation mode orientation value gt Default 0 Options 0 to 359 Note A symbol s orientation can miss the precise Orientation Value by several degrees and still be qualified To be certain of the extent of the allowable tolerance you should experiment with symbols in various orientations In no case can they be more than 45 from the assigned orientation value and still be qualified MS 4 Imager User Manual 7 15 Read Duration Output Read Duration Output Usage Useful in evaluating actual read cycle timing results especially when initially setting up an application to determine maximum line speed obtainable based on spacing between symbols Definition When enabled the duration of the read cycle in milliseconds is appended to the symbol data The read duration is the time from the beginning of the read cycle until data is output Read Duration Output Mode Serial Cmd lt K706 status separator gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Important To measure the entire read cycle when in External Level trigger mode set When to Output Symbol Data to End of Read Cycle This output can measure over 49 days worth of duration if exceeded the OVERFLOW message will be output in place of the duration Read Duration Output Separator Definition User define
261. polled mode Host Aux Auxiliary port data or read data is sent to the v host whenever it is received x e Auxiliary port data is not echoed ica Auxiliary port data to the host is always sent without a preamble or postamble Data Originating from the Imager Data is not sent to the auxiliary port Aux Host Port x Imager Data Originating from the Host All host data is echoed to the auxiliary port in unpolled mode Aux p Host Port s 4 Imager Serial Cmd lt K101 aux port mode baud rate parity stop bits data bits daisy chain i d status daisy chain i d Options 3 Full Duplex 3 14 MS 4 Imager User Manual Communications Daisy Chain Mode Usage Useful in applications where More than one symbol type is present A symbol may be present on multiple sides of a package Symbols are presented at different depths Definition In a daisy chain application readers are connected in tandem or a daisy chain and decoded data is relayed from one reader to another until the data reaches the host A primary reader has its host port linked to the host computer and its auxiliary port linked to the host port of the first secondary reader in the chain Thereafter each secondary reader s auxiliary port is linked to the host port of the secondary reader that is farther from the host in the daisy chain Each reader in the chain can be assigned an ID that accompanies any data that it sends Serial Cmd K101 aux port
262. position of the upper left starting point of the window Serial Cmd lt K516 row pointer column pointer row depth column width gt Default 0 Options 0 to 640 Height Row Depth Definition Defines the size in rows of the window Maximum value is defined as the maximum row size of the image sensor minus the Top value Serial Cmd lt K516 row pointer column pointer row depth column width gt Default 0 Options 3 to 480 row pointer Width Column Width Definition Defines the column position of the upper left starting point of the window Serial Cmd lt K516 row pointer column pointer row depth column width gt Default 0 Options 8 to 640 column pointer 10 12 MS 4 Imager User Manual Camera and IP Setup Configuration Database The Configuration Database allows the user to manage multiple configuration profiles It is a useful tool in applications that require several different complex Imager configurations to be applied sequentially and it allows the user to perform far more complex operations than would be possible with only one set of configuration parameters See Chapter 11 Configuration Database for full documentation of this feature Video Evaluation Calibration WO Configuration Database Dynamic Setup Active Indexes 5 v Capture Settings lt lt WOl ROI gt gt Processing Settings EIE OE E N and Disab umm emm BEET EE EIE DTE o e40 ap m ea NEM DESEE Tes 8 so fo pia
263. pplication record padding Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled MS 4 Imager User Manual 6 11 Code 128 EAN 128 Application Record Separator Character Code 128 EAN 128 Definition This is an ASCII character that serves as an EAN separator in formatted EAN output Serial Cmd KA74 status fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length EAN 128 status output format application record separator status application record separator character application record brackets application record padding Default Options Any ASCII character 7 bit Important The ASCII characters lt gt and can only be entered as hex pairs For lt K474h 3C gt For gt lt K474h 3E gt For lt K474h 2C gt See ASCII Character Entry Modifier on page 3 32 for a detailed explanation of how to enter ASCII characters as hex values Application Record Brackets Code 128 EAN 128 Definition If an EAN conforming symbol is decoded and EAN formatting applies this feature places bracket characters around the application identifiers in the formatted output Serial Cmd lt K474 status fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length EAN 128 status output format application record separator status application record separator character application record brackets application record padding Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Application Record Padding Code 128 EAN
264. presence of guard bars also called bearer bars is required for decoding to take place Usage Definition Serial Cmd Default Options Useful when 1 2 5 multisymbols are enabled to prevent false data output This typically occurs with highly tilted or skewed symbols A guard bar is a heavy bar at least twice the width of the wide bar surrounding the printed 2 5 symbol and helping to prevent false reads K472 status check digit status check digit output symbol length tt1 symbol length 2 guard bar status range mode status Disabled 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Range Mode Status Interleaved 2 of 5 Usage Definition Serial Cmd Default Options 6 16 Useful in applications where 2 5 symbols of a specific length are required When Range Mode is disabled the Imager checks the value of the symbol length against the values set in Symbol Length 1 and Symbol Length 2 If the symbol length does not match either of the preset values then it is rejected as invalid When Range Mode is enabled Symbol Length 1 and Symbol Length 2 are combined to form a range of valid symbol lengths Any symbol length that does not fall into this range is rejected as an invalid symbol Either of the preset symbol length values in the Symbol Length 1 and Symbol Length 2 fields can form the start or end of the range lt K472 status check digit status check digit output symbol length t1 symbol length 2 guard b
265. presenting the second character A check digit is highly recommended Important You must set Symbol Length in order to decode l 2 5 symbols unless Range Mode is enabled Serial Cmd lt K472 status check digit status check digit output status symbol length 1 symbol length 2 guard bar status range mode status Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Check Digit Status Interleaved 2 of 5 Usage This option is not typically used but it can be enabled for additional security in applications where the host requires redundant check digit verification Definition An error correcting routine in which the check digit character is added Serial Cmd lt K472 status check digit status check digit output status symbol length 1 symbol length 2 guard bar status range mode status Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Check Digit Output Status Interleaved 2 of 5 Definition When enabled a check digit character is sent along with the symbol data for added data security Serial Cmd lt K472 status check digit status check digit output status symbol length 1 symbol length 2 guard bar status range mode status Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 6 14 MS 4 Imager User Manual Symbologies Symbol Length 1 Interleaved 2 of 5 Usage Useful in applications where 2 5 symbols of a specific length are required Definition The Symbol Length 1 field is one of two fields against
266. ptions About This Manual This manual provides complete information on setting up installing and configuring the Imager The chapters are presented in the order in which an Imager might be set up and made ready for operation Highlighting Commands are highlighted in rust bold Cross references and web links are highlighted in blue bold References to ESP its toolbar headings Communications Read Cycle Symbologies etc menu topics and other points of emphasis are highlighted in Bold Initial Caps References to topic headings within this manual or other documents are enclosed in quotation marks Host Communications There are four ways to configure and test the MS 4 1 EZ button 2 Microscan s Windows based ESP Easy Setup Program which offers point and click ease of use and visual responses to user adjustments 3 Serial commands such as lt K100 1 gt that can be sent from ESP s Terminal window or another terminal program 4 The tree control menus and graphic interfaces in ESP s App Mode viii MS 4 Imager User Manual Introduction Warning and Caution Summary WARNING LED LIGHT DO NOT VIEW DIRECTLY WITH OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS CLASS 1 LED PRODUCT LED Output 564 mW Wavelength 470 nm 525 nm 617 nm IEC 60825 1 1993 A1 1997 A2 2001 Viewing the MS 4 s LED output with optical instruments such as magnifiers eye loupes or microscopes within a distance of 100 mm could cause serious eye injury
267. puter s hard drive Show Model Prompt At startup shows the model menu displaying all supported readers Skip EZ Mode At startup skips EZ Mode and opens directly in App Mode Show Connect Prompt At startup displays the Would you like to connect prompt Receive After Connect At startup loads the Imager s settings into ESP This is not recommended if you want to preserve your ESP settings for future use Enable Send and Save as Customer Defaults At startup enables the Send and Save as Customer Defaults option in the Send Recv command 2 6 MS 4 Imager User Manual Using ESP Terminal Tab ESP Preferences General Terminal Bar Code Options Grade Report Options Advanced Iv Show Non Printable Characters IC Default Format Fast acne Enhanced Format Slower Iv Enable Echo Change Keyboard Macros Background Color Blue x Display incoming data even when not in focus Default Settings When Show Non Printable Characters is checked characters such as CRLF will be displayed in the Terminal window When Enhanced Format is checked the characters are displayed with more detailed formatting Change Keyboard Macros In this dialog you can first select the function key and then enter your macro keystrokes in the associated key map For example to make Ctrl F5 the keystroke to enable send a trigger character select F5 and then in the Ctrl row enter trigger character and click OK Then
268. r Image Processing IP Transformation of an input image into an output image with desired properties Image Resolution The number of rows and columns of pixels in an image A higher resolution means that more pixels are available per element of the symbol being read Examples 640 x 480 VGA 1024 x 768 XGA 1280 x 1024 SXGA 1600 x 1200 UXGA or 2048 x 1536 QXGA Image Sensor A device that converts a visual image to an electrical signal a CCD or CMOS array Initialize Implement serial configuration commands into the imager s active memory Input A channel or communications line Decoded data or a discrete signal that is received by a device Integration Exposure of pixels on a CMOS sensor IP See Image Processing Ladder Orientation A linear symbol orientation in which the bars are parallel to the symbol s direction of travel LED See Light Emitting Diode Light Emitting Diode LED A semiconductor device that emits light when conducting current Lens A transparent piece of material with curved surfaces which either converge or diverge light rays Machine Vision The automatic acquisition and analysis of images to obtain desired data for controlling a specific activity Multidrop A communications protocol for networking two or more imagers or other devices with a concentrator or controller and characterized by the use of individual device addresses and the RS 48
269. r the information is provided without any representation of warranty expressed or implied regarding accuracy or correctness Microscan does not specifically run any analysis on our raw materials or end product to measure for these substances The information provided in this certification notice is correct to the best of Microscan s knowledge at the date of publication This notice is not to be considered a warranty or quality specification Users are responsible for determining the applicability of any RoHS legislation or regulations based on their individual use of the product In regards to RoHS Directive 2011 65 EU Microscan produces Monitoring and Control Instruments as well as Industrial Monitoring amp Control Instruments as defined within the directive Microscan has developed and is implementing a RoHS2 compliance plan with the intention of bringing all active products listed in our current marketing literature within full compliance as per the directive deadlines Key milestones for the transition plan are as follows Complete internal product audit by July 2014 Initial Monitoring and Control Instruments RoHS2 compliant products available by December 2014 Initial Industrial Monitoring amp Control Instruments RoHS2 compliant products available by July 2015 All new products introduced in 2015 are expected to be WEEE amp RoHS2 compliant Microscan will mark the products with the CE marking that complies with the
270. r 1 HOST TX lt K141 0 gt IMAGER_TX ACK Transfer 2 HOST_TX K141 IMAGER TX ACK IMAGER_TX lt K141 0 gt HOST_TX ACK Error Condition Transfer 1 IMAGER_TX symbol data HOST_TX NAK host rejects IMAGER TX symbol data resend data HOST TX ACK transaction complete Transfer 2 HOST TX lt K141 gt IMAGER_TX ACK IMAGER_TX lt K141 0 gt timeout reached timeout reached timeout reached Timeout Reached transaction aborted data is flushed MS 4 Imager User Manual Appendices A 13 Communications Protocol Setup 2 RES 0x00 disabled REQ 0x00 disabled STX 0x00 disabled ETX 0x00 disabled ACK 0x06 NAK 0x15 LRC enabled Transfer 1 HOST TX lt K141 0 gt a IMAGER_TX ACK Transfer 2 HOST_TX lt K141 gt B IMAGER_TX ACK IMAGER_TX lt K141 0 gt a HOST_TX ACK Error Condition Transfer 1 HOST_TX lt k141 0 gt x BAD LRC IMAGER_TX NAK HOST_TX lt K141 0 gt a GOOD LRC IMAGER_TX ACK A 14 MS 4 Imager User Manual Setup 3 RES 0x00 disabled REQ 0x00 disabled STX 0x28 ETX 0x29 y ACK 0x06 NAK 0x15 LRC enabled Transfer 1 HOST TX lt K141 0 gt H IMAGER_TX ACK Transfer 2 HOST_TX lt K1412 gt k IMAGER_TX ACK IMAGER_TX lt K141 4M gt w HOST_TX ACK MS 4 Imager User Manual Appendices A 15 Communications Protocol Setup 4 RES 0x21 REQ Ox3D STX 0x28 ETX 0x29
271. r Symbol or Output 1 status Output 2 Pulse Sending lt L2 gt activates the link between Output 2 and Output 2 of the host connector regardless of Master Symbol or Output 2 status Output 3 Pulse Sending lt L3 gt activates the link between Output 3 and Output 3 of the host connector regardless of Master Symbol or Output 3 status Disable Imager Sending I will turn the Imager OFF end the current read cycle and will not allow the Imager to enter another read cycle until turned ON This feature is useful during extended periods of time when no symbols are being decoded or the Imager is being configured Disabling the Imager will not affect any commands that have already been downloaded Enable Imager Sending lt H gt will turn the Imager ON and allow it to enter read cycles Enable PDF Information Sending a1 will cause PDF417 data to be prefaced with information consisting of error correction level ECC level n number of rows n rows number of columns n columns number of informative code words n info code words and the number of data characters n data bits Send a1 again to disable PDF Information MS 4 Imager User Manual 13 7 Master Database Master Database Important The Master Database is used for all Matchcode modes except Sequential and Wild Card both of which use Master Database Index 1 Master Database Overview Usage Definition oR WN 13 8 Used
272. r details MS 4 Imager User Manual Master Symbol Database Size Definition Number of Master Symbols allows you to select 1 to 10 master symbols for the master symbol database Serial Cmd lt K231 master symbol database size Note You must follow this command with a save command lt A gt or lt Z gt Default 1 Options 1 to 10 Utilities BE Master Symbol Database Size v Matchcode Type Read Symbol into Selected Index Receive Reader s Database Send Database to Reader Set Master Symbol Database Size here Caution Since the total number of characters available for the master symbol database is 3000 changes to the Master Symbol Database Size will re allocate the number of characters available for each master symbol and could cause existing master symbols to be deleted except master symbol 1 unless it also exceeds the size limitation The table below specifies the maximum number of characters available to each symbol according the number of master symbols defined from 1 to 10 Master Symbol Maximum Master Symbol Maximum Number Characters Number Characters 1 3000 6 500 2 1500 7 428 3 1000 8 375 4 750 9 333 5 600 10 300 MS 4 Imager User Manual 13 9 Master Database Enter Master Symbol Data Usage Serial Cmd Options ESP 13 10 Allows you to enter master symbol data for any enabled master symbol index number 1 to
273. r of secondary readers in the daisy chain can affect timing and may need to be included in your calculations for complete accuracy MS 4 Imager User Manual 3 15 Auxiliary Port Connections Command Processing Mode Usage Definition Serial Cmd Options 3 16 Allows a user to send configuration settings from the host port to the auxiliary port When enabled Command Processing Mode allows commands to be entered via the auxiliary port and direct externally triggered read cycle data in one of two ways Bar code data including the serial trigger if used will be transmitted to the last port from which a command was sent If the last command came from the host port then externally triggered read cycle data will only be output to the host port K101 aux port mode baud rate parity stop bits data bits daisy chain i d status daisy chain i d 5 Command Processing MS 4 Imager User Manual Communications Daisy Chain ID Status Usage Used in a daisy chain setup in cases where the host needs to know which reader in the chain sent the data Definition Each reader in a daisy chain can be assigned a one or two character ID that will appear in front of decoded data and identify its source Serial Cmd lt K101 aux port mode baud rate parity stop bits data bits daisy chain i d status daisy chain i d gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Note Enable disable and length must be the same in
274. r separate data fields with a user defined character Definition Any valid ASCII character inserted between each symbol read when Multisymbol is set to any number greater than 1 Serial Cmd lt K222 number of symbols multisymbol separator Default comma Options Any available ASCII character Note The ASCII characters lt gt and can only be entered as hex pairs For lt K222h 3C gt For gt lt K222h 3E gt For lt K222h 2C gt See ASCII Character Entry Modifier on page 3 32 for a more detailed explanation of how to enter ASCII characters as hex values Note If No Read messages are disabled and there are No Reads occurring separators will only be inserted between symbol data outputs MS 4 Imager User Manual 5 5 Trigger Mode and Duration Trigger Mode and Duration Trigger Definition The event that initiates the read cycle Note When calibrating the Imager or testing read rate the current trigger setting will be disregarded Trigger Mode Serial Cmd lt K200 trigger mode trigger filter duration Default Continuous Read Options 0 Continuous Read 1 Continuous Read 1 Output 2 External Level 3 External Edge 4 Serial Data 5 Serial Data and External Edge Continuous Read Usage Continuous Read is useful in testing symbol readability or reader functions It is not recommended for normal operations Definition In Continuous Read trigger input options are disabled the Imager is a
275. r to other readers that can display or transfer data Definition These commands set the communication parameters with the auxiliary port which can be used to configure menus send data to the host display data transmissions originating from the host and relay data from other Imagers set in tandem daisy chained Auxiliary Port Mode Usage Can be used to transfer data faster or to match an auxiliary device Definition Determines the flow of data between the auxiliary port device s the Imager and the host Serial Cmd lt K101 aux port mode baud rate parity stop bits data bits daisy chain i d status daisy chain i d Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Transparent 2 Half duplex 3 Full duplex 4 Daisy chain 5 Command Processing Baud Rate Auxiliary Port Usage Can be used to transfer data faster or to match an auxiliary device Definition The rate at which the Imager and host transfer data back and forth Serial Cmd lt K101 aux port mode baud rate parity stop bits data bits daisy chain i d status daisy chain i d Default 115 2K Options 0 600 1 1200 2 2400 3 4800 4 9600 5 19 2K 6 38 4K 7 57 6K 8 115 2K 9 230K Parity Auxiliary Port Usage Only changed if necessary to match host setting Definition An error detection routine in which one data bit in each character is set to 1 or 0 so that the total number of 1 bits in the data field is even or odd Serial Cmd lt K101
276. racter followed by a 3 digit numeric character data fields and an initializing command as follows Knumeric parameter data data etc gt lt initializing command An initializing command lt A gt or lt Z gt may follow the command A Z initializes the Imager s memory and saves for power on an lt A gt initializes the Imager s memory but does not save for power on For example to enable UPC and save the change for power on send lt K473 1 gt lt Z gt To change Baud Rate and reset without saving changes for power on send lt K100 3 gt lt A gt Serial Configuration Command Conventions All data fields except the last must be followed by a comma without a space NUL cannot be used The characters lt gt and can be used but only if entered as hex pairs see ASCII Character Entry Modifier on page 3 32 All fields preceding a modified field must be included If there is no change in preceding fields then commas alone can be entered in these fields For example if only the last field in the following command is changing lt K100 4 7 0 0 gt can be entered as lt K100 0 gt All fields following a modified field can be omitted For example to change Baud Rate only send lt K100 3 gt Concatenating Configuration Commands Commands can be concatenated added together in a single string or data block For example K145 7 gt lt K220 1 gt lt K450 1 gt lt A gt enables LRC sets End of Read Cycle mode
277. rate button starts the calibration routine To initiate calibration by serial command enter the serial command lt CAL gt from a terminal such as ESP s Terminal interface lt CAL gt is a calibration routine that emphasizes contrast and readability File Model Options Connect View Terminal Help Ez Mode Autoconnect Switch Model Configuration Camera Terminal Utilities Output Format 2 amp H Find gt Send lt car gt q M Next Row Read Rate decode sec Read Rate percent EndReadRate Locator Pattern On Locator Pattern Off For Help press F1 COMENSE Point to Point 7 See Calibrate by EZ Button on page 1 10 for the EZ button calibration procedure 4 12 MS 4 Imager User Manual Calibration Calibration Progress Indicators During the calibration process the Imager has a number of ways to communicate its progress to the user The following three types of feedback are the primary ways that the Imager communicates calibration progress Read Rate LEDs When calibration is initiated through a serial command or the EZ button the Imager s read rate LEDs indicate calibration progress as follows LEDs 20 Calibration Progress Search Pass in progress 20 40 60 Medium Pass in progress 20 40 60 80 Fine Tune Pass in progress 20 40 60 80 100 Calibrated Successfully holds for green flash duration Beeper Green F
278. ration on gain and symbol type The default shutter speed setting is disabled because not all applications require shutter speed and when it is required the application specific settings tend to vary widely Note Background Color page 6 35 is part of the calibration process regardless of the calibration setup After successful completion of the calibration routine the background color will be set to the appropriate value depending on the symbol in the field of view The Mirrored Image parameter page 10 28 is not part of the calibration process and it must be configured appropriately prior to calibration Gain Definition When enabled gain will be calibrated to provide the best available image quality and performance When disabled gain is fixed and is not part of the calibration process Serial Cmd K529 gain shutter speed symbol type WO framing WO margin line scan height processing gt Default Enabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled MS 4 Imager User Manual 4 3 Calibration Options Shutter Speed Definition Unless an application is a static setup the shutter speed setting should be configured by the user based on the application For dynamic applications the user should configure the shutter speed setting so the calibration process can optimize the gain for that setting Serial Cmd K529 gain shutter speed symbol type WOI framing WO margin line scan height processing gt Default Disabled Options
279. read out In other words the bottom of the symbol is read out first and as the symbol moves information is lost the symbol enters pixel rows that have already been processed This causes the symbol to appear to shrink vertically Note If the symbol were to enter the field of view from the bottom the captured image would be stretched along the y axis 16 sec 10 sec Direction of symbol movement Sy dst aig A cur SENI de ES Full e Width a The amount of rolling shutter distortion depends upon the amount of time it takes to read out an image row and the line speed at which the target object is traveling Therefore one way to reduce skew is to speed up the read out time per pixel row This can be accomplished by reducing the column size of the image sensor For example if the column size is reduced from 640 to 320 the time it takes to read out a row of pixels from the sensor is reduced by half and image skew will be reduced by a factor of 2 As the column dimension of the image is reduced the effect of rolling shutter distortion is reduced by the same factor Important Reducing the row size of the image has no effect because it does not change the row read out time Skew will remain the same regardless of row size MS 4 Imager User Manual 10 29 Skew Correction Line Speed Definition This feature is used to specify the line speed of the application and it determines how much dis
280. ready to be decoded When enabled the locate time is appended to the symbol data Serial Cmd lt K710 percent cell damage total read time capture time locate time decode time pixels per element EC level matrix size quiet zone symbol angle gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled MS 4 Imager User Manual 8 13 Microscan Symbol Quality Output Decode Time Definition The time in milliseconds required to decode a symbol When enabled the decode time is appended to the symbol data Serial Cmd lt K710 percent cell damage total read time capture time locate time decode time pixels per element EC level matrix size quiet zone symbol angle Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Pixels Per Element Data Matrix Only Definition The number of pixels for each element either dark or light for both x and y directions When enabled the pixels per element value is appended to the symbol data Serial Cmd lt K710 percent cell damage total read time capture time locate time decode time pixels per element EC level matrix size quiet zone symbol angle Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Error Correction Level Data Matrix Only Definition Outputs the Data Matrix ECC level When enabled the ECC level is appended to the symbol data Serial Cmd lt K710 percent cell damage total read time capture time locate time decode time pixels per element EC level matrix size quiet
281. reer erent ve tr Modulo DI RU M C 12 5 Terminal Window MeNnu ccccccccssseseeseececeececeeceaaeeaseeesceceeceseeaeaaaeaseceseeeeseeeeaueesseeeseeeseeneeans 12 6 This section describes the Terminal window and macro functions in ESP MS 4 Imager User Manual 12 1 Terminal Window Terminal Wi ndow To use ESP s Terminal click on the Terminal button amp Terminal You will see this window Clear ron screen paste save Type text here to find matching text in the Terminal Terminal Screen window ESP ESP Untitled File Model Options Connect View Terminal Help Type serial commands here Dok 2 Z Mode he onnect Switch Model Ex ax Configuration u Camera Terminal Utilities DATA Output Forma Hm EA Ll Find v Send Next Row Read Rate decode sec ReadRate percent EndReadRate XPattern On XPattern Off Counter Request Macros listed on this bar Click on Macros arrow to Add Macro Remove Macro or Edit Macro v Click on desired Macro to run The Terminal screen allows you to send serial commands to the Imager by using Macros by copying and pasting or by typing commands in the Send text field The Terminal screen also displays symbol data or information from the Ima
282. reshold value to each and every symbol A cycle fixed routine loops through a pre defined range of values Cycle Min to Cycle Max by pre defined increments Cycle Step Serial Cmd lt K512 threshold mode threshold value cycle min cycle max cycle step Default Adaptive Options 0 Adaptive 1 Fixed 2 Cycle Fixed Threshold Value Usage A higher value will increase the threshold for distinguishing between light and dark elements Definition Determines how the Imager will distinguish light pixels from dark pixels This value is used for Fixed Mode only When Adaptive Mode is set this value is ignored Serial Cmd lt K512 threshold mode threshold value cycle min cycle max cycle step Default 128 Options 0 to 255 Cycle Min Definition Starting value of the cycle mode Serial Cmd lt K512 threshold mode threshold value cycle min cycle max cycle step Default 0 Options 0 to 255 Important Cycle Min must be a smaller numerical value than Cycle Max 10 20 MS 4 Imager User Manual Camera and IP Setup Cycle Max Definition Ending value of the cycle mode Serial Cmd lt K512 threshold mode threshold value cycle min cycle max cycle step Default 255 Options 0 to 255 Important Cycle Max must be a greater numerical value than Cycle Min Cycle Step Definition The numerical value of a single cycle mode increment Serial Cmd lt K512 threshold mode threshold value cycle min cycle max cycle step gt
283. rface and your connection attempt fails click the Autoconnect button select a different communications port and try again Note If your RS 232 host settings cannot be changed to match the Imager s settings check the Force Connect box MS 4 Imager User Manual 1 7 Locate the Symbol in the FOV Step 7 Locate the Symbol in the FOV Move the symbol or the Imager so thatthe blue target pattern is centered over the symbol At 2 to 3 inches the pattern resembles an X At 3 to 6 inches the pattern resembles a V It is important for the whole symbol to fall within the field of view FOV of the Imager The field of view is what appears in ESP s Locate Calibrate window Center on object in field of view Target pattern shown as it would appear between 3 and 6 inches Locate by EZ Button If you are not connected to a host computer the EZ button will allow you to locate a symbol in the Imager s FOV Hold down the EZ button for about one second and release when you hear one short beep The amber 20 LED will turn on and you will see theblue target pattern projected from the front of the Imager Center the target pattern on the symbol Note To end all EZ button functions press the EZ button once and quickly release 1 8 MS 4 Imager User Manual Quick Start Locate by ESP In ESP s EZ Mode click the Locate button to enable the target pattern E ESP Untitled File Model Options
284. rical Specifications Power 3 Watts max USB 2 5 Watts max 5 VDC 5 200 mV p p max ripple 394mA 5 VDC typ USB 300mA 5VDC Optional I O Optoisolated with IC 332 accessory Host Connector Pin Assignments High Density 15 Pin D sub Socket Connector Pin Host RS 232 Host Aux RS 232 Host RS 422 485 In Out 1 Power 5 VDC In 2 TxD TxD TxD Out 3 RxD RxD RxD In 4 Power Signal Ground 5 NC 6 RTS Aux TxD TxD Out 7 Output 1 TTL a Out 8 Default configuration b In 9 Trigger In 10 CTS Aux RxD RxD In 11 Output 3 TTL a Out 12 New Master NPN In 13 Chassis ground c 14 Output 2 TTL a Out 15 NC a Can sink 10 mA and source 10 mA b The default is activated by connecting pin 8 to ground pin 4 c Chassis ground Used to connect chassis body to earthground only Not to be used as power or signal return MS 4 Imager User Manual A 5 Serial Configuration Commands Appendix C Serial Configuration Commands Host Port Connections lt K100 baud rate parity stop bits data bits gt Auxiliary Port Connections lt K101 aux port mode baud rate parity stop bits data bits daisy chain ID status daisy chain ID gt RS 422 Status lt K102 status gt Host Port Protocol lt K140 protocol address gt Preamble lt K141 status preamble characters Postamble K142 status postamble characters Response Time
285. rom one axis to another namely AN abs XAVG YANG XAVG YAVG 2 where abs yields the absolute value If a symbology has more than two major axes then AN is computed for those two average spacings which differ the most ANSI axial non uniformity grading is defined this way A 4 0 if AN lt 06 B 2 0 if AN lt 08 C 2 0 if AN lt 10 D 1 0 if AN lt 12 F 0 0 if AN gt 12 If enabled the axial non uniformity is appended to the symbol data according the ISO IEC 16022 Symbol Quality Output Mode setting Serial Cmd K709 symbol contrast print growth axial non uniformity UEC Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Unused Error Correction Data Matrix Only Definition The correction capacity of Reed Solomon decoding is expressed in the equation e 2d lt d p where e is the number of erasures d is the number of error correction code words and p is the number of code words reserved for error detection A 4 0 if UEC gt 62 B 3 0 if UEC 50 C 2 0 if UEC gt 37 D 1 0 if UEC gt 25 F 0 0 if UEC lt 25 If enabled the UEC is appended to the symbol data according to the ISO IEC 16022 Symbol Quality Output Mode setting Serial Cmd K709 symbol contrast print growth axial non uniformity VEC gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled MS 4 Imager User Manual 8 11 ISO IEC 16022 Symbol Quality Output by ESP ISO IEC 16022 Symbol Quality Output by ESP
286. ry Modifier on page 3 32 for a detailed explanation of how to enter ASCII characters as hex values 5 12 MS 4 Imager User Manual Read Cycle Start Trigger Character Non Delimited Usage Definition Serial Cmd Default Options Useful in applications where different characters are required to start a read cycle A single ASCII host serial trigger character that starts the read cycle and is not enclosed by delimiters such as lt and gt Non delimited Start characters can be defined and will function according to the trigger event When defining Start trigger characters the following rules apply n External Edge the Imager looks only for the Start trigger character and ignores any Stop trigger character that may be defined n External Level the Start trigger character begins the read cycle and the Stop trigger character ends it Note that even after a symbol has been decoded and the symbol data transmitted the Imager remains in External Level trigger read cycle until a Stop character is received n Serial Data or External Edge trigger mode either a Start trigger character or a hardware trigger can start an edge trigger read cycle lt K229 start character NUL 00 in hex disabled Two hex digits representing any ASCII character Note See ASCII Character Entry Modifier on page 3 32 for hex entry instructions Stop Trigger Character Non Delimited Usage Definition Serial Cmd Default
287. s height by the horizontal number of pixels width leaving it in fractional format Automatic Gain Control AGC Adjustment to signal strength that seeks to maintain a constant level regardless of the distance between a reader and symbol Auxiliary Port RS 232 connection to an auxiliary terminal or device for remote viewing Blooming A situation in which too many photons are being produced to be received by a pixel The pixel overflows and causes the photons to go to adjacent pixels Blooming is similar to overexposure in film photography except that in digital imaging the result is a number of vertical and or horizontal streaks appearing from the light source in the picture Baud Rate The number of discrete signal events per second bits per second Capture The act of acquiring and storing video images in an imager or host computer Also the image captured CCD See Charge Coupled Device A 28 MS 4 Imager User Manual Appendices Charge Coupled Device CCD A semiconductor device with an array of light sensitive elements that converts light images into electrical signals Check Character A Modulus 43 or Modulus 10 character that is added to encoded symbol data for additional data integrity CMOS See Complementary Metal Oxide Semiconductor Complementary Metal Oxide Semiconductor CMOS Like CCDs CMOS imagers include an array of photo sensitive diodes one diode within each pixel Unlike CCDs ho
288. se 2 10 2X M3X0 5 63 3 mm 5 mm depth 51 12 9 mm 26 6 6 mm Ec 1 25 31 8 mm Note Nominal dimensions shown Typical tolerances apply MS 4 Imager Dimensions Type 3 ft cable terminated with High Density 15 pin D Sub socket or USB type A connector Indicators LEDS Read Performance Power Read Status Green Flash Good read Blue Target Pattern Symbol locator Beeper Good read match mismatch No Read serial command confirmation on off Discrete I O Trigger Input 5 to 28V rated 0 16 mA 5VDC New Master 5 to 28V rated 0 16 mA 5VDC Default 3 3V rated OmA at 3 3V Outputs 1 2 3 5V TTL compatible can sink 10 mA and source 10mA Optional I O Optoisolated with IC 332 accessory Communication Protocols Standard Interface RS 232 RS 422 or USB Symbology Types 2D Symbologies Data Matrix ECC 0 200 QR Code Stacked Symbologies PDF417 MicroPDF417 GS1 DataBar Composite amp Stacked Linear Symbologies Code 39 Code 128 BC412 Interleaved 2 of 5 UPC EAN Codabar Code 93 Read Parameters Pitch 30 Skew 30 Tilt 360 Decode Rate Up to 10 decodes per second A 2 MS 4 Imager User Manual Read Ranges Standard Density Standard Density 20 mil 2D 15 mil 1D 15 mil 2D 10 mil 1D ia 10 mil 2D 7 5 mil 1D 76 mm in mm inches mm 67 152 54127 PA g E 841102 a 37 76 2451 17 25 51 25 25 0 3 2 1
289. seeeeeeeeeeen nennen nnne 8 16 This section describes parameters that when enabled will output detailed symbol quality evaluations MS 4 Imager User Manual 8 1 Symbol Quality Serial Commands Symbol Quality Serial Commands Symbol Quality Separator Data lt K708 symbol quality separator Data Matrix output mode Matrix Output Mode ISO IEC 16022 Symbol Quality KK709 symbol contrast print growth axial non uniformity Output UEC gt Microscan Symbol Quality Output lt K710 percent cell damage total read time capture time locate time decode time pixels per element ECC level matrix size quiet zone symbol angle gt Static Validation Report lt VAL gt MS 4 Imager User Manual Symbol Quality Overview of Symbol Quality Information about symbol quality and timing can be appended to symbol data by enabling specific evaluation parameters The order in which these values are appended corresponds directly to the order in which they appear in ESP s Symbol Quality tree control Symbol Quality parameters are separated into ISO IEC 16022 Symbol Quality Output and Microscan Symbol Quality Output Total Read Time Symbol Quality Separator and Output Mode are common to both ISO IEC 16022 and Microscan Grading Parameters Sg Symbol Quality Global Total Read Time Enabled lt g Symbol Quality Separator SP Output Mode Grade Data Matrix ISO IEC 16022
290. ser Manual I O Parameters Trend Analysis Mode Definition Sets the trend condition Mismatch No Read or Decodes Trigger that will activate the output Trend Analysis IT PE eels Noread m Number of Triggers Number to Output On REET Decodes per Trigger Decodes per Trigger Bad Symbol No Symbol Serial Cmd lt K780 trend analysis mode trigger evaluation period number to output on decodes trigger threshold Default No Read Options 0 Mismatch 1 No Read 2 Decodes Trigger 3 Bad Symbol 4 No Symbol Mismatch Output will be activated when the number of mismatches equals the value entered for Number to Output On within the trigger window selected in Number of Triggers No Read Output will be activated when the number of No Reads equals the value entered for Number to Output On within the trigger window selected in Number of Triggers Decodes Trigger Output will be activated when the number of decodes equals the value entered for Number to Output On within the trigger window selected in Number of Triggers Bad Symbol Output will be activated when the number of Bad Symbol occurrences equals the value entered for Number to Output On within the trigger window selected in Number of Triggers No Symbol Output will be activated when the number of No Symbol occurrences equals the value entered for Number to Output On within the trigger window selected in Number of Triggers MS 4 Imager User Manu
291. sin c 7 23 rci MEM ede na neat Gee ee A a a oe ee a 7 25 EZ Button Modes rte eod Ida scence sand sted hale cue e eere bre Le Sete teed ne eode i eee dence 7 27 Configurable Output 1 12 ence tel eine eee tee erede re Love Hee oer ec ence cie ette e Aou enit en 7 29 Trend Analysis Output 1 1 colit eee eterne rri e ee ene Exelente oed Ene Ene ings 7 32 ISO IEC 16022 Symbol Quality Output 1 ssssssssseeeeeeennenennen nennen 7 35 Diagnostic Output 1 entender diee dne sees ies ecce e rene caede Pon ep xn e dene dece 7 38 Configurable Output 2 1 5 1 ierant tee dence tae cv rie Hee ed ec epe e deed Aon Enn 7 39 Trend Analysis Output 2 e cepe ende niente o Eee codd Desi seoctoveedsesspeneyei want 7 39 ISO IEC 16022 Symbol Quality Output 2 sess 7 39 Diagnostic Output 2 1 eite ret Mel dete ire ede oe eed Pet Pace hi deu ON i pde dave use osi eaea 7 39 Configurable Output 3 2 29 2 tpe Ite DRE IH ie ees Hee ec Lon a Deed ea ed oed aN aiaia 7 40 Trend Analysis OutpUt 3 o eteiecie ec Reader ostia Meee ore co edo Mens agree Hess POP Eta ten 7 40 ISO IEC 16022 Symbol Quality Output 3 sese eene 7 40 Diagnostic QUIpUt 3 iio toes riod es aede coe oneris ecete hey eles hearted ec ead cae sede d desc oats ends 7 40 Power On Reset Counts 2 2 2 2 9 n eei caged eben ie ope Ere Ie GER ed epa ine edo iee diriana 7 41 Dulce 7 42 Service Message oen Poe p
292. t For lt K473h 2C gt See ASCII Character Entry Modifier on page 3 32 for a detailed explanation of how to enter ASCII characters as hex values Note Whenever Separator Character is defined as a comma sending a lt K473 s gt command will return the current settings including the separator character comma which appears after the separator status comma Supplemental Type UPC EAN Usage As required by symbology used in application Definition Allows the user to select 2 character or 5 character supplements or both Serial Cmd lt K473 UPC status EAN status supplementals status separator status separator character supplemental type format UPC E as UPC A Default Both Options 0 Both 1 2 characters only 2 5 characters only Both Either 2 character or 5 character supplementals will be considered valid 2 Characters Only Only two character supplementals will be considered valid 5 Characters Only Only five character supplementals will be considered valid MS 4 Imager User Manual 6 23 UPC EAN Format UPC E as UPC A UPC EAN Definition When disabled the Imager will output the version E symbols in their encoded 6 character format When enabled the Imager will format the symbol as either a 12 character UPC A symbol or an EAN 13 symbol depending on the state of the EAN status parameter This formatting reverses the zero suppression that is used to generate the symbol in the UPC specification
293. t 20 Options 0 to 48 10 16 MS 4 Imager User Manual Camera and IP Setup MS 4 Low Density SD Optics 4 Focal Distance Shutter Speed Usage Faster shutter speeds reduce blurring in faster applications Slower shutter speeds are useful in slower applications and lower contrast applications Definition This value sets the exposure or integration time for the image sensor pixels The shutter speed setting in relation to the speed of the object is critical Ifa slow shutter speed is selected to capture fast moving objects blurring or smearing of the image will occur As shutter speed is increased more light and gain become necessary because the pixels exposure time has decreased Serial Cmd K544 shutter speed gain gt Default 150 1 150 second Options 15 to 12 500 Gain Usage Can be used to adjust pixel grayscale values for readability Definition Sets the gain value for the image sensor This setting can be configured through autocalibration which is the recommended method A higher gain value will increase the brightness of the image but the visual noise reduction performance of the system is reduced Before configuring gain settings the desired shutter speed should already be set and the gain should be configured to optimize the shutter speed setting Serial Cmd K544 shutter speed gain gt Default 20 Options 0 to 48 MS 4 Imager User Manual 10 17 Focal Distance Focal Distance Definiti
294. t After accepting the license agreement and clicking Next you may see a Windows Security warning that states Windows can t verify the publisher of this driver software If you receive this warning choose the Install this driver software anyway option The driver files will begin installing This may take several seconds Do not interfere with the installer during this process Microscan USB to Serial Driver Installer JN Installing the USB Virtual COM Port Driver for your Microscan Imager Go Once the driver is installed successfully you will receive the message shown below Click Finish Microscan USB to Serial Driver Install MICROSCAN dich Successful USB Virtual co M Po rt oan Mage can now be connected through the vitual COM por Driver Driver Name Status V Microscan Systems Inc Device Updated neh tence MS 4 Imager User Manual Appendices Uninstalling the USB to Serial Virtual COM Port Driver Important You must uninstall the USB to Serial Virtual COM Port Driver any time you require high speed USB connectivity to upload images using EZ Trax for example eis ep ans Pa a Rat e sens P OOE o Uninstall or change a program To uninstall a program select i from the list andthen click Uninstall Change or Repair Find the driver on the list Sumon a of programs select it then click Uninstall Change
295. t need large data capacity Definition A variant of PDF417 a very efficient and compact stacked symbology that can encode up to 250 alphanumeric characters or 366 numeric characters per symbol Serial Cmd K485 status unused fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Fixed Symbol Length Status MicroPDF417 Serial Cmd K485 status unused fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Fixed Symbol Length MicroPDF417 Usage Used to increase data integrity by ensuring that only one symbol length will be accepted Definition When enabled the MicroPDF417 symbol must contain the same number of characters as the symbol length setting before it can be considered a good read The Imager will ignore any symbol not having the specified length Serial Cmd lt K485 status unused fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length gt Default 10 Options 1 to 366 Note Fixed Symbol Length Status must be enabled for Fixed Symbol Length to take effect MS 4 Imager User Manual 6 29 Composite Composite When set to Enabled or Required will attempt to decode the composite component of a linear symbol The linear symbol can be DataBar 14 DataBar Expanded DataBar Limited EAN 128 UPC A EAN 13 EAN 8 and UPC E Usage Allows reading by both linear and 2D readers Definition Combines 2D and linear width mo
296. t on UEC UEC threshold ISO IEC 16022 Symbol Quality Output 2 lt K801 output on symbol contrast symbol contrast threshold output on print growth print growth threshold output on axial non uniformity axial non uniformity threshold output on UEC UEC threshold ISO IEC 16022 Symbol Quality Output 3 lt K802 output on symbol contrast symbol contrast threshold output on print growth print growth threshold output on axial non uniformity axial non uniformity threshold output on UEC UEC threshold Configurable Output 1 K810 output on output state pulse width output mode Configurable Output 2 K811 0utput on output state pulse width output mode Configurable Output 3 K812 output on output state pulse width output mode Symbol Quality Symbol Quality Separator Data Matrix Output Mode ISO IEC 16022 Symbol Quality Output K708 symbol quality separator data matrix output mode K709 symbol contrast print growth axial non uniformity UEC Microscan Symbol Quality Output lt K710 percent cell damage total read time capture time locate time decode time pixels per element ECC level matrix size quiet zone Static Validation Report Matchcode Matchcode Type VAL K223 matchcode type sequential matching match start position match length wild card character sequence on No Read sequence on mismatch Number of Master Symbols K224 number of master symbols
297. t on symbol contrast symbol contrast threshold output on print growth print growth threshold output on axial non uniformity axial non uniformity threshold output on UEC UEC threshold gt Disabled 0 Disabled 1 Enabled MS 4 Imager User Manual 7 35 ISO IEC 16022 Symbol Quality Output 1 Output on Axial Non Uniformity Usage Lets the user know if symbol quality is less than acceptable Definition If enabled toggles Output 1 to an active state when Axial Non Uniformity Threshold is met Serial Cmd lt K800 output on symbol contrast symbol contrast threshold output on print growth print growth threshold output on axial non uniformity axial non uniformity threshold output on UEC UEC threshold Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Output on Unused Error Correction Usage Lets the user know if symbol quality is less than acceptable Definition If enabled toggles Output 1 to an active state when UEC Threshold is met Serial Cmd lt K800 output on symbol contrast symbol contrast threshold output on print growth print growth threshold output on axial non uniformity axial non uniformity threshold output on UEC UEC threshold Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Symbol Contrast Threshold Usage Lets the user set the acceptable level of symbol quality Definition Conforms to ISO IEC 16022 symbol quality grading A B C D Serial Cmd lt K800 output on symbol contrast symbol contrast
298. t or whenever symbol data is sent If sent with symbol data it is processed on a first in first out basis Auxiliary port data to the host is always sent with a preamble and postamble If the Imager is in a polling mode with the host auxiliary port data will still pass through Data Originating from the Imager Transmission to the auxiliary port occurs immediately upon a good read Data sent to the auxiliary port does not include a preamble or a postamble Communications with the auxiliary port is always in Point to Point protocol even if the host is in a polled protocol mode Data Originating from the Host All host data is echoed to the auxiliary port in unpolled mode Host Aux Port NY Imager Host Aux Port Imager Host Aux Port Imager K101 aux port mode baud rate parity stop bits data bits daisy chain i d status daisy chain i d 1 Transparent MS 4 Imager User Manual Communications Half Duplex Mode Usage Useful when the user wants symbol data displayed on an auxiliary menu close to the Imager Definition In Half Duplex Mode all auxiliary port data and symbol data is sent directly to the host Symbol data is displayed on the auxiliary port menu at the same time the data is sent to the host Data Originating from the Auxiliary Port Auxiliary port
299. t pins are located Connecting the wrong pins could cause serious damage to the unit 3 Momentarily connect these wires or pins and listen for a series of short beeps 4 Within 3 seconds connect them again A longer beep should be heard If not repeat the process Default on Power On You can also use the EZ button to default the reader by holding it down while applying power to the reader provided that this feature is enabled MS 4 Imager User Manual 13 19 Imager Status Requests Imager Status Requests lt gt Status Byte The Imager responds to a status request lt gt with a two character hex value such as lt 22 gt To determine status 1 Look up the binary conversion in the table below For example the first hex 2 would be 0 0 1 0 in binary as read from binary digits 3 through 0 the second hex 2 is also 0 0 1 0 as read from binary digits 7 through 4 2 Next enter your binary values from the table below in the Binary column next to the appropriate bit Bit Binary Imager Status 0 0 Command error detected 1 1 Command received 2 0 Communication error detected 3 0 Flash sector unprotect failure 4 0 Host Aux port buffer overflow 5 1 Imager is in a read cycle 3 Under Binary interpret 1s as true and Os as not true For example bit 1 has a 1 in the Binary column indicating Command Received Bit 5 is also a 1 indicating that the Imag
300. t the read rate test and Stop to end it Test Stop Iv Decodes per Second If your symbol has been successfully decoded its data and related features will be presented under Symbol Information Also while the symbol is being decoded the read rate LEDs will indicate the corresponding read rate percentage on the back of the unit 2 To end the test click the Stop button Testing by Serial Command You can also start a test with the lt C gt or Cp command and end it with the lt J gt command MS 4 Imager User Manual 1 11 Configure the Imager in ESP S tep 10 Configure the Imager in ESP To make setup changes to the MS 4 click the App Mode button d App Mode The following modes are accessible by clicking the buttons in the first row of App Mode icons ye cg B amp B BH BH m Ez Mode Autoconnect Send Recy Switch Model Configuration Camera Terminal Utilities Output Format Establish communications between ESP and the Imager by clicking the Autoconnect button Send or receive commands by clicking the Send Recv button Make changes to Camera options by clicking the Camera button Access the Terminal window where you can see symbol data and enter serial commands by clicking the Terminal button Review status settings or make changes to operational commands by clicking the Utilities button Format data for output by clicking the Output Format button Click the Con
301. t without the check digit Serial Cmd lt K481 status check digit output fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Fixed Symbol Length Status BC412 Definition When enabled the Imager will check the symbol length against the symbol length field If disabled any length will be considered valid Serial Cmd lt K481 status check digit output fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Fixed Symbol Length BC412 Definition When enabled the check digit character is read and compared along with the symbol data When disabled symbol data is sent without the check digit Serial Cmd lt K481 status check digit output fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length gt Default 10 Options 1 to 64 MS 4 Imager User Manual 6 13 Interleaved 2 of 5 Interleaved 2 of 5 Usage 2 5 has been popular because it is the most dense symbology for printing numeric characters less than 10 characters in length however Microscan does not recommend this symbology for any new applications because of inherent problems such as truncation Definition A dense contimuous self checking numeric symbology Characters are paired together so that each character has five elements two wide and three narrow representing numbers 0 through 9 with the bars representing the first character and the interleaved spaces re
302. tart stop codes and at least two distinctly different bar widths Serial Cmd lt K471 status start stop match start stop output large intercharacter gap fixed symbol length status symbol length check digit type check digit output gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Start Stop Match Codabar Definition When disabled the Imager will decode Codabar symbols whether or not the start and stop characters are the same When enabled the Imager will not decode Codabar symbols unless the start and stop characters are the same Serial Cmd lt K471 status start stop match start stop output large intercharacter gap fixed symbol length status symbol length check digit type check digit output gt Default Enabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Start Stop Output Codabar Definition When disabled the start and stop characters will not be present in the data output of the decoded symbol When enabled the start and stop characters will be present in the data output of the decoded symbol Note Because the start and stop characters are included as part of the data the characters must be included as part of the length in a fixed length mode of operation Serial Cmd lt K471 status start stop match start stop output large intercharacter gap fixed symbol length status symbol length check digit type check digit output Default Enabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 6 18 MS 4 Imager User Manual
303. tatus Keyboard IN Report status Default 1 Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Microscan HID IN Reports Enabled When this feature is enabled the Imager will send Microscan HID IN Reports to the host containing data originated by the Imager Microscan HID IN Reports Disabled When this feature is disabled the Imager will not send Microscan HID IN Reports to the host containing data originated by the Imager 3 24 MS 4 Imager User Manual Communications Keyboard IN Reports The host operating system will interpret Keyboard IN Reports from the Imager as if the user were typing keyboard text The host operating system sends keystrokes to the current application This is commonly called a Keyboard Wedge configuration There is one type of Keyboard Report used Report Type Data Content Keyboard IN Imager to host Symbol data No Reads Service messages Note If Keyboard IN Reports is enabled and Microscan HID IN Reports is disabled the read cycle must be Continuous Read 1 Output because there will be no External Trigger or Serial Trigger It is not possible to send commands to the Imager as Keyboard OUT Reports To send commands to the Imager via USB the host application must establish a connection with the Imager and send Microscan HID OUT Reports Serial Cmd lt K149 Microscan HID IN Report status Keyboard IN Report status gt Default 0 Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Keyboard IN Reports Enabled When this feature is
304. tch length wild card character sequence on No Read sequence on mismatch Enabled 0 Disabled 1 Enabled As an example of Sequence on No Read Enabled consider the following decodes Master Symbol Decoded Symbol Master Symbol after Decode 001 001 002 002 002 003 003 No Read 004 sequenced on No Read 004 004 005 005 No Read 006 sequenced on No Read 006 No Read 007 sequenced on No Read 007 007 008 As an example of Sequence on No Read Disabled consider the following series of decodes Master Symbol Decoded Symbol Master Symbol after Decode 001 001 002 002 002 003 003 No Read 003 not sequenced 003 003 004 004 No Read 004 not sequenced 004 No Read 004 not sequenced 004 004 005 MS 4 Imager User Manual 9 7 Sequence on Mismatch Note Matchcode must be set to Sequential for this command to function Usage Definition Serial Cmd Default Options Enable this parameter if every trigger event should have a decode and more than one consecutive mismatch may occur Disable this parameter if every trigger event should have a decode but no more than one consecutive mismatch may occur When set to Enabled the master symbol sequences on every decode match or mismatch When set to Disabled the master symbol will not sequence whenever consecutive mismatches occur lt K223 matchcode type sequential matching match start position match length wild card
305. ted depending on what is enabled As with Polling Mode lt K140 5 gt the Imager can optionally perform the REQ and RES event sequences in ACK NAK mode If the sender does not receive an ACK or NAK it will send REQ to request such a response if enabled When the sender receives an ACK too many NAKs or times out if already enabled it will send a RES if enabled to terminate the transaction Note See ACK NAK Data Flow Examples in Appendix D for sample ACK NAK communications scenarios Note See USB HID Interface on page 3 23 for protocol information relating to USB MS 4 Imager User Manual 3 7 Polling Mode Options Polling Mode Options Definition These parameters only take effect for Polling Mode lt K140 5 gt on the main RS 232 or RS 422 ports not on the Auxiliary Port and are completely independent of the ACK NAK Options lt K147 gt The values of protocol characters can be changed but the protocol events cannot be disabled The polling mode address is configured in the lt K140 gt command see Poll Address on page 3 6 To enable multidrop protocol the RS422 port must be enabled lt K102 1 gt in order to turn the transmitter on and off If RS 232 is enabled instead of RS422 lt K102 0 gt then Polling Mode will operate as a Point to Point polling protocol This is because the RS 232 transmitter is always left on when enabled Serial Cmd lt K148 RES REQ STX ETX ACK NAK gt RES NAK Defaults RES Reset 0
306. tes gt LED Configuration lt K737 LED mode ISO IEC 16022 grade Image Output lt K739 image output mode communication port file format jpeg quality gt Target Flood LEDs EZ Trax Output lt K750 green flash LED status target pattern LED status green flash duration gt lt K757 comm port image mode image format jpeg quality object info output grade output gt Database Identifier Output lt K759 status separator gt EZ Button lt K770 global status default on power on load configuration data base save for power on gt EZ Button Modes lt K771 single beep two beeps three beeps four beeps gt Trend Analysis Output 1 lt K780 trend analysis mode trigger evaluation period number to output on Trend Analysis Output 2 KT781 trend analysis mode trigger evaluation period number to output on gt Trend Analysis Output 3 lt K782 trend analysis mode trigger evaluation period number to output on Diagnostic Output 1 lt K790 unused 1 servuce unit gt Diagnostic Output 2 lt K791 unused 1 servuce unit gt Diagnostic Output 3 lt K792 unused 1 servuce unit gt ISO IEC 16022 Symbol Quality Output 1 K800 output on symbol contrast symbol contrast threshold output on print growth print growth threshold output on axial non uniformity axial non uniformity threshold output on UEC UEC threshold gt ISO IEC 16022 Symbol Quality Output 2 lt K801 output
307. th 5 Output Mode Pulse Trend Analysis Symbol Quality ISO IEC 16022 Diagnostics Serial Cmd K811 0utput on output state pulse width output mode Trend Analysis Output 2 Note Output On under Output 2 Parameters must be set to Trend Analysis for this output to function Output 2 Parameters Output On Trend Analysis Serial Cmd lt K781 trend analysis mode trigger evaluation period number to output on ISO IEC 16022 Symbol Quality Output 2 Note Output On under Output 2 Parameters must be set to Symbol Quality for this output to function Output 2 Parameters Output On Symbol Quality Serial Cmd K801 0utput on symbol contrast symbol contrast threshold output on print growth print growth threshold output on axial non uniformity axial non uniformity threshold output on UEC UEC threshold Diagnostic Output 2 Note Output On under Output 2 Parameters must be set to Diagnostic Warning for this output to function Output 2 Parameters Output On Diagnostic Warning Serial Cmd lt K791 unused 1 service unit MS 4 Imager User Manual 7 39 Configurable Output 3 Configurable Output 3 Note Output 3 has the same parameters and default settings as Output 1 and Output 2 Output 3 Parameters Output On Mismatch or Noread Output State Negative Pulse Width 5 Output Mode Pulse Trend Analysis Symbol Quality ISO IEC 16022 Diagnostics Serial Cmd lt K812 output on
308. that is being changed is the postamble character s field See Serial Configuration Command Conventions on page A 10 for a more detailed explanation of this command shortcut 3 32 MS 4 Imager User Manual Communications Preamble Preamble Status Usage Definition Serial Cmd Default Options Useful for identifying and controlling incoming data For example defining the preamble as a carriage return and a line feed causes each decoded message to be displayed on its own line Defines a one to four character data string that can be added to the front of the decoded data lt K141 status preamble character s gt Disabled 0 Disabled 1 Enabled within any protocol Preamble Characters Serial Cmd Default Options lt K141 status preamble character s gt M corresponds to carriage return To enter control characters within a serial command hold down the Ctrl key while typing the desired character Example lt K141 1 CNTL m gt to enter the control character M Important The ASCII characters lt gt and can only be entered as hex pairs For lt K141h 3C For gt K141h 3E For lt K141h 2C gt See ASCII Character Entry Modifier on page 3 32 for a detailed explanation of how to enter ASCII characters as hex values MS 4 Imager User Manual 3 33 Postamble Postamble Postamble Status Usage Definition Serial Cmd Default Options Useful for identifying
309. the MS 4 Imager s USB cable into a host USB port The host will power the Imager 4 i To host Hardware Configuration Hardware Configuration RS 232 RS 422 USB Caution Be sure that all cables are connected BEFORE applying power to a system with an external power source RS 232 RS 422 Always power down BEFORE disconnecting any cables MS 4 Imager User Manual 1 3 Position Imager and Symbol Step 3 Position Imager and Symbol Position the Imager at a distance from the symbol that matches the factory pre set focal distance For example if your MS 4 is pre set at 4 position the Imager s parting line 4 from the symbol Tip the Imager relative to the symbol to avoid the glare of direct Specular reflection The case parting line should be perpendicular to the plane of the symbol by either pitching the symbol or the Imager as shown Position the Imager in a place with as little ambient light as possible Symbols can be rotated tilted at any angle however for best results symbols should be aligned with the FOV field of view Parting Line Stand Ky A Focal distance Imager Position Relative to Symbol In the case of linear symbols aligning the bars in the direction of their movement ladder orientation wil
310. tion regarding these parameters The imager s field of view is shown here When grading is completed the initial report is also shown in this viewing area it For Help press F1 MS 4 Imager User Manual v gt GORREGTEDIN Point to Point Locate Tab The Locate tab allows the user to determine the position of the symbol within the imager s field of view and to optimize the imager s camera settings for symbol quality evaluation EP ESP Untitled DER Fie Model Options Connect View Help EZ Mode Autoconnect Send Recv Switch Model Configuration Camera Terminal Utilities Output Format 4 M NM c Un US Communication RE Symbologies Symbol Quality Matchcode Parameters I Tem Symbol Quality Report Locate Preferences Global i Locate Calibrate Total Read Time Click the Locate e Click the Calibrate dE id Separator button to display the Contrast button to optimize symbol in the camera settings Data Matrix K 3 x ISO IEC 16022 Parameters imager s field of view Grading M Show Tree Control kit v EDNNEEREDENN Point to Point For Help press F1 MS 4 Imager User Manual Symbol Quality Preferences Tab The Preferences tab allows the user to set defaults that are automatically activated when grading is completed For this reason the user is advised to set preferences before performing gr
311. tion Database Status ssseeeee 11 4 Database Mode iet tete tuere bd ee dU ete dee 11 9 Save Current Settings to Configuration Database 11 14 Load Current Settings from Configuration Database 11 15 Request Selected Index Settings sesess 11 16 Request All Configuration Database Settings ssssss 11 17 Chapter 12 Terminal Terminal WindOow eterni te ete entere eter nennt ans 12 2 do Em 12 3 NI eeetghevenee 12 4 Eleg cites 12 5 Terminal Window Menus seeeeee emen 12 6 Chapter 13 Utilities vi Serial Utility Commands emn 13 2 MS 4 Imager User Manual Introduction Read Rate ctetu opo eai 13 4 COUN ES 2 iiie ee dee eie detener ni etd 13 5 Device Corittol reet tegeret eere edd 13 7 Master Database 2 e ete e Red 13 8 FirtmWate mote dee eet edi eed N 13 14 Bar Code Configuration eesseeenee enn 13 17 Default Reset Save ceteris 13 18 Imager Status Requests sssessee emere 13 20 Other Operational Serial Commands see 13 22 Chapter 14 Output Format Output Format Serial Commands see 14 2 Output Format Status redde ied e nepotes estendere 14 3 FOrmat ASSIQN 5 ioa eoa tcd aeos qoa Does pios a
312. tion value Serial Cmd K750 green flash mode target pattern status green flash duration Default 100 1 second Options 0 to 65535 in 10mS increments 7 20 MS 4 Imager User Manual I O Parameters Beeper Usage An audible verification that either a good read or a No Read has occurred Definition A beep is emitted after each good read or No Read Serial Cmd lt K702 beeper status Default Good Read Options 0 Disabled 1 Good Read 2 No Read Note The beeper will also sound at any of the following times When the Imager is defaulted When a send save command is sent from ESP At the conclusion of a calibration procedure When a lt Z gt lt Zp gt lt Zrd gt or lt K701 1 gt command is sent MS 4 Imager User Manual 7 21 LED Configuration LED Configuration Usage Useful as a visible verification of read rates and symbol quality Definition Determines the mode in which the status LEDs operate Serial Cmd lt K737 LED mode ISO IEC 16022 grade Default Standard Options 0 Standard 1 ISO IEC 16022 grade In ISO IEC 16022 grade mode the LEDs represent the grade of the first Data Matrix symbol decoded in the read cycle The parameter to be graded is set in the ISO IEC 16022 Grade options For example to program the LEDs to indicate the ISO IEC 16022 print growth grade set LED Mode to ISO IEC 16022 Grade and set ISO IEC 16022 Grade to Print Growth If all the LEDs from 20 to 100
313. tions have not been met the read cycle will only end once it receives the first trigger after reaching the predetermined Number of Captures setting First trigger starts the read Captures on every trigger Capture cycle y y y Y la Read cycle ends on New Trigger or Timeout as Processing configured MS 4 Imager User Manual 5 19 Capture Timing Capture Timing Note Capture Timing applies only to Rapid Capture Mode Time Before First Capture Usage In almost any moving line application a time delay is needed to ensure that a symbol will be in the Imager s field of view at the beginning of the capture sequence Definition Time Before First Capture in a moving line application is the time between an external trigger event and the occurrence of the first capture Serial Cmd lt K242 time before 1st capture time between capture 1 and capture 2 Ume between capture 7 and capture 8 gt Default 0 Options 0 to 65535 2 097 seconds in 32 uS increments Start of Read Cycle vy m Time Before First Capture v Processing 5 20 MS 4 Imager User Manual Read Cycle Time Between Captures Usage Definition Serial Cmd Default Options This is useful in applications where more than one symbol can appear during a single read cycle multisymbol or where line speeds are slow enough that capt
314. to New Trigger the Imager will send the current symbol data immediately but only once A new symbol appearing in the Imager s range will be read and sent immediately provided it is not identical to the previous symbol Serial Cmd lt K200 1 gt Caution In automated environments Continuous Read 1 Output is not recommended because there is typically no reliable way to verify that a symbol was missed Note If Trigger Mode is set to Continuous Read 1 Output the Imager will behave as if Number of Symbols were set to 1 regardless of the user defined configuration MS 4 Imager User Manual 5 7 Trigger Mode and Duration External Level Initiate Read Cycle 1 i object 1 moving in front of the x detector beam causes a change in the trigger state oen which initiates the read cycle End Read Cycle AXE the same object moving out of Object ec the detector beam causes detector another change in the trigger B state which ends the read cycle Usage This mode is effective in an application where the speeds of the conveying apparatus are variable and the time the Imager spends reading each object is not predictable It also allows the user to determine if a No Read has occurred Definition External Level allows the read cycle active state to begin when a trigger change of state from an external sensing device is received The read cycle persists until the object moves out of the sensor range and t
315. tortion correction to apply When enabled this feature will cause the overall decode rate to increase significantly Note Processing time decreases with larger image sizes Usage lt K537 line speed symbol direction gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 to 80 inches per second Line Speed Additional Processing Time 10 sec 69 5 ms 20 sec 65 0 ms 30 sec 62 5 ms 40 sec 58 0 ms 60 sec 55 0 ms 80 sec 45 5 ms Distortion is corrected by shifting image rows in the direction opposite the symbol s movement on the line The shift value of subsequent image rows is then increased These shift values depend on the speed of the line The faster the line speed the greater the required shift values More data loss is incurred at faster line speeds The image shown below was captured at a line speed of 40 inches per second and it shows virtually no inherent skew The black area of the image is unusable since the information was lost as the symbol moved through the Imager s field of view The amount of data loss can be reduced by decreasing the image height or the row size of the image which reduces the amount of travel represented during the image frame read out Note that the amount of distortion will not be changed because the object will 10 30 MS 4 Imager User Manual Camera and IP Setup Symbol Direction Definition This feature specifies the direction the symbol is moving throug
316. tton 2 Drag your cursor horizontally across the image This will create a dashed horizontal line Pixel information and a visual representation of the dark and light pixels will be displayed below the image good_287_0 60 ms Evaluate Line Scan 1 Ll ilin When you center your cursor over the dashed line it becomes a double arrow cross This allows you to move the line anywhere in the window You can also use your keyboard arrows to move the line incrementally in any direction As with the histogram the line scan compares light and dark pixels but in a spatial distribution On the Y axis of the graph below 0 is black and 255 is white the X axis represents the horizontal axis of the symbol as described by the line scan White 255 Pixel Info Average N A Origin 0 0 Position N A Value N V M n e Mid Black 0 k hani taal P NUR When you click anywhere on the graph a vertical red line appears at that point and its position and value in terms of black to white are updated in the Pixel Info table to the left of the graph 237 in this example In addition a horizontal dashed red line is displayed that indicates the average value 10 8 MS 4 Imager User Manual Calibration Camera and IP Setup The Calibration interface in ESP is a powerful and intuitive way to optimize the Imager s performance It allows the user to control several complex simultaneous calibration operations
317. two different optical configurations available Standard Density and Low Density Determine the optics of your Imager and find the corresponding camera values in the following sections MS 4 Standard Density HD 1 0 mm Optics 3 Focal Distance Shutter Speed Usage Faster shutter speeds reduce blurring in faster applications Slower shutter speeds are useful in slower applications and lower contrast applications Definition This value sets the exposure or integration time for the image sensor pixels The shutter speed setting in relation to the speed of the object is critical If a slow shutter speed is selected to capture fast moving objects blurring or smearing of the image will occur As shutter speed is increased more light and gain become necessary because the pixels exposure time has decreased Serial Cmd K544 shutter speed gain Default 30 1 30 second Options 15 to 12 500 Gain Usage Can be used to adjust pixel grayscale values for readability Definition Sets the gain value for the image sensor This setting can be configured through autocalibration which is the recommended method A higher gain value will increase the brightness of the image but the visual noise reduction performance of the system is reduced Before configuring gain settings the desired shutter speed should already be set and the gain should be configured to optimize the shutter speed setting Serial Cmd K544 shutter speed gain gt Defaul
318. ty Definition When enabled the check digit character is read and compared along with the symbol data When disabled symbol data is sent without the check digit Note With Check Digit Output Status and an External or Serial trigger option enabled an invalid check digit calculation will cause a No Read message to be transmitted at the end of the read cycle Serial Cmd lt K470 status check digit status check digit output status large intercharacter gap fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length full ASCII set Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled MS 4 Imager User Manual 6 7 Code 39 Large Intercharacter Gap Code 39 Usage Definition Serial Cmd Default Options Large Intercharacter Gap is helpful for reading symbols that are printed out of specification Caution Do not use Large Intercharacter Gap with Narrow Margins enabled because a large intercharacter gap over 3x could cause a narrow margin 5x to be interpreted as an intercharacter gap When enabled the Imager can read symbols with gaps between symbol characters that exceed three times 3x the narrow element width lt K470 status check digit status check digit output status large intercharacter gap fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length full ASCII set Disabled 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Fixed Symbol Length Status Code 39 Definition Serial Cmd Default Options When enabled the Imager will check t
319. uality image files Object Info Output Disabled Grade Output Disabled Image Mode EZ Trax Output Disabled Comm Port Host Both Noread and Good Read v Image Format Disabled Determines which JPEG Quality Good Read read cycle condition Object Info Output Noread triggers image file Grade Output Both Noread and Good Read output Mismatch Image Format EZ Trax Output Enabled Comm Port Host Image Mode Disabled Compressed Y JPEG Quality Selects the format of the image Object Info Output Compressed output file Grade Output Disabled MS 4 Imager User Manual 7 51 Configuring EZ Trax Output JPEG Quality EZ Trax Output Enabled Comm Port Host Sets the amount of JPEG image Image Mode Disabled compression A value of1 represents Image Format seca the highest compression and lowest image quality and 100 represents JPEG Quality 30 1 100 z the lowest compression and highest Object Info Output Disabled image quality Grade Output Disabled Object Info Output EZ Trax Output Enabled Comm Port Host Image Mode Disabled Image Format Compressed If a symbol is decoded during JPEG Quality an an image capture the symbol type and other supplementary Object Info Output PP symbol information is also Grade Output Disabled included Enabled Grade Output EZ Trax Output Enabled Comm Port Host Image Mode Disabled Image Format Compressed J
320. uding any configured postamble or preamble data The read cycle will the check if image output is enabled and if the specified read cycle condition has been met If both these conditions are true the image file will be output to the user specified communication port in the user specified image file format Serial Cmd lt K739 image output mode communication port file format jpeg quality gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Good Read 2 No Read 3 No Read or Good Read 4 Mismatch Good Read If a Good Read condition is met during the read cycle the image file corresponding with the first Good Read will be output The image file will immediately follow the read cycle output and postambles For a Good Read condition to occur all symbols in the read cycle must qualify No Read If a No Read condition occurs during the read cycle the image file corresponding with the first No Read will output The image file will immediately follow the read cycle output and postambles There are conditions in which the read cycle may have a No Read condition but the image will not be output For example if the read cycle is looking for two No Read symbols in the same image capture but one is a Good Read the image will not be output because it is not considered a No Read image No Read or Good Read If a No Read condition or a Good Read condition occurs the first image of either kind will be output Mismatch If a Good Read occurs dur
321. ured frames might overlap or miss a symbol A time delay can be inserted between individual frame captures in Rapid Capture Mode lt K242 time before 1st capture time between captures time 1 time 2 time7 Entering Os will result in no time between captures Entering a different value in each field will vary the time delays accordingly Note You must enter time values along with comma separators for each field you want to change If you omit fields or enter only commas the fields will remain as previously set 0 0 to 65535 2 097 seconds in 32 uS increments Note Number of Captures and number of frame delays Time Between Captures must be the same Start of Read Cycle Time Delay Between Captures 0 DiagaamA il2i3ladls 6 ee ee soos sols End of 9 1 23145 Read Cycle Time Delay Between Captures varies Diagram B o L4 p l m MS 4 Imager Use r Manual 5 21 Image Processing Timeout Image Processing Timeout Caution Image Processing Timeout if not properly set can have a negative impact on good reads Usage Useful in higher speed applications where image processing time is long enough that not all captures have an opportunity to be processed Definition Specifies the maximum amount of time to process a captured image When the timeout expires the image processing is aborted This timeout works in both Rapid
322. utine Capture and Decode Test Stop MV DecodesperSecond Contrast Attribute Sa Vawe 5 When enabled shows the symbol in higher contrast Numb arol Symbols 1 than the default contrast SO value Symbol Data Microscan Symbol data and Test results are shown in this field 10 4 MS 4 Imager User Manual Evaluation In Evaluation you can view images currently in the Imager capture and decode a symbol save it as a digital file and perform histogram and line scan evaluations When you click on the Evaluation tab you will see the images that are currently stored in the Imager Click Receive to refresh this view Click Capture Decode to display the current stored image Only one capture and decode event will occur regardless of read cycle settings Click Read to trigger a read cycle If there is enough time in the read cycle up to 32 good reads or 6 full scale images can be captured and displayed depending on the size of the images and depending on the number enabled in Number of Captures under Capture Mode in the Camera Setup menu tree to the left of the tabs If you click Save the current image will be saved to the location of your choice Note An image can only be saved in the format in which it was uploaded to ESP JPEG images will be saved as jpg and bitmaps will be saved as bmp When you click the JPEG Image box notice that the Line Scan
323. uts In this configuration the EZ button will unlatch any logic outputs that have been latched Parameter Switch The parameter switch toggles between custom defaults and power on settings The condition is the same as that achieved by sending the lt Arc gt and lt Arp gt commands consecutively MS 4 Imager User Manual 7 25 EZ Button Default on Power On Definition When enabled if the EZ button is held down on power on the Imager will default to customer defaults and save for power on This is the same as sending a Zrc command Serial Cmd lt K770 global status default on power on load configuration data base save for power on gt Default Enabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Load Configuration Database Definition Allows the user to load the Configuration Database with calibration results When the user performs a calibration using the EZ button all the database entries are moved down one index and the results of the calibration are saved to index 0 The results will be saved as current settings as well Serial Cmd lt K770 global status default on power on load configuration data base save for power on gt Default Enabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Save for Power On Definition If enabled after calibration is complete all parameters will be saved for power on Serial Cmd K770 global status default on power on load configuration database save for power on gt Default Disabled Opt
324. ve current settings for power on lt Z gt Pav dun eon No S Save to Reader o Save current settings as customer default ex Send and Save No parameters for power on Customer Defaults for Power On ke fs Recall Microscan default parameters and 5 save for power on Sedo No No L Press and Recall customer default parameters and save lt Zre gt No hold while for power on powering on Imager a When you right click in a menu tree and select Default Current Menu Settings or Default All ESP Settings it is important to note that only ESP settings are defaulted To save these defaults to the reader itself you need to follow up with a Save to Reader Send and Save command b Only available in ESP if enabled under the Options pulldown menu Resets Resets A commands affect only the current settings active memory and are not saved for power on Saved for Power on Power on parameters Z commands are saved to NOVRAM and recalled and loaded into current parameters when power is cycled to the Imager or the lt Arp gt command is sent Defaults Defaults are Microscan firmware settings or saved customer settings that can be recalled either by software or hardware reset 13 18 MS 4 Imager User Manual Utilities Customer Default Parameters Customer default parameters saved by lt Zc gt are the same set of parameters as power on parameters but are saved in a different isolated section of NOVRAM
325. wever each pixel in a CMOS imager has its own individual amplifier integrated inside Connector A plug or socket on a device or cable providing in out connectivity for various circuits and pins Concentrator Intermediary device that relays data from imagers to a host and commands from the host to the imagers or other devices Counter Memory space allocated to keep track of imager events DAC See Digital to Analog Converter Daisy Chain Linkage of primary and secondary imagers allowing data to be relayed up to the host via auxiliary port connections Decode A Good Read The successful interpretation and output of the information encoded in a symbol Default Restores ROM or flash settings initializes serial commands and resets all counters Delimited A delimited command or field is bracketed by predefined characters Decode Rate The number of good reads per second ahieved by an imager Darkfield Illumination Lighting of objects surfaces or particles at very shallow or low angles so that light does not directly enter a reader s optical hardware Depth of Field The in focus range of an imaging system Measured from the distance behind an object to the distance in front of the object with all objects appearing in focus Diffused Lighting Scattered soft lighting from a wide variety of angles used to eliminate shadows and specular glints from profiled highly reflective surfaces Digital
326. wth print growth threshold output on axial non uniformity axial non uniformity threshold output on UEC UEC threshold Default Grade C Options 0 Grade A 1 Grade B 2 Grade C 3 Grade D MS 4 Imager User Manual 7 37 Diagnostic Output 1 Diagnostic Output 1 Note Output On under Output 1 Parameters must be set to Diagnostic Warning for this output to function Output 1 Parameters Output On Diagnostic Warning Under Output 1 Parameters expand the Diagnostics tree Diagnostics Service Unit Disabled Serial Cmd K790 unused 1 service unit Default 0 Options Disabled Service Unit When Diagnostic Warning is enabled the Output On configuration has no effect The output will remain active as long as one of the diagnostic warning conditions is met The output will become inactive once it detects that there are no diagnostic warning conditions Definition Allows the user to set up the output to toggle to active when the service timer has expired This condition will only be held for one service timer click Note This feature cannot be used if the Imager is ina Continuous Read mode Serial Cmd lt K790 unused 1 service unit Default 0 Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 7 38 MS 4 Imager User Manual I O Parameters Configurable Output 2 Note Output 2 has the same parameters and default settings as Output 1 Output 2 Parameters Output On Symbol Quality Output State Negative Pulse Wid
327. ycle when objects move past the reader at irregular intervals not timing dependent Definition New Trigger ends the current read cycle and initiates a new one when a new trigger occurs New Trigger refers only to a rising edge trigger With External Edge Serial Data or Serial Data or External Edge enabled an edge or serial trigger ends a read cycle and initiates the next read cycle In the case of External Level a falling edge trigger ends the read cycle but the next read cycle does not begin until the occurrence of the next rising edge trigger Timeout or New Trigger Usage Useful in applications that require an alternative way to end the read cycle For example if an assembly line should stop completely or the intervals between objects are highly irregular Definition Timeout or New Trigger is identical to Timeout except that a timeout ora new trigger whichever occurs first ends the read cycle Last Frame Usage Useful in applications in which the number of captures needed can be defined but the timeout duration varies Definition Last Frame only applies to Rapid Capture Mode Last Frame or New Trigger Usage Useful in applications in which line speeds are irregular and a new labelled object could appear before the last frame in a Rapid Capture sequence Definition Last Frame or New Trigger is identical to New Trigger except that a new trigger or last frame whichever occurs first ends the read cycle Read Cyc
328. zone symbol angle Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Matrix Size Data Matrix Only Definition Defines the symbol matrix size in number of pixels in both the x and y axis When enabled the matrix size value is appended to the symbol data Serial Cmd lt K710 percent cell damage total read time capture time locate time decode time pixels per element EC level matrix size quiet zone symbol angle gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 8 14 MS 4 Imager User Manual Symbol Quality Quiet Zone Data Matrix Only Definition When this feature is enabled the size of the quiet zone is evaluated and a PASS or FAIL message is appended to the symbol data Serial Cmd lt K710 percent cell damage total read time capture time locate time decode time pixels per element EC level matrix size quiet zone symbol angle gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Symbol Angle Data Matrix Only Definition When this feature is enabled the symbol orientation is appended to data output as a degree value representing the angle of the Data Matrix symbol s L shaped finder pattern relative to the Imager Serial Cmd K710 percent cell damage total read time capture time locate time decode time pixels per element ECC level matrix size quiet zone symbol angle Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled MS 4 Imager User Manual 8 15 Microscan Symbol Quality Output by E

MS-4 Imager User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents